Join MultiplyOpen a Free ShopSign InHelp
MultiplyLogo
SEARCH

From the Underside of History


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Apr 23, '12 10:36 PM for everyone

by Lope Coles Robredillo

 

 

HOW IS JOHN 1:1-18, the Prologue to the Gospel of John, to be interpreted?  The following essay is an attempt, from the point of view of contemporary scholarship in Catholicism and Protestantism, to answer that question.   Actually, this forms part of the notes I gave to my students while I was teaching New Testament exegesis at a graduate school of theology.  I am reproducing it without changes, with the caveat that it reflects the Johannine scholarship in the late 1990s, written as it was to make a synthesis of the Johannine research of that period. I am sure, however, that many who would like to have a deeper knowledge of St John’s Gospel will still find it useful.   Having read a few new works on John in this decade, I noted that there has not been much change in interpretation. This work has four parts: select bibliography, literary considerations, detailed interpretation of the prologue, and theological thrust.  A careful reading by one who is familiar with Johannine scholarship would point to the scholars, like R. Brown, C.K. Barrett, etc. to whom I am indebted and with whom I tend to take side in the interpretation.  At the end of the presentation is an excursus on the origin of the term “Logos.”

 

Bibliography

 

This select bibliography is intended to help students who wish to make a deeper study on the Prologue.  The works listed here, in English or in English translation, are those that they may find significant and useful.  [A] Commentaries on the Gospel According to John. [1] Barrett, C.K. The Gospel According to St John: An Introduction with Commentary and Notes on the Greek text. Philadelphia: Westminster, 1978. [2] Beasley-Murray, G. John. WBC: Waco, TX: Word, 1987. [3] Bernard, J. A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Gospel According to St John, 2 vols. ICC: T & T Clark, 1928. [4] Brown, R. The Gospel According to John, 2 vols. AB: New York: Doubleday, 1966-1970.  [5] Bultmann, R.  The Gospel of John.  Philadelphia: Westminster, 1971.  [6] Haenchen, E. Commentary on the Gospel of John, 2 vols.  Herm: Philadelphia: Fortress, 1984.  [7] Hoskyns, E. The Fourth Gospel. London: Faber and Faber, 1947.  [8] Lightfoot, R. H. St John’s Gospel: A Commentary. Oxford: Clarendon, 1956.  [8] Lindars, B.  The Gospel of John.  NCB: London: Marshall, Morgan & Scott, 1972.  [9] Sanders, J. N. and B. Mastin.  A Commentary on the Gospel According to St John. BNTC: London: A & C Black, 1968.  [10] Schnackenburg, R.  The Gospel According to St John, 3 vols. NTKNT: New York, Seabury, 1980-1982. [11] Westcott, B.F. The Gospel According to St John.  London: J Murray, 1982. 

 

[B] Studies on St John’s Prologue.  [1] Boismard, M.-E. St John’s Prologue.  Westminster: Newman, 1957. [2] Borgen, P. “Observations on the Targumic Character of the Prologue of John,” New Testament Studies 16 (1969-1970) 288-295. [3] ______. “The Logos Was the True Light: Contributions to the Interpretation of the Prologue of John,” Novum Testamentum 14 (1972) 115-130.  [4] Culpepper, R. “The Pivot of John’s Prologue,” New Testament Studies 27 (1980-1981) 1-31. [5] Deeks, David.  “The Prologue of St John’s Gospel,” Biblical Theology Bulletin 6 (1976) 62-78.  [6] Dodd, C.H. The Interpretation of the Fourth Gospel. Cambridge: University Press, 1953, 263-285; 294-296.  [7] _______. “The Prologue to the Fourth Gospel and Christian Worship,” in Studies in the Fourth Gospel.  Ed. F. L. Cross.  London: Mowbray, 1957, 9-22.  [8] Fuller, R.H. The Foundations of New Testament Christology.  London: Collins, 1965, 222-227.  [9] Hooker, M.D. “John the Baptist and the Johannine Prologue,” New Testament Studies 16 (1969-1970) 254-358.  [10] _________. “The Johannine Prologue and the Messianic Secret,” New Testament Studies 21 (1974-1875) 40-58.  [11] Jeremias, J. “The Revealing Word,” The Central Message of the New Testament.  London: SCM, 1965, 71-90.  [12] Kaseman, E. “The Structure and Purpose of the Prologue to John”s Gospel.” New Testament Questions of Today.  London: SCM, 1969, 138-167.  [13] King, J.S. “The Prologue of the First Gospel: Some Unresolved Problems,” Expository Times 86 (1975) 372-375. [14] McNamara, M. “Logos of the Fourth Gospel and the Memra of the Palestinian Targum (Ex. 12:42),” Expository Times 78 (1968) 115-117.  [15] O’Neill, J. “The Prologue to St John’s Gospel.’ Journal of Theological Studies, ns 20 (1969) 41-52.  [16] Risi, Mathias.  “John 1, 1-18.” Interpretation 31 (1977) 395-401.  [17] Robinson, J.A.T. “The Relation of the Prologue to the Gospel of St John.” New Testament Studies 9 (1962-1963) 120-129.  [18] Schillebeeckx, E. Christ: The Experience of Jesus as Lord.  New York: Crossroad, 1980, 351-358.  [19] Stanley, J. “The Structure of John’s Prologue: Its Implications for the Gospel Narrative Structure,” Catholic Biblical Quarterly 48 (1986) 241-264.  [20] Tobin, T. “The Prologue of John and Hellenistic Jewish Speculation.” Catholic Biblical Quarterly 52 (1990) 252-269.  [21] Vawter, B. “What Came to Be in Him Was Life (John 1:3b-4b,” Catholic Biblical Quarterly 25 (1963) 401-406.

 

Literary Considerations

 

            The Literary Character of the Prologue. Whereas Mark begins his account of Jesus with the work of John the Baptist (henceforth abbreviated JBap) and the baptism of Jesus (Mark 1:1-12), and Matthew and Luke with his conception and birth from a virgin (Matt 1-2; Luke 1-2), John opens his work with a Prologue (John 1:1-18), tracing the story of Jesus to the very bosom of God (1:1).  Originally, it is not impossible that the Prologue, as a literary unit, far from being a part of the Gospel, was an independent composition, most likely a hymn.  In the first place, it contains a highly poetic structure exhibiting climactic parallelism whereby a word prominent in one line is taken up in the next one.  Its poetic character may be compared with certain passages in Wisdom Literature (Prov 8:22-36; Sir 24:1-22; Wis 7:22-8:1), which have the regular form of Hebrew poetic character.  (On Hebrew poetry, see, inter alia, A. Berlin, “Parallelism,” The Anchor Bible Dictionary [New York: Doubleday, 1992] 5.155-162; N. Gottwald, “Poetry, Hebrew,” The Interpreter’s Dictionary of the Bible [Nashville: Abingdon, 1962] 3.829-838; A. Fitzgerald, “Hebrew Poetry,” The New Jerome Biblical Commentary [eds. R. Brown, J. Fitzmyer and R. Murphy; Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1990] 201-208).

 

            Secondly, it has theological concepts which do not recur in the rest of the Gospel (e.g., logos as a Christological title, charis, pleroma, etc.).  These observations led many scholars to conclude—quite divergent from the proposal by, e.g., C.K. Barrett (The Gospel According to John [Philadelphia: Westminster, 1978] 151) and P. Borgen (“Observations on the Targumic Character of the Prologue of John,” New Testament Studies 16 [1969-1970] 295) that the prologue is a united whole—that it is derived from a pre-existing hymn.  For instance, C. Burney (The Aramaic Origin of the Fourth Gospel [Oxford: Clarendon, 1922] 40-41) maintains that a retranslation of the Prologue into Aramaic reveals the form of the hymn consisting of eleven couplets.  R. Bultmann (The Gospel of John [Philadelphia: Westminster, 1971] 18) suggests that the source-text was a hymn of the JBaptist Community.  It is most reasonable to suppose, however, that the Prologue was a Christological hymn of the Johannine church, probably of liturgical origin.  The reason for this is that it shares a number of themes with the rest of the Gospel: pre-existence (1:1/17:5), the light of men and of the world (1:4;9/8:12; 9:5), opposition between light and darkness (1:5/3:19), seeing his glory (1:14/12:41), the only Son (1:14;18/3:16), no one has seen God except the Son (1:18/6:46).  Since all this correspondence has to be explained, to suggest that the Prologue was composed in Johannine circles seems reasonable enough.

 

            The Original Structure of the Prologue.  Among Johannine scholars, there is no consensus on which verses belonged to the original Johannine hymn, although a variant of the following outline would be common: v 1 [v 2], vv 3-4 [v 5], [v 9ab], [v 10ab], v 10c-11, v 12ab, v 14 a[b]c, v 16.  R. Schnackenburg (The Gospel According to St John [3 vols. HTKKNT; New York: Seabury, 1980-1982] 1.226-228) reconstructs the original hymn in four strophes: vv 1.3; 4.9; 10-11; 14.16.  For the nonce, it suffices to consider the reconstruction offered by R. Brown (The Gospel According to John, 2 vols. [AB 29; Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1966-1970] 1.3-4,22):

 

            First Strophe: The Word with God

 

                        1In the beginning was the Word;

                        the Word was in God’s presence

                        and the Word was God.

                        2He was present with God in the beginning.

 

            Second Strophe: The Word and Creation

 

                        3Through him all things came into being,

                        and apart from him not a thing came to be.

                        4That which had come to be in him was life,

                        and this life was the light of men.

                        5The light shines on in the darkness,

                        for the darkness did not overcome it.

 

            Third Strophe: The Word in the World

 

                        10He was in the world,

                        and the world was made by him,

yet the world did not recognize him.

                        11To his own he came,

                        yet his own people did not accept him.

                        12But all those who did accept him

                        he empowered to become God’s children.

 

            Fourth Strophe: The Community’s Share in the Word

 

                        14And the Word became flesh

                        and made his dwelling among us.

                        And we have seen his glory,

                        the glory of an only Son [coming] from the Father

                        filled with enduring love.

                        16And of his fullness

                        we have all had a share—

                        love in place of love.

 

To this hymn, two sets of texts have been added.  The first set consists of explanatory expansions of the lines of the hymn.  To explain how men became God’s children, the following were appended at the end of the third strophe: “That is, those who believe in his name—those who were begotten, not by blood, nor by carnal desire, nor by man’s desire, but by God” (vv 12c-13).  And to explain “Love in place of love,” the following were joined at the end of the fourth strophe: “For while the Law was a gift through Moses, this enduring love came through Jesus Christ.  No one has ever seen God; it is God the only Son, ever at the Father’s side, who has revealed him” (vv 17-18).  The second set of material pertains to JBap.  The first one, which was added at the end of the third strophe, before the treatment of the incarnation, consists of vv 6-9: “There was sent by God a man named John 7who came as a witness to testify to the light so that through him all men might believe—8but only to testify to the light, for he himself was not the light.  9The real light which gives light to every man was coming into the world.”  The second, interjected in the middle of the third stanza, consists of one verse (v15): “John testified to him by proclaiming: ‘This is he of whom I said, “The one who comes after me ranks ahead of me, for he existed before him”.’”  It is very likely that these originally formed the opening verses of the Gospel, but were eventually displaced when the Prologue was prefaced to the Gospel by the final redactor.

 

The Function of the Prologue.  As Bultmann (John, 13) points out, the Prologue is no introduction or forward in the usual sense of the word; it neither gives the indication of the content or the structure of what follows, nor does it tell why the author has set himself his task.  On the contrary, it forms a whole literary unit, and is complete in itself; it is not necessary for anything to follow.  If at all it is to be regarded as an introduction to the rest of the Gospel, it can be taken, pace Haenchen who claims it is a depiction of the history of salvation (Commentary on the Gospel of John, 2 vols.  Herm: Philadelphia: Fortress, 1984] 1. 139-140), only in the sense of an overture.  This comparison of the Prologue to an overture to an opera is apt, “since an overture is calculated to whet the appetite of the hearers, preparing them for the work to be presented and bringing together the themes developed in it” (G. Beasley-Murray, John [WBC 36; Waco, TX: Word, 1987] 5). Examples of themes that are developed in the Gospel include the pre-existence of the Son of God (John 17:5), the giving of the only Son in incarnation and death (3:16), his function as the light of the world (8:12) and its life (11:25), the manifestation of his glory (2:11), the unbelief of the world in face of it (12:41; 16:8-11), and the trust of those drawn by it (6:67-69; 12:31-32; 17:6-9).  Even the punch line in 1:14, which speaks of the reality of the incarnation of the Logos in humanity, has a fundamental connection with 20:20, “which records the intention of establishing that Jesus is the Christ and the Son of God, as confessed by Thomas” (Beasley-Murray, ibid.).

 

Detailed Exegesis of the Prologue

 

            First Strophe (The Word with God): 1In the beginning was the Word, the Word was in God’s presence, and the Word was God.  2He was present with God in the beginning.  John sets the Prologue in a cosmological framework.  By using the words in the beginning, he deliberately intends to recall Gen 1:1 and, in view of the parallel between Logos and Wisdom, alludes to Prov 8:22.  But in recalling these texts, reference is made not to the act of creation (for creation comes in v 3), but to “that which is ‘before’ all time, or, more correctly, that concerning which no temporal statement can be made” (G. Delling, “archo, ktl., in G. Kittel and G. Friedrich, eds. Theological Dictionary of the New Testament [henceforth, abbreviated TDNT], 10 vols. [Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1964-1976] 1.482), namely, the Word, who was with God and was God.  The pre-existence of the Word is reinforced by the use of was in the continuous sense, which is to be contrasted with the punctiliar tense (aorist) in v 3 (creation), v 6 (the appearance of JBap) and v 14 (incarnation); here, the verb is used in the sense that the events took place at determined points in time.  In the use of continuous tense, the evangelist underlines the eternity of the Word (Logos); the Word simply was, and there can never be speculation on how the Word came to be.  The word referred to, in the sense that John employs the term, is no other than the person of Jesus of Nazareth.  John, of course, does not make this explicit identification, but it is probably because this was familiar to his readers (cf 1 John 1; Rev 19:13).  According to Bultmann (John, 32), in saying in the beginning was the Word, it was John’s aim to show that “in the person and word of Jesus one does not encounter anything that has its origin in the world or time; the encounter is with the reality that lies beyond the world and time.”

 

            Pre-existent though he was, the Logos “existed as a hypostasis distinguishable from God” (C.H. Dodd, The Interpretation of the Fourth Gospel [Cambridge: University Press, 1953] 269).  The distinction between Logos and God is conveyed by the statement The Word was with God.  The Greek for with God is pros ton theon; and although pros can mean “in relation to”, it is most likely that the usage is not classical, but Koine, found, for instance, in Mark 6:3, and it means “in the presence of,” “in company with,” or simply “with” (Barrett, John, 155; see also B. Reicke, “prosTDNT 6 [1968] 722).  It is probable that John makes an allusion to Prov 8:30 (“beside him”) which speaks of Wisdom.  Since Judaism would have no difficulty in asserting that Wisdom existed along with God, it is possible that this notion is the root of John’s statement (Barrett, John, 155).  Of course, it is impossible to be more concrete about this relationship between the Father and the Word.

 

            It is not enough to say, however, that the Logos existed as a hypostasis distinguishable from God; what God was, the Logos was.  Hence, the statement and the Word was God.  There is thus no reference to subordination: the status of the Logos is one of equality with God—he was God (Bultmann, John, 33). Such a statement could not have been made in Judaism, which could go on so far as to say that Wisdom is God’s effulgence (Wisd 7:25) and Law his daughter.  In Greek, the word God has no article, and is treated as predicative: the Word is divine, but he is not all of divinity, for he has already been distinguished from another divine Person; cf. 7:28-29; 8:42; 16:28 (B. Vawter, “The Gospel According to John,” Jerome Biblical Commentary [Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1968] 2.422).  The absence of the article avoids a personal identification with the Father or the Hellenistic sense of a second God.  That it does not imply simply a divine being can be shown by the inclusions with 1:18 and 20:29, and by 10:20 and ch 17 (R. Russell, “St John,” A New Catholic Commentary on the Holy Scripture [London: Nelson, 1975] 1038).  Though v 2, which forms the last line of the strophe, is an inclusion and resumes v 1a.b in combined form, this is no mere repetition.  According to Barrett (John, 156), “the Word does not come to be with God; the Word is with God in the beginning.  Cf 17:5; at the ascension Jesus returns to the position of glory he occupied before creation.”  B. Lindars (The Gospel of John [NCB; London: Marshall, Morgan & Scott, 1972] 84) further suggests that v 1a.b is resumed to reinforce the timeless character of the Logos, and to prepare for the act of creation in the next verse.  “As the act of creation is performed by the utterance of God (Gen 1:3 “And God said”), the Word is not only essentially inseparable from God, but also proceeds from him in the creative act.”

 

            Second Strophe (The Word and Creation): 3Through him all things came into being, and apart from him not a thing came to be.  4That which had come to be in him was life, and this life was the light of men.  5The light shines on in the darkness, for the darkness did not overcome it.  The punctuation of vv 3-4a is a notorious crux: that which had come to be is sometimes attached to the end of v 3, or, alternatively, forms the beginning of v 4.  Although the use of the latter by the Arians and Macedonians to prove that the Holy Spirit was a created being led the orthodox to favor the first way of reading the sentence, the majority of early writers and most modern scholars consider the latter as the correct reading.  Firstly, the climactic or staircase parallelism of the lines requires that the end of one line should match the beginning of the next.  Moreover, this reading has a parallel in the Qumran documents (1QS 11:11: “And by His knowledge all has come to be, and by His thought, He directs all that is, and without Him not a thing is done [or made]” (Brown, John, 1.6).  But so much for the textual problems. 

 

With the second strophe, the evangelist now brings the reader to the sphere of creation.  This sphere is signified by the word panta, which is synonymous with kosmos, meaning, “the totality of all created things, of universal space and everything contained in it” (H. Sasse, “kosmeo, ktl.,” TDNT 3 [1965] 884.  John seems to continue his allusion to Gen by using egeneto (“came into being”), consistently employed to describe creation in the Septuagint [LXX] of Gen 1.  In John, the Logos is presented as the Mediator of creation (not an intermediary between God and creation, as though the Logos were a demiurge which, in Gnosticism, was responsible for the material [and hence, according to the Gnostics, evil] creation; Beasley-Murray, John, 11.  This is paralleled in Prov 3:30, 1QS 11:11; 1 Cor 8:6: “for there is one God, the Father, from whom all things come and for whom we live, and one Lord Jesus Christ, through whom everything was made and through whom we live”; see also Col 1:16; Heb 1:2 (Barrett, John, 156).  This belief has important implications (see Brown, John, 1.34). First, if creation is through the Word, then creation is an act of revelation (cf W. Howard, “The Gospel According to St John,” The Interpreter’s Bible [Nashville: Abingdon, 1952] 8.465-466).  Since creation bears the stamp of God’s Word, Wisd 13:1 and Rom 1:19-20 can claim that God is recognizable by men through creation.  Second, inasmuch as it was through the Word that all things came into being, Jesus, the Word, has a claim on all.  ThIs can be gleaned from the use of all in Rom 12:38: “For from him and through him and for him all things are.  To him be glory forever. Amen.”

 

That which had come to be in him was life admits of two readings: either that which had come to be was life in him or that which had come to be in him was life.  In the former reading, accepted by many modern scholars, along with Eusebius, Cyril of Alexandria and most Latin Fathers, the subject (that which had come to be) is taken in the same sense as the “all things” which came into being in v 3, namely, the whole of creation.  In the latter reading, the subject is narrowed down to a special creation of the Word, namely, men, and this seems to be the correct reading, since this is indicated by v 4b (“this life was the light of men”).  In effect, there is a progress from v 3 to v 4: the fact of creation is no longer in view; emphasis has shifted to what had came to be.  And the focus is on a special aspect of what had come to be, namely, what had come to be in the Word—the special creation of the Word.  Brown (John 1.26-27) suggests that at this point the evangelist makes a deliberate parallel to the opening chapters of Genesis.  As already noted, allusion was made to Gen in v 3, with the use of egeneto; this allusion is carried into vv 4-5 with the mention of light and darkness.  In Gen 1:2, darkness covered the abyss, and in Gen 1:3, light was God’s first creation.  Eternal life is also a theme in the creation account; for in Gen 2:9 and 3:22, mention is made of the tree of life whose fruit, if eaten, would make man live forever.  In Rev 22:2, the eternal life of the Garden of Eden prefigured the life that Jesus would give to men.  In John 6, Jesus speaks of the bread of life which, when eaten, will make man live forever—a bread, therefore, which has the same quality as the fruit of the tree of life in the Garden of Eden.  All this makes it clear that v 4 is still in the context of the creation narrative in Genesis.  Against this background, one may now understand the meaning of v 3—That which had come to be in God’s creative Word was the gift of eternal life.  Since the tree of life was closely associated with the tree of knowledge of good and evil, this life was the light (in a symbolism related to Gen 1:3) of men: man would have possessed eternal life and enlightenment had he survived the test.  And this implies that man can have life, as Bultmann (“zao, ktl.,” TDNT 2 [1964] 870) puts it, “by an apperceptive return to his origin in [Jesus] as the revelation of God.”

 

It is also against this Genesis creation account that v 5 may be understood.  Here, John uses the word katalambanein which has been translated by scholars in various ways: (a) to acknowledge or receive (so Beasley-Murray, John, 11); (b) to grasp in the sense of comprehension of faith (so Bultmann, John, 48; Conzelmann, “skotos, ktl.,” TDNT 7 [1971] 443; (c) to overcome (so G.Delling, “lambano, ktl.,” TDNT 4 [1967] 10; Lindars, John, 87; Russell, “St John,” 1039).  The use of katalambanein to mean “overcome” is found in John 12:35 (“darkness will come over you”).  It is most likely that John used the word in this sense, for aside from the fact that this is consistent with the theme of the opposition between light and darkness in the Johannine dualistic thought, this is paralleled in other literature.  In Wisd 7:29-30, Wisdom (whose concept in the OT is similar to the idea of the Word in the Prologue) is compared to a light that darkness cannot supplant; in Odes to Solomon 18:6, “That the light may not be overcome by the darkness”; and the Acts of Thomas speaks of a “light that has not been overcome.”  In v 5, then, what is spoken of is an attempt by darkness to overcome the light, and it is possible that this refers to the fall of man.  The fact that the verb katelaben is in the aorist tense, and therefore refers to a single past action lends support to this interpretation.  But the darkness did not overcome the light; the light shines on in darkness.  Even though man sinned, God gave him hope.  Though this verse is a clear allusion to the creation of light which shines out over the darkness of the primeval chaos (Gen 1:2-3), yet the writer has probably in mind God’s promise after the fall.  According to Gen 3:15, God put enmity between the serpent and the woman, and the serpent was not destined to overcome her offspring.  In particular, the seed of the woman—which refers to Jesus in the New Testament—would be victorious over Satan.  That this was the idea in the Johannine circles can be inferred from Rev 12 in which the victory of Jesus over the devil is pictured in terms of the victory of the woman’s child over the serpent (Brown, John 1.27).

 

Editor’s Addition (John the Baptist’s Witness to the Light): 6There was sent by God a man named John 7who came as a witness to testify to the light, so that through him all men might believe—8but only to testify to the light, for he himself was not the light. 9The real light which gives light to every man was coming into the world!  It should be recalled that the second strophe (just explained supra) dealt with the creation by the Word and the Word’s initial gift of life and light, and the attempt of darkness to overcome the light.  In the third strophe, the Word is described as coming into the world to defeat darkness.  But the redactor interrupts this flow of thought of the Logos hymn in order to present the testimony of JBap to the Light.  It is interesting to note that this prose comment interjected by the redactor begins with words typical of Hebrew narrative style for the opening of a prose.  1 Sam 1:1 begins: “There was a certain man from Ramthaim, Elkanah by name…” Cf Jdg 13:2; 19:1; Job 1:1.  This led some scholars (e.g., Boismard) to make the quite plausible claim that vv 6-7 were the original opening of the Gospel which was displaced when the Prologue was added (similarly, R. Fortuna, The Gospel of Signs: A Reconstruction of the Narrative Source Underlying the Fourth Gospel [Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1970] 163, 195.  Since light is ordinarily seen and consequently since there is no need to testify to it, it is probable that originally vv 6-7 spoke only of the testimony of JBap, and this was followed b y v 19 in which JBap testifies to those who are hostile and who have not yet seen Jesus.

 

In presenting JBap, the redactor makes the qualification that JBap was sent (from the verb apostellein) by God, just like Moses (Exod 3:10-15), the prophets (e.g., Isa 6:8; Jer 7:25) and Jesus himself (John 3:17 et passim).  “The work of John the Baptist derives significance only from the fact that he is sent” (Barrett, John, 159).  What was the purpose of his commission?  While the immediate purpose of his mission was to testify (martyrese) to the light, its ulterior object was that all men might believe (pisteusosin) through him.  Holding an important place in the Johannine thought, the word witness (martyrein, martyria) is used 46x in the Gospel and 18x in the Letters.  It is to be noted that in the Gospel, JBap (1:7-8.15.32.34; 3:26; 5:33), the Samaritan woman (4:39), the works of Jesus (5:36; 10:25), the Old Testament (5:39), the multitude (12:17), the Holy Spirit and the apostles (15:26-27), God the Father himself (5:[32] 37); 8:18) all bear witness to Jesus (Barrett, John, 159).  It appears, therefore, that in John’s handling of the gospel tradition, it is the chief function of the characters who figure in the story to give witness to the truth revealed in Jesus.  In fact, even the words and deeds of Jesus serve this purpose (5:36-47) (Lindars, John, 88).  It is not surprising, therefore, that the redactor cast JBap in a similar role: he is a special witness to Christ.  As already noted, the purpose of his witnessing was that all should believe.  The verb pisteuein—which occurs 98x in the Gospel and 9x in 1 John, as against 136x in the rest of the New Testament—expresses the essential relation to Jesus whereby men may have life which he brings (cf John 20:31).  Far from referring merely to an assent to propositions about Jesus, it is an active concept, denoting the orientation of the mind and heart toward him; hence, the frequent construction with eis, e.g., 1:12.  Like that of others who bear witness, the testimony of JBap is given to promote this active believing in Jesus (Lindars, John, 88).

 

V 8, which presents the mission of JBap in a negative form, serves to explain his relationship to the light.  Lindars (John, 88-89) calls attention to the fact that at 5:35, JBap is described thus: “He was the lamp, set aflame and burning bright, and for a while you exulted willingly in his light.”  Lindars suggests that this does not contradict the statement that JBap was a witness to the Light, for John has made it plain that the Light which shines through the prophets is a Light which is only received and passed on by them; it is in fact the Word of God.  However, since in the first edition of the Gospel, 5:35 already existed, the redactor repeated 1:7b in v 8 to guard against misinterpretation, possibly because of the apparent contradiction of 5:35.  That might well be.  But many scholars think that v 8 contains an anti-JBap polemic (e.g., Fortna, The Gospel of Signs, 165).  It should be noted that there were sectarians of JBap who must have survived well into the Christian era and become opponents of Christianity.  And though one cannot be certain that in the first century his followers revered JBap as the Messiah, yet, if one can depend on the evidence of the Pseudo-Clementine Recognitions I.54.8-9; 60.1-3, they seemed to have done so later on. Here, the sectarians stress that their master, not Jesus, was the Messiah.  It is not impossible that the early adherents of this sect claimed the title “Light” for JBap, and so, v 8, which subordinates JBap to Jesus, can be viewed as a refutation of the exaggerated claims made by the sectarians (Brown, John, 1.lxvii-lxx, 28, 464-47; see also H. Conzelmann, “phos, ktl.,” TDNT 9 [1974] 352; W. Grundmann, “chrio, ktl.,” TDNT 9 [1974] 566, n. 471).  But as Vawter (“John,” JBC, 2.422) puts it, “the polemical attitude is motivated not by the Baptist himself, but by the fact that his position had been misinterpreted by some who had not understood that he was the forerunner and not the inaugurator of God’s kingdom (cf Acts 19:1-7).”

 

Against the claim that JBap was the Light, the Johannine redactor affirms that the Logos is the real Light in v 9.  This statement, which picks up 1:4b and anticipates the next verse, is ambiguous in Greek.  The words coming into the world modify every man or true Light.  The KJV follows the first alternative: “That was the true Light, which lighteth every man that cometh into the world.”  In favor of this reading is the fact that “everyone coming into the world” is a rabbinic expression for man.  That is why Bultmann (John, 52) brackets the word man as a gloss on the phrase.  It seems, however, that the second alternative reading fits the context better.  Since in the next verse, the Light is in the world, it is therefore natural to suppose that it should previously be described as coming.  In other passages, Jesus “comes into the world” (6:14; 9:39; 11:27; 16:28); and at 12:46, Jesus says, “I have come to the world as its light” (Barrett, John, 160).  Moreover, John never uses “coming into the world” to describe men.  Finally, this reading is demanded by the interpretation of the contrast between v 8 and v 9—Jbap was not the Light; the real light was coming into the world (Brown, John, 1.10).

 

It is noteworthy that John describes the Logos as the real Light.  In John’s usage, alethinos is to be distinguished from alethes, which is used only of opinions, statements and those who hold or make them, and means simply veracious.  On the other hand, alethinos, though capable of bearing this meaning (4:37; [7:28;] [8:16;] 19:35), is more characteristically applied to light (1:9), worshippers of God (4:23), bread from heaven (6:32), the vine (15:1) and God himself (17:3; cf 7:29).  And the meaning is brought out clearly in the present passage—though JBap might be supposed a light (indeed, in a sense, he was the light, 5:35), but he was not the to alethenon phos, the Word, that is to say, real, authentic, genuine (Barrett, John, 160; see also Brown, John, 1.500-501).  Jesus is thus the light in the supreme and ultimate sense of the word; hence, the title is to be denied to any other being or object (E.Stauffer, “ego,” TDNT 1 [1964] 350; cf Conzelmann, “phos, ktl.,” TDNT 9 [1974] 352).  R. Bultmann (“aletheia, ktl.,” TDNT 1 [1964] 250) further suggests that genuine here means divine in contrast to human and earthly reality, and implies containing aletheia and therefore “dispensing revelation”. 

 

It is most likely that in describing the Logos as the real light which gives light to every man was coming into the world (here, kosmos means the world as the setting of the drama of salvation; see H. Sasse, “kosmeo, ktl.,” TDNT 3 [1965] 894), the redactor has in mind the messianic text from the prophet Isaiah.  In his description of the Prince of Peace, the prophet announces: “The people who walked in darkness have seen a great light; Upon those who dwelt in the land of gloom, a light has shone” (Isa 9:1).  In Deutero-Isaiah, Yahweh says of his servant: “I formed you and set you as a covenant of the people, a light for the nations... to bring out… from the dungeon those who live in darkness” (Isa 42:6).  And in Trito-Isaiah, the prophet speaks to Jerusalem: “Rise in splendor! Your light has come, the glory of the Lord shines upon you.  See, darkness covers the earth, and thick clouds cover the peoples; But upon you the Lord shines, and over you appears his glory.  Nations shall walk by your light” (Isa 80:1-3a).  Thus, the witness of JBap, who is the Isaian voice in the wilderness, is associated in the Prologue with the prophetic proclamation of the coming of the light.  Of course, in this association, John is not alone; Matt 5:16, for instance, applies Isa 9:1 to the ministry of Jesus (Brown, John, 1.28).

 

Third Strophe (The Word in the World): 10He was in the world and the world was made by him; yet the world did not recognize him.  11To his own he came, yet his own people did not accept him.  12But all those who did accept him he empowered to become God’s children.  (Editor’s addition: That is, those who believe in his name—13those who were begotten, not by blood, nor by carnal desire, nor by man’s desire, but by God.)  Many Johannine scholars think that this strophe picks up the theme in vv 4-5 on the light of revelation, this time traced in history.  Lindars (John, 78), for instance, explains: “First, it (or, rather, he, for the light is the Word conceived personally) came to the world in general, but went unrecognized.  Then, he made entry into his own people, i.e., the chosen people of Israel (again following a Wisdom model; cf Sir 24:7f), but was largely rejected.  But, as the light was never quenched, so some of the people did receive him.  The principle on which they were able to receive him is carefully explained.  It was not through human generation, as the selection of a special people might imply, but through the divine initiative meeting with the response of faith.”  (See also C.H.Dodd, Fourth Gospel, 281-282).  Though this interpretation has the advantage of seeing the climax in v 14, it is not without difficulties.  First, it implies that the redactor of the Prologue misunderstood the hymn in inserting the work of JBap before v 10.  Secondly, it runs against the fact that most of the phrases found in vv 10-12 occur in the Gospel as a description of Jesus’ ministry (3:10; 12:46; 8:5; 14:7; 16:3; 4:44; 12:37; 3:11; 5:43).  But even more decisive, it seems incredible that, in a hymn composed in Johannine circles, the ability to become a child of God would have been explained in a manner different from being born from above (3:5); the whole conversation of Jesus with Nicodemus would be unintelligible if the revelation of the Old Testament empowered men to become children of God.  It is more plausible, therefore, to regard the third strophe as dealing with the Word incarnate in the ministry of Jesus (Brown, John, 1.28-30).

 

How does the Prologue describe the ministry of Jesus?  John says that the Word was in the world.  By world John does not mean the cosmos or the totality of creation, but only that part of creation which is capable of response, namely, the world of men and human affairs, a world subject to sin and darkness.  That this is so is seen from the fact that in v 10, the world made through the Word is capable of knowing its Maker (Barrett, John, 161; Vawter, “John,” 423).  This identification of the world with the world of men (see Bultmann, John, 54; Conzelmann, “phos, ktl., TDNT 9 [1974] 351 and n.343) is clearly seen in 3:19: “the light came into the world,  but man loved darkness rather than light.”  Yet, this world of men did not recognize him.  The word recognize is used to translate the Greek ginoskein which, in John, “denotes emphatically the relationship to God and to Jesus as a personal fellowship in which each is decisively determined by the other in his own existence”; and also means “acceptance of the divine act of love in Jesus, and obedience to its demand” (R.Bultmann, “ginosko, ktl.,” TDNT 1 [1964] 711-712).   In this kind of knowledge, personal involvement is always presupposed and so it cannot simply mean to perceive, or to be aware of (Vawter, “John,” 423).  In other words, it implies a response to the source of revelation.  But the meaning of the statement that the world did not recognize him need not be restricted to the rejection of Jesus by men; it can also refer to the failure of the world to acknowledge the truth that God—through his creative Word—had made known in creation (Rom 1:18-23) (Vawter, “John,” 423).  The rejection of the Word by men in v 10 finds a parallel in the rejection of Wisdom in some Jewish literature: in Prov 8:31, Wisdom is delighted to be with men; but, according to Sir 15:7, worthless and haughty men reject Wisdom; and Enoch says plaintively: “Wisdom came to make her dwelling place among the children of men and found no dwelling place” (see Brown, John, 1.30, 522-523; Beasley-Murray, John, 12).

 

In v 11, the statement in v 10 becomes more specific: the activity of the Word is narrowed down to his own (ta idia) in the world, namely, the heritage of Israel, the Promised Land, Jerusalem (pace Bultmann [John, 56] who suggests that ta idia means “the world of men, which belongs to the Logos as its Creator”). That ta idia refers to the people of Israel may be seen from Exod 19:5 in which Israel is viewed as the people peculiarly “his own”—“you shall be my special possession, dearer to me than all other people.”  Moreover, this reference is expressed concretely in the second limb of the verse, hoi idioi, which is the same word, though in the masculine instead of neuter. 
That Jesus came to his own people obviously represents the sentiments of Matt 15:24 that Jesus was sent only to the lost sheep of the house of Israel. (For John, once the people outside the house of Israel, namely, the Gentiles, come to Jesus, that is a sign that “the Hour” has come [12:20-23]; see Brown, John 1.10.30).  But in coming to his own people, Jesus suffered rejection (see, e.g., the account of the rejection of Jesus at Nazareth in Mark 6:1-6).  In v 12, John makes a contrast with the statement in v 11, for he speaks of all who did accept him, that is to say, of those who received Christ in obedience and faith.  The relative clause all who did accept him (hosoi de elabon auton, lit. as many as received him), thrown to the beginning of the sentence as a nominativus pendens and resumed by the dative autois, is a grammatical structure common in John (27x).  The contrast between rejection in v 11 and acceptance in v 12 is also found in 3:31b-33: “The One who comes from heaven testifies to what he has seen and heard, but no one accepts his testimony. Whoever does accept this testimony certifies that God is truthful.”  Brown (John 1.19) suggests that vv 11-12 seem to be a summary of the two main divisions of the Gospel.  Whereas v 11 covers the Book of Signs (chh i-xii) which tells how Jesus came to his own land through a ministry in Galilee and Jerusalem, yet his own people did not accept him, v 12 covers the Book of Glory (chh xiii-xx) which contains Jesus’ words to those who did receive him and tells how he returned to the Father in order to give them the gift of life and make them God’s children.

 

The phrase he empowered to become God’s children (edoken autois exousian teknan theou genesthai) can be misleading, because of the use of the word exousia.  As M.E.Boismard (St John’s Prologue [Westminster: Newman, 1987] 42-43) observers, exouisa in John’s terminology refers to the exercise of real authority over anything, especially what touches on life and death (cf 10;18; see also W.Foerster, “exestin,” TDNT 2 [1964] 568).  Obviously, v 12 cannot be interpreted in this sense; otherwise, this would mean that those who accept Christ receive power to become children of God, i.e., receive full control of his divine life which comes to them from on high.  John could never have imagined that man could receive any power in respect to his life.  Bultmann (John, 57, n.3) is most likely right in suggesting that edoken exousian—this has no Semitic equivalent in the sense of authority—is an attempt to express the Semitic nathan (to give permission to do something).  In this sense, to become children of God remains a divine action, not human; it is wholly God’s work.  Being a child is a gift of God that man can only receive.  In Paul, the phrase children of God is used of Christians to express their relation to God through incorporation into Christ (Rom 8:16,21; 8:8), and it seems that this is basically the idea in the Gospel of John, in which it is used only twice (1:12; 11:52) (Lindars, John, 91).  It is interesting to note that unlike other New Testament writings (e.g., Matt 5:9; Gal 3:16), John preserves a vocabulary difference between children (tekna) of God and son (huios) of God; the latter is always used of Jesus, the former is used of Christians (John 1:12; 11:52; 1 John 3:1.2.10; 5.2), to emphasize the uniqueness of Jesus in his divine Sonship (F. Buchsel, “monogenes,” TNDT 4 [1967] 739-740; A. Oepke, “pais, ktl.,” TDNT 5 [1967] 653-654).  But it is in Johannine literature that our present state as God’s children on this earth is most clearly expressed: “Dearly beloved, we are God’s children now” (1 John 3:2) (Brown, John, 1.11).  P. Perkins (“The Gospel According to John,” The New Jerome Biblical Commentary [Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1990] 951) opines that the passage could have originally referred to Wisdom finding a dwelling in the souls of the righteous (e.g., Sir 1:9-10), but has been recast to reflect the soteriology of the Gospel (John 2:23; 3:18).

 

As already noted, those who believe in his name (v 12c) is an editorial addition to explain the meaning of receiving the Logos in v 12a, and so, practically speaking, both phrases have the same significance.  That v 12c is an addition can be argued from the fact that it breaks the rhythm of the line (Bultmann, John, 59, n.2).  That they express the same meaning is probably the reason why some of the Latin, Greek and Syriac Fathers and the Diatessaron seem to omit 12c, while a few Latin Fathers, Philoxenus of Mabbug and an Ethiopic witness omit 12a (Brown, John, 1.11).  While both phrases carry the same import, the phrase believing in his name “brings out more clearly that ‘believing in him’ is the recognition of that which is signified by his person, i.e., that he is the ‘son’, etc.” (Bultmann, John, 59, n.2).  To understand this significance, it should be recalled that in the Old Testament usage, the name is the revealed character of the person who bears it; cf. Amos 5:8.27, etc. (On the significance of names, see H. Bietenhard, “onoma, ktl.,” TDNT 5 [1967] 242-283].)  Thus, for instance, Yahweh acts “for the sake of his name,” i.e., according to his character.  To praise the name of the Lord (Ps 113:1) is to praise him for what he is in himself.  So, in later usage, the name easily passed into a periphrasis or circumlocution for God, in order to avoid pronouncing the ineffable name of Yahweh.  For this reason, it is not surprising that the Gospel of John simply says “believe in him,” although, admittedly, John uses “in his name” at 2:23; 3:18 (Lindars, John, 91).  Of course, the gloss is not without purpose.  It may have been placed “to stress that not only the original acceptance of Jesus (aorist in 12a) but also continued belief in him (present in 12c) entitled men to become children of God” (Brown, John, 1.11).

 

Like v 12c, v 13 is a gloss, as can be argued from the fact that the style is different from the clearly poetic stanzas of the hymn, and from the fact that it contains a strong apologetic motif, which is not true of the poetic verses (Brown, John, 1.11).  As a editorial comment, it was intended to eliminate the misunderstanding latent in the ambiguous word exousia and in the use of the birth metaphor (Lindars, John, 91-92), and, positively, to explain what it means to become children of God. For John, to become children of God is, as noted above, entirely the work of God.  In the words of Bultmann (John 60), “whatever Creation produces by its own efforts remains in its own sphere; eschatological existence is the gift of God.”  To accentuate the point that becoming a Christian does not involve a natural process of procreation but by virtue of an act of God (see Haenchen, John, 1.118), John makes a contrast by using three successive phrases about begetting: not by blood, nor by carnal desire, nor by man’s desire. John employs the plural form of blood (aimata) probably to refer to the Hebrew theory of conception—found in rabbinic sources—that the sperm of man is derived from his blood and mixes with the blood of the woman (cf J. Behm, “aima, aimatekxysia,” TDNT 1 [1964] 172-173).  Carnal desire translates the Greek thelema sarkos, lit., “the desire of the flesh;” and since this refers to man’s natural endowment, or to the principle of man’s natural birth (so E. Schweizer, “sarx, ktl.,” TDNT 7 [1971] 139), this can refer to man’s sexual desire.  This does not suggest, however, that flesh is inherently evil.  According to Schrenk (“thelo, ktl.,” TDNT 3 [195] 61), sexual desire or impulse is used here in the psychological and non-derogatory sense.  In biblical usage, though, it is applied to the createdness and therefore weakness of human or animal nature in contrast with God (cf Isa 31:3) (Lindars, John, 92; see also Conzelmann in K. Rengstorf, “semeion,” TDNT 7 [1971] 252,n. 301).  Nonetheless, for the same reason, it is sometimes thought of as allied to sin against God (1 John 2:16; frequent in Paul (Lindars, John, 92).  In the phrase desire of man (thelema andros), John obviously refers to the husband; otherwise, he would have used anthropos, which is the usual word for man.  In Hebrew understanding, the husband was looked on as the principal agent in generation; some considered the role of the woman as no more than a vessel for the embryo (Brown, John, 1.12); thus, the phrase has in view the initiative generally ascribed to the husband in sexual intercourse (Beasley-Murray, John, 13).  Lindars (John, 92) is of the opinion that the three phrases are virtually synonymous: “they cover the stages of reproduction in reverse order, in an attempt to trace it to its source: the forming of a child in the womb through the mixing of blood is preceded by sexual union, and this (in the masculine outlook on family life in NT times) goes back to the will of man to beget children.”  It is interesting to note that the threesome imagery is illustrated in Wisd 7:1b-2: “And in my mother’s womb I was molded into flesh in a ten-month’s period—body and blood, from the seed of man, and the pleasure that accompanies marriage.”

 

Fourth Strophe (The Community’s Share in the Word): 14And the Word became flesh and made his dwelling among us.  And we have seen his glory, the glory of an only Son coming from the Father, filled with enduring love.  16And of his fullness we have all had a share—love in place of love.  In this last strophe, which climaxes the Prologue’s portrayal of the Logos and contains the essential message of the Gospel, the community is introduced, and the meaning of the career of the Word in the life of the community is given poetic expression.  In particular, what was said in vv 10-11 is summarized and given more vital expression in v 14a.b, while the idea of becoming God’s children in v 12 is expressed in vv 14c-e and 16 by showing how the community shares in the fullness of God’s only Son (Brown, John, 1.30).  In saying that the Word became flesh, John goes beyond the Old Testament images of divine glory and Wisdom dwelling with Israel (Exod 25:8-9; Joel 3:17; Zech 2:10; Ezek 43:7; the name of God is to dwell with Israel forever; Sir 24:4. 8.10 (Perkins, “John,” NJBC, 951; cf Dodd, Fourth Gospel, 271).  In this revelation, God did not merely bear the form of man as a vesture, but became identical with it (E. Schweizer, “sarx, ktl.,” TDNT 7 [1971] 139).  But the utter newness of this revelation of the Logos, which is divine, consists precisely in its being allied with what is in contrast with it, namely, the flesh, which denotes “creatureliness in the whole breadth of its possibilities” (Conzelmann, in K. Rengstorf, “semeion,” TDNT 7 [1971] 252, n.351; see also Schnackenburg, John, 1.267.).  The unworthiness of the flesh is well captured by the sectaries in Qumran: “What being of flesh can do this, and what creature of clay has power to do such marvelous things, whereas he is in iniquity from his mother’s womb and in the sin of unfaithfulness till his old age?” (1 QH 4:29b-30b; A. Dupont-Sommer, The Essene Writings from Qumran [Gloucester, MA: Peter Smith, 1973] 213). Of course, flesh, as already noted, is not evil in itself; it is not the antithesis of God; nonetheless, it is all that is transitory, helpless, vain, imperfect, and at first glance incompatible with God.  Yet, as Vawter (“John,” JBC, 1.423) explains, “this is the tremendous mystery of the incarnation, by which the eternal Word took on our exact human nature, becoming one with us in everything except sin (Heb 4:15); in everything, that is, except what was incompatible with divinity.  This is one of the most serious and sobering statements in the Gospel, the magnitude of which it is impossible to exaggerate.  To express this mystery, John has deliberately chosen a word connoting man in his concrete, fallen nature.  That the Word became man in the fullest possible sense is of the very essence of the incarnation and of the redemption that is its result.”

 

Bultmann (John, 63) expresses the paradox of incarnation thus: “the offense of the gospel is brought out as strongly as possible by ho logos sarx egeneto.  For however much man may await and long for the event of revelation in the human sphere, he also quite clearly expects—and this shows the peculiar contradiction of man’s existence—that the Revelation will somehow have to give proof of itself, that it will in some way be recognizable.  The Revealer—although of course he must appear in human form—must also in some way appear as a shining, mysterious, fascinating figure, as a hero or theios anthropos as a miracle worker or mystagogue.  His humanity must be no more than a disguise: it must be transparent.  Men want to look away from the humanity, and see or sense the divinity, they want to penetrate the disguises—or they will expect humanity to be no more than the visualization or the “form” of the divine.  All such desires are cut short by the statement; the Word became flesh.  It is in his sheer humanity that he is the Revealer.  True, his own also see his doxa (v 14b); indeed, if I were not to be seen, there would be no grounds for speaking of revelation.  But this is the paradox which runs through the whole gospel: the doxa is not to be seen alongside the sarx, nor through the sarx as through a window; it is to be seen in the sarx and nowhere else.  If man wishes to see the doxa, then it is on the sarx that he must concentrate his attention, without allowing himself to fall a victim to appearances.  The revelation is present in a peculiar hiddenness.”

 

It is into this condition of human weakness, imperfection and transitoriness that the Logos made his dwelling (eskenosen, lit., pitched a tent, tabernacle) among (lit., in) us, and revealed his glory. Barrett (John, 165-166) thinks that John means no more than that the Word took up a temporary residence among men, while Stahlin (“xenos, ktl.,” TDNT 5 [1967] 28) stresses the idea of Jesus as a stranger in a tent.  It is probably more correct to say that the statement “is designed to show that this is the presence of the Eternal in time” (W. Michaelis, “skene, ktl.,” TDNT 7 [1971] 386).  The word skenoun evokes a number of ideas found in the Old Testament and it is almost beyond doubt that John has deliberately used the word to reproduce the Old Testament ideas.  Lindars (John, 94) suggests three possibilities.  (1) It alludes to Sir 24:8, in which Wisdom speaks: “Then the creator of all gave me his command, and he who formed me chose the spot for my tent (skenen), saying, ‘in Jacob make your dwelling (kataskenoson), in Israel your inheritance’.”  Like Wisdom, Jesus finds a home with the chosen people, making God known to them.  (2) It can also refer to the Tabernacle and the Temple of Jerusalem.  As Brown (John, 1.32-33) shows, the theme of “tenting” is found in Exod 25:8-9, where Israel is instructed to make a tent (the Tabernacle—skene) so God can dwell among his people; thus, the Tabernacle became the place of God’s localized presence on earth.  The theme occurs in Joel 3:17, Zech 2:10 and Ezek 43:7.  In the restored Temple, according to Ezekiel, God will dwell among his people for ever.  In saying that the Word dwelt among us, the Prologue proclaims that the flesh of Jesus Christ is the new localization of God’s presence on earth, and that Jesus is the replacement of the ancient Tabernacle.  In the Gospel, John presents Jesus as the replacement of the Temple of Jerusalem (2:19-22).  Since in Rev 21:3 John describes a great vision of heavenly Jerusalem in which a loud cry was heard, “This is God’s dwelling among men.  He shall dwell with them and they shall be his people, and he shall be their God who is always with them,” the Prologue’s presentation of the Word dwelling among us anticipates the divine presence which will be visible to men in the last days.  (3) It is also possible that the word may have been chosen for its affinity in sound to the Hebrew term of Mishnaic times, sekinah, a circumlocution for God which can be best translated as presence (of God among his people).  It is derived from the common Deuteronomic phrase “to make his name dwell there (viz., in the Temple)” (Deut 12:11, etc.)  Brown (John, 1.32-33) suggests the possibility that in the use of skenoun the Prologue reflects the idea that in the new covenant, Jesus is now the sekinah of God, the locus of contact between the Father and those men among whom it is his delight to be.  (For a similar idea, see G. Schrenk, “ieros, ktl.,” TDNT 3 [1965] 244).

 

The line And we have seen his glory (v 14c) is very likely only an extension of v 14b.  The reason for this is that in the Old Testament, the glory of God—doxa, which implies that which makes God impressive to man, the force of God’s self-manifestation (G. von Rad, “dokeo, ktl.,” TDNT 2 [1964] 238)—always accompanies his presence (Exod 33:22; Deut 5:21; 1 Kgs 8:11); and if the Prologue alludes to the Old Testament images of God’s presence in the Temple and Tabernacle, then the mention of glory in the present verse is easy to understand.  The connection of the glory of God with his presence in the Temple or Tabernacle is found in various texts.  In Exodus, when the Tabernacle or Dwelling was erected, “the cloud covered the meeting tent, and the glory of the Lord filled the Dwelling.  Moses could not enter the meeting tent, because the cloud settled down upon it and the glory of the Lord filled the Dwelling” (Exods 40:34-35).  During the dedication of the Temple of Solomon, “when the priests left the holy place, the cloud filled the temple of the Lord so that the priests could no longer minister because of the cloud, since the Lord’s glory had filled the temple of the Lord” (1 Kgs 8:10-11).  In Ezekiel’s vision of the restored Temple, he says that “when I looked, I saw the glory of the Lord filling the Lord’s temple and I fell prone” (Ezek 44:4).  In view of this, it is quite appropriate, according to Brown (John 1.34) “that, after the description of how the Word set up a Tabernacle among men in the flesh of Jesus, the Prologue should mention that his glory became visible.”

 

The phrase the glory of an only Son [coming] from the Father, filled with enduring love (v 14d.e) merely particularizes the glory made visible: it is the glory of an only Son, the glory which comes from the Father.  The Greek word used of only Son is monogenes which literally means “of a single (monos) kind (genos),” or “one unique in kind,” and which therefore emphasizes the uniqueness of Jesus.  In the KJV, this is rendered only begotten Son, under the influence of the Vulgate translation, unigenitus, which St Jerome used (see also 1:18; 3:16.18) to answer the Arian claim that Jesus was made, not begotten.  Of course, St Jerome translates the word as unicus where it was not applied to Jesus.  But, as P. Bucshel (“monogenes,” TDNT 4 [1967] 741) observes, monogenes denotes more than the uniqueness or incomparability of Jesus; it ultimately means “he is the only-begotten Son of God.”  The word coming is not in the Greek original, and it is supplied from the context.  The phrase para patros (from the Father) is ambiguous, and it can be paired with monogenes or with doxa.  It is likely that it goes with doxa if Johannine parallels are considered.  In 5:44, for example, Jesus says, “how can people like you believe, when you accept praise from one another, yet you do not seek the glory that comes from the One [God]?”  Hence, it can be said that the particular glory which John speaks of is the Son’s glory which comes from the Father.  According to Barrett (John, 166), the glory of God manifested in Jesus’ miracles (2:11; 11:4.40), “but in particular, he enjoyed a position of glory before the incarnation, and subsequently returned to it (17:5.24).  Jesus did not enjoy this glory because he sought it for himself, but because he sought only God’s glory (5:41; 7:18; 8:50), whereas other men sought their won (5:44; 12:43).  The glory of Jesus is thus dependent upon both his essential relation with God (1:14) and his obedience.  To this corresponds the special use of doxazein as a description of the death of Jesus (7:39; 12:16.23; 13:31f); Jesus dies as a Son of God and as an obedient servant; he is thereby lifted up on the cross and exalted to heaven.”

 

That glory is filled with enduring love (v 14e).  Here, too, the phrase further specifies the glory of the Son which comes from the Father (cf G. Delling, “pleres, ktl.,” TDNT 8 [1968] 285; also Bultmann, “aletheia, ktl.,” TDNT l [1964] 246), and it renders the Greek charis kai aletheia, lit., grace and truth.  These words seem to correspond to the Hebrew hesed we‘emet, which are characteristic of the God of Israel’s covenant.  These two Hebrew words are closely related in meaning, signifying “Gods’ loyalty and faithfulness to his covenant and covenant people” (Barrett, John, 167).  In Exod 34:6b, they appear together as a virtual definition of God: “the Lord, the Lord, a merciful and gracious God, slow to anger and rich in kindness and fidelity.”  hesed corresponds to God’s goodness or mercy in choosing Israel without any merit on her part, and to God’s expression of this love in the covenant; ‘emet, on the other hand, describes his fidelity to his promises.  And for the Jews, the Law of Moses, which is God’s Word, was a gift of God, revealing his hesed and ‘emet (Brown, John, 1.14; for a different opinion, see R. Bultmann, “aletheia, ktl.,” TDNT 1 [1964] 246, n.37). 

 

But in v 14, the Prologue applies this characteristic to the Incarnate Word.  There are two implications of this application. First, the hesed at Sinai where the Law was given, that is to say, God’s expression of his love in the old covenant, is now replaced by kindness and truth revealed in the new covenant of Jesus Christ.  Second, the idea of replacement is behind the words charis anti charistos in v 16 (on the meaning of “in place of,” see F. Buchshel, “anti,” TDNT 1 [1964] 372).  Of course, this expression can be translated “grace upon grace,” or “grace after grace,” to convey the idea of accumulation (so Lagrange, Bultmann, Barrett, Lindars, Delling, Conzelmann) or “grace for grace” to mean correspondence: the grace which constitutes our share corresponds to the grace of the Word (so Bernard, Robinson, Lacan).  But the translation of charis as reflecting hesed fits in with the meaning of replacement; thus, the original hymn ends with a triumphal proclamation of a new covenant replacing the Sinai covenant (Brown, John, 1.35; see G. Kittel, “lego,” TDNT 4 [1967] 134-135, who says that the content of the revelation given in Jesus replaces the Mosaic law, the Torah.)

 

The editorial comment in vv 17-18 (17For while the Law was a gift through Moses, this enduring love came through Jesus Christ.  18No one has ever seen God; it is God the only Son ever at the Father’s side, who has revealed him) serves to explain the idea in vv 14e and 16 by explicitly mentioning the two occasions of God’s demonstration of covenant love, namely, in the gift of the Law to Moses on Sinai and in Jesus Christ, and by spelling out the superiority of Jesus Christ’s enduring love.  V 17 is an example of antithetic parallelism in which the idea in the second line is posed as a contrast to the first; what is contrasted is “the enduring love shown in the Law with the supreme example of enduring love shown in Jesus” (Brown, John, 1.16).  In the Sinai covenant, God’s love for his people was expressed in the Law; thus, the Law was God’s gift to his people.  But, for John, Jesus Christ is superior to the Law; in fact, he would affirm later (5:46) that the Law was intended to guide to Jesus Christ.  As Russell (“St John,” NCCHS, 1036) puts it, “it is not the words of the Torah but his words which are spirit and life (6:63), life given by him, not by knowledge of Scriptures, 5:39f., cf. 24: 1QS 8:10. Not the law but Jesus makes men sons of God (1:12) and gives them peace, 20:19f.” (For a similar contrast, see also W.Gutbrod, “nomos, ktl.,” TDNT 4 [1967] 1083).

 

V 18, which further spells out the contrast, includes some inclusions with v 1: just as in v 1c the Word was God, in v 18b the only Son is called God (see below); and just as in v 1b the Word was in God’s presence, so in 18b the only Son is ever at the Father’s side (Brown, John, 1.36).  This passage explains the superiority of the charis kai aletheia in Jesus Christ against the background of Exod 33:19-23.  It was in the encounter of Moses with God at Sinai that the Law, which mediates the Word of God, was given, and yet, in that encounter, Moses was not allowed to see God: “I [Yahweh] will make all my beauty pass before you, and in your presence I will pronounce you my name, ‘Lord,’ I who show favors to whom I will, I who grant mercy to whom I will.  But my face you cannot see, for no man sees me and still lives” (Exod 33:19-20a).  All that Moses saw was God’s back (Exod 33:23a).  This view is consistent with the Old Testament assumption that God is invisible, or at least it is irreverent and unsafe to see him (cf Deut 4:12; Ps 97:2).  In Later Judaism, this developed to such a point that some of the anthromorphisms of the Old Testament were removed through paraphrases.  In the Targum, for instance, the words, “my eyes have seen the King, the Lord of hosts” (Isa 6:5a) was transformed into “…the glory of the shekinah of the King of the ages, the Lord of hosts” (Barrett, John, 169). 

 

Against this Old Testament background that Moses, the greatest representative of Israel, did not even see God, John holds up the example of Jesus who not only has seen God (John 6:46: “only the one who is from God has seen the Father”), but is even at the Father’s side (v 18b).  The phrase at the Father’s side translates the original Greek eis ton kolpon.  I. de la Potterie (“L’emploi de eis dans S. Jean et ses incidences theologigues,” Biblica 43 [1962] 366-387) argues that John does not use eis for the static en, and that eis indicates an active and vital relationship.  And since kolpos indicates affection, the phrase means that the Son enjoys the most intimate communion with the Father (see R. Meyer, “kolpos,” TDNT 3 [1965] 825; G. Stahlin, “phileo, ktl.,” TDNT 9 [1974] 131-132).  Indeed, their relationship is so close that the Son becomes the Revealer of the unseen God (cf John 14:9b); he is the authentic exposition of God to man.  God shares everything with his Son, and for this reason, Jesus can give what no man can, i.e., the fullest eye-witness account of God (F. Buchsel, “monogenes,” TDNT 4 [1967] 740).  God’s revelation in Jesus is therefore much superior to any revelation, including his revelation in the Old Testament.  And, as in John 14:6, Jesus is the only way of access to God (R. Bultmann, “aletheia,” TDNT 1 [1964] 246-247).  This is the reason for the phrase it is God the only Son… who has revealed him [i.e., the Father].  By way of additional comment, it may be remarked that although some versions, e.g., KJV, NIV, do not include the word God in this phrase, the best manuscripts and the older fathers have monogenes theos… ekeinos exegesato which is difficult but which, as E. Stauffer (“theos, ktl.,” TDNT 3 [1965] 105) remarks, “is to be maintained for this very reason.  This is a case of lectio difficilior probabilior.  See also R. Brown, “Does the New Testament Call Jesus God?” Theological Studies 28 (1965) 554.

 

Editor’s Addition (JBap Testifies to the Pre-Existence of Jesus): 15John testified to him by proclaiming, “This is he of whom I said, ‘The One who comes after me ranks ahead of me, for he existed before me.”  Like vv 6-9, v 15 is clearly an editorial addition to the original hymn, interrupting the sequence of v 14 and v 16.  Besides, the statement this is he of whom I said… is so illogical that it would not be other than an editorial addition.  It is curious that this verse is almost exactly similar to v 30; and Brown (John 1.35) suggests that the final redactor lifted the statement from v 30 to emphasize the theme of Jesus’ pre-existence (for he existed before me; for pre-existence as the meaning of protos, see W. Michaelis, “protos,” TDNT 6 [1968] 967, n.10).  In confirming v 14 with JBap’s testimony that Jesus is pre-existent, the redactor is obviously against any suggestion by the Baptist sectarians that JBap might be greater than Jesus because he began his ministry first.  Hence, the statement, the one who comes after me ranks ahead of me.  Says Beasley-Murray (John, 15): “The Messiah is superior to John in ‘might’ in that he has been accorded a priority of status (emprosthen mou gegonen) in accordance with his priority in time (protos mou en).  The Logos-Christ participates in the eternal priority of God.  The mixture of tenses in the saying reflects frequent citation: the past tense represents what John used to say, but the present martyrei (‘witnesses’) indicates that John’s testimony to Christ continues in the kerygma.  The pertinence here is its confirmation of the truth affirmed in v 14, along with the implicit rejection of any claim made on John’s behalf that he was greater than the Messiah Jesus (cf 1:6-8).”  But there is probably a theological purpose as well in the insertion of v 15.  For Schnackenburg (John 1.223), “the contemplation of the doxa of the Logos incarnate remains possible even for later believers through the ‘testimony’ of those who have experienced the event of his historical coming.”

 

Theological Thrust: The True Identity of Jesus the Christ

 

            Who is this earthly Jesus, this Man from Nazareth?  The Prologue is a proclamation—by and in the Johannine community—of the true identity of Jesus as Logos; and in trying to explain that identity, it relates the Logos with God, with the whole creation, with the world of men, and with the Jews and with the Christians. [1] The Logos and God. The Prologue affirms that the Logos is God’s self-expression and self-communication.  Being God’s Word, the Logos is pre-existent; even before the creation of the universe, he was already in existence with God as a divine Logos.  He partakes, in other words, in the nature of God.  What God was, the Logos was.  Because he was with the Father from eternity, he experienced the closest relationship ever possible with God.  On account of this, only he, the unique-in-kind Son of God, can reveal the Father the fullest possible degree. 

 

[2] The Logos and the Whole Creation.  It was through the Logos that the whole universe, including the living beings it contains, came into being. Without the Logos as creative Word, no physical life in the universe would have been possible, because he is its principle, source, meaning and purpose.  Furthermore, since there is life in the universe, this implies that the Logos continues to sustain the whole universe.

 

            [3] The Logos and the World of Men. The Logos, at the beginning of creation, wanted that man share his divine life with the Father, which is eternal life.  But instead of being guided by the light that comes from the Logos, man succumbed to the power of darkness.  Nevertheless, despite the fall of man and his rejection of God because of sin, the Logos continued to give him hope.  To bring some light to that hope, he spoke through Moses and the Prophets.  But finally, when the opportune time came, he became flesh in the person of Jesus of Nazareth, thereby becoming God’s revelation in the form of a human being.  He assumed the creatureliness and the transitoriness of human nature.  He revealed the Father fully and definitively in a human person. The eternal and temporal, the spiritual and the material, find their communion in the Word-made-flesh.  As a consequence, the historical localization of God’s presence and revelation is no longer the Law, the Temple or the Tabernacle, but the person, the humanity of the Man from Nazareth.

 

            [4] The Logos and the Jews.  The Logos localized his incarnation (his coming in the flesh) in the land of Israel; it was the people of Israel that God chose to reveal his Word to, and share his life with.  For this reason, he prepared them by sending Moses and the Prophets to proclaim the Logos to them and by giving them the gift of the covenant at Sinai.  Finally, he sent JBap as a light to witness to the Light of the Word so that all men in the world may be gathered into one community of the children of God, and receive eternal life through the Jewish nation.  However, many Jews who had received the gift, especially the leaders of the nation, rejected him. 

 

[5] The Logos and the Christians.  Despite the rejection, the Word found recipients who did accept the gift.  The glory of the Logos manifested in the flesh—but perceptible only by faith—was experienced by those who believed in his name; and by believing in him, they became children of God, and sharers in the overflowing grace and truth that come from the Logos’ glory.  This participation was generated not by any human process (e.g., by being a son of Abraham), but by the sole will of God (i.e., by being born from above), who offered that participation as a gift.  It was with these believers in his name—who eventually assumed the name Christians—that he established the new covenant expressed in the enduring love of Jesus Christ, replacing the old covenant expressed in the gift of the Law, given to the Jews through Moses.  In effect, man participates in God’s divine life, not through the Law, but through the Logos-made-flesh.

 

EXCURSUS: THE ORIGIN OF THE TERM “LOGOS”

 

SINCE THE GREEK term, Logos, is central to the Johannine Prologue, one important question must be faced: where did the Logos idea come from?  The term, usually translated word, admits a variety of meanings; it is a verbal noun from the verb lego which literally means to count or recount, and to say or to speak. In connection with the first meaning, it can mean computation, or reckoning; in some contexts, it may mean accounts, measure, or esteem.  Connected with the second, it may signify explanation, theory, rule of conduct, dialogue, conversation, saying (T. Tobin, “Logos,” Anchor Bible Dictionary [New York: Doubleday, 1992] 4.348; H. Liddell and R. Scott, A Greek-English Lexicon [Oxford: Clarendon, 1968] 1057-1059; W. Bauer, W. Arndt, F. Gingrich and F. Danker, A Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament [Chicago: University Press,1979] 1057-1059; A. Debrunner, O. Procksch, G. Kittel, G. Quell and G. Schrenk, “lego, logos, ktl.,” TDNT 4 [1967] 69-192).  Four suggestions—the first three of which are non-biblical—have been made to explain the source of John’s idea of the Logos.

 

It is sometimes suggested that the concept comes from Greek speculative thought.  In Hellenistic theistic system, the word can be used in an account of God’s self-revelation; his thought was communicated by his speech.  However, the word lent itself to pantheistic use, and for the earlier Stoics, the logos, other than which they had no god, was considered the rational principle in accordance with which the universe existed, and men, endowed with spermatikoi logoi in varying degrees, were bound to frame their lives.  In the fusion of the Stoicism and Platonism, a compromise was reached: the rational principle of the Stoic universe was the logos of God (Barrett, John, 152).  But, as R. Bultmann (Theology of the New Testament [2 vols.; New York: Scribner’s, 1951-1955] 2.64) observes, “the philosophical idea of logos as the rational orderliness of the divine cosmos is quite foreign to John.”

 

Philo Judaeus, a Jewish philosopher of Alexandria (ca.13 BC-AD 45) is sometimes suggested as source.  Under the influence of Old Testament and Hellenistic thought, Philo made frequent use of the term Logos to which he gave central place in his theological thought.  He derived the term from Stoic sources and, in accordance with his discovery of Greek thought in Hebrew Scriptures, made use of it to express the means whereby the transcendent God may be the Creator of the universe and the Revealer of himself to Moses and the Patriarchs.  On the Greek side, he equates the term with the Platonic concept of the world of ideas so that the Logos becomes both God’s plan and God’s power of creation.  On the Hebrew side, he identifies it with the Angel of the Lord and the Name of God, and is described by a variety of terms (High Priest, Steersman, Advocate, Son of God, etc.)  It is termed a second God and, on the other hand, described as the Ideal Man, the pattern of God’s earthly creation of man (A.F.Wall, “Logos,” The New Bible Dictionary [ed. J.D. Douglas; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1962] 744).  All this indicates that Philo uses the term far more widely than John.  But the philosophical idea of Logos as the rational orderliness of the divine cosmos is quite foreign to John (Bultmann, Theology, 2.64).  Moreover, Philo’s application of the term to man’s cognitive faculty blurs the distinction between the creator and the creature.  Even more important, there is in fact no evidence that John knows the works of Philo (Lindars, John, 83).

 

It is sometimes proposed that the term may have been derived from the Targumic use of memra (word), for when John cites scriptures, the citation is taken neither from the Hebrew or the LXX but from the Targums.  In the Targums, the memra of the Lord is not simply a translation, but a surrogate from God himself.  If, for instance, God says in Exod 3:12, “I will be with you,” this is transformed into “my memra will be your support,” in the Targum Onkelos.  The use of memra is therefore not a personification, but serves as a buffer for divine transcendence (Brown, John, 2.523-524.

 

Pace Bultmann (John, 20-21), it is most likely that the origin of the concept is to be traced not to extra-biblical sources, but to the Old Testament itself.  [a] In the first place, attention may be drawn to two groups of passages: creation passages and revelation passages.  In the former, the word of the Lord is creative (Gen 1:3.6.9; Ps 33:6, etc.); in the latter, the word of the Lord is the prophet’s message, that is, the means by which God communicates his purpose to his people (Jer 1:4; Ezek 1:3; Amos 3:1).  In all these, the word is not abstract but spoken and active (Barrett, John, 153).  [b] Second, it is plausible to suppose that the Jewish concept of Wisdom likewise exerted influence on the Prologue. (For striking similarities between certain propositions of the Prologue and passages in the Wisdom literature, see C.H. Dodd, The Interpretation of the Fourth Gospel [Cambridge: University Press, 1953] 274-275.  In Prov 8:22, God’s Wisdom has an independent existence in the presence of God and bears more relation to the created world.  Wisdom remains a blessed gift to man (Prov 8:34).  In the later Sapiential books, Wisdom becomes more and more a personal being standing by the side of God over against, but not unconcerned with, the created world.  Wisd 7:22, for instance, illustrates the cosmological and soteriological functions of Wisdom (Barrett, John, 153).*


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Mar 28, '12 2:03 AM for everyone

Commencement Address delivered by Msgr Lope C Robredillo, SThD, to the 2012 Graduates of Eastern Samar State University (ESSU), Guiuan Campus, on March 27, 2012

 

THE TITLE OF my commencement address is, “Combating Our Materialistic Culture.”  Let me begin with a common phenomenon.  Probably, no gadget is more popular among Filipinos than a cell phone.  Almost everybody has it.  People use it even while driving, eating, singing, and worshipping in church. I have known of graduating students who, having been asked what gift they expected from their parents, said that all they wanted was a cell phone of recent vintage.   Indeed, so many of us are so attached to it that we hardly part with it.  It is not rare to hear from the radio or TV of someone who was wounded or even killed in a hold-up for refusing to let go of his or her cell phone.  But a month or so ago, I got a surprise in my life.  I read from the internet about an Asian girl who surrendered her virginity in exchange of a new cell phone. 

 

A Materialistic Culture

 

It disturbed me.  I asked myself, “what kind of thinking goes with that?”  I do think that most girls value their virginity—but to swap it with a mere cell phone… what kind of hierarchy of values does one hold?  When has a cell phone become more valuable than one’s virginity, honor and good name?  This remains opaque to my understanding.   But on second thought, need we be taken by surprise?   This exchange is repeated every day.  It is an exchange that is redolent of prostitution.   We exchange our sacred vote during elections for a paltry sum.  We betray friends in exchange of cash.      We do not observe contracts in exchange of bribes.  We pad payrolls.  We kill for money.  Oh, the list is almost endless.  But all this points to one thing—what dominates us now is a materialistic culture.  That money or material good is the chief consideration in our employment, in our dealing with others, in our relations with our environment—this clearly indicates that our culture has succumbed to the temptation of materialism.

 

What is materialism?  In itself, materialism is a philosophy.  It holds that all phenomena can be explained in terms of matter.  Anything that happens, results from the conditions or activity of matter.  It denies the existence of spirit or of a transcendent realm.  The Greek Democritus was the first materialist philosopher, but it was Marx and Engels who shaped the modern world in terms of scientific materialism.  However, I will not go deeper into that.  I know this is not a lecture in philosophy, but a talk for graduating students.  I therefore focus on how this philosophy works in our present culture by pointing out areas of life where various aspects of materialism are palpable.

 

The first aspect of our existence has to do with [1] the definition of being human.  In a materialistic society, what counts is not who you are, but what you own.  Society does not give paramount place to your virtues like honesty, helpfulness and charity; its obsession is largely about possession.   You are defined by what you possess.   People will consider you important if you have seven dollar accounts in several banks, a vacation house in Boracay, a condo unit at Belaggio residences in Taguig and a number of establishments in Trinoma.  In addition, you have awesome powers, or proper connections so that even the long arm of the law cannot reach you.  I will not be surprised, therefore, if you, for example, a college student, want to have the latest cell phone model, a laptop, a Nike, a Louis Vuitton luggage and evening wear, and a branded T-shirt.  You are just flowing with the materialistic current.

 

Why?  It is because having these things, gives you a sense of self-worth.  You think you are notches above others because you have them.  You believe that people will think highly of you, and you will earn their respect, if you are a person of substantial wealth.   In other words, your dignity does not come from the fact that you are immortal, can think and reason, give and receive love, and know what is right and wrong, nor from the fact that, according to Christian teaching, you are a child of God.  No.  In a materialistic society, your dignity is directly proportional to the wealth you acquired.   That is how a materialistic culture looks at people.  Not surprisingly enough, there are so many young people who feel they are inferior to others because they have nothing to show off.  This is exacerbated by the attitude that some rich people have toward you—they tend to look down on you because you belong to a poor family, you do not have fine clothes, you cannot distinguish wine from spirits, nor the American accent from British one; you are a scum of the earth.  Naturally, you develop inferiority complex.  You begin to have a very low estimate of yourself.  You begin to think that you are less-than-others, unimportant, almost good for nothing.

 

[2] This brings us to the second area: Motivation.  Because society sees you in terms of what you possess, the most important drive is not love, faith or hope, but greed.  Selfishness becomes a virtue.  What is greed?  It is the inordinate desire for riches, status, and power.  In greed, you are not contented with what you have.  Your desire is to have more than what is needed.  The welfare of others never enters into your mind.  You are not your brother’s keeper.  That is why greedy people resort to means that normal society would consider sinful or illegal.  They steal millions from public or private institutions, they kill or do violence to those opposed to them, they resort to bribery in transactions, they manipulate people to their selfish ends, they betray even their friends, they harm the environment, they tell lies, and they hoard materials for profit purposes.  Thus, they have to acquire much wealth by hook or by crook.   In other words, when it comes to the question of the purpose of life, the answer is obvious.  It is neither to serve God nor to serve people, but to accumulate wealth in order to make life comfortable, without pain and suffering.  Life is about serving oneself.  Success in life is seen in terms of the superabundance of everything that wealth stands for.

 

[3] The third area has to do with the means in the acquisition of wealth.  Since what is all too decisive for a greedy person is that he gets what he wants, he does not ask whether what he is doing is morally right or morally wrong.  The sense of morality is the first victim of greed.  What is meant by morality?   It is about the rightness or wrongness of what we do.  Ideally, what we do should conform to standards that befit us in society.  Those standards could come from the laws of God, the laws of nature, and the laws of the community.  Thus, one should not steal because this goes against the Ten Commandments.  Unfortunately, though, a greedy person is a practical atheist—his practice does not show that he believes in God.  To the contrary, he believes only in himself.  Thus, he discards God’s laws.  For him, what ought to be one’s primary consideration is not whether his action is acceptable to moral people, but whether the means he uses achieve their purpose—the acquisition of wealth.   It is a sad commentary of our society that when we see evidence of unexplained wealth, we are no longer scandalized, nor do we bother to ask where it came from.  It is as if what matters, is that we have plenty of wealth, but we are not transparent of the manner it was acquired.  We praise to high heavens a “kuratsa” dancer who scattered peso bills to the wind, but we are never curious where he got them, in the first place.  Conscience has no use at all; anyway, everybody claims he has a clear conscience, even though his hands are clearly dirty.  For a materialistic person, the ultimate question is not whether an action is good or bad, but whether it is pragmatic—meaning in Tag-alog, “kikita ba tayo dyan? Magkano?”

 

A Hedonistic Culture

 

[4] This leads us to the fourth aspect—the destination of wealth: what is one to do with his substantial wealth?   If Christ were asked, the answer would be predictable: distribute your wealth those who do not have it.   That would make God, who loves the poor, happy.   But in a materialistic culture, there is only one answer to it: enjoy it.  Have a comfortable life.  What’s the point in amassing a great fortune, if it would only wind up in distribution?  No, you do not share your wealth.  You have to take pleasure even in its mere possession.   After all, people delight in exhibitions.  That is why, fashion shows, bikini open, parades, and display of legs are feasted on and never end.  Wealth must likewise be displayed, even if this cannot be explained.  Of course, few people take delight in simply looking at their passbooks.  Most would derive pleasure from exhibiting their humongous wealth in their expensive villas, cars, condos, vacation houses and unique collections.

 

But more than the satisfaction in the display of wealth is the gratification you derive from living luxuriously.  In general, people who are materialistic are essentially hedonistic.  Materialism always leads to hedonism.  What is hedonism?  Simply put, it is a philosophy that claims that the purpose of life is to maximize your net pleasure.  As the Hedonists would say, “eat and drink and be merry, for tomorrow you die.”  I read years ago that for a founder of sex magazine, the purpose of life is above all to enjoy sexual pleasure.  Since materialistic pleasures are bodily, it is not surprising that those who have money put a good investment in drinks, food and sex.  It is difficult to go bankrupt if your business caters to these, because people want them.  Just yesterday, the American ambassador to the country stood by his statement that 40% of male tourists to the Philippines come here for sex.   The production of beer, wine, spirits and other alcoholic beverages goes merrily on.  In 1996, it was estimated that French citizens drank 60 liters per person.  And when you go the 5-star hotels, you will notice how gourmet caters to the palate of the wealthy—there you have recipes that correspond to high quality premium foods.  No wonder, entertainers do not go out of business.  Of course, hedonism has its own expensive cost.  Though it is paid for by HIV, gonorrhea, syphilis, liver and heart diseases, the Hedonist nevertheless consoles himself that he has enjoyed life to the maximum.  As Samareños are wont to say, “bisan mamatay, basta butnga hin kalamay.”

 

But make no mistake about it.  This is not to say that those who are known to have succumbed to our materialistic culture are only those who now belong to the upper crust of our society.  Not quite.  The poor are no less engulfed.  The signs of materialism and hedonism are written all over.  Unhappy that they are deprived of wealth, many of them want to have a bonanza of moolah without working for it.  Just look at how poor people troop to lotto outlets, dreaming to win the jackpot!  Every day, people line up at the entrances of television stations with the hope that they could be the winner of the day in noontime shows!  Others rob banks, stage hold-ups, sale fake goods, purchase things with fake pesos or dollars, and even become prostitutes both literally and figuratively.  Thus, wealth without work, and wealth without morals are not a monopoly of the rich, but neither the poor nor the rich are bothered about wealth without work and morals.  Probably, the only difference is that, while the rich can bend or escape from the law, the poor wind up either in prison, or hospital, or in the cemetery.  There is thus much evidence to show that materialistic mentality has really swallowed up almost all of us.  But, since it is part of our culture, it is difficult to get away from it.  Indeed, every time I open the “Facebook”, I see traces of materialistic mentality and hedonistic attitude, uploaded and posted.  You can easily find them in what your friends want you to see in their own “Facebook” accounts.

 

Combating a Materialistic Culture

 

My dear graduates:  Our society is a morally damaged one.  Of course, there are a number of factors that help create it, but you cannot discount our materialistic mentality.  But, how do we combat such a mentality in our materialistic society?  Of course, it is difficult to alter it, but you can contribute to its transformation.  My challenge to you—and this is essence of my graduation message—can be summed up in three verbs: think, act, and remember.  And with this, I conclude my address.

 

[1] First, THINK.  Impress it upon your minds that what you are, is more important than what you have.  People are always more important than things.  What defines you is not what you possess, but your character.  A good name is better than wealth.  Such an outlook is an important beginning for understanding wealth and happiness.  Behind a great wealth, as the Russian writer Honore Balzac puts it, is a crime.  In a country where there are few who are rich, and many who are very poor, to be rich is scandalous.  To aspire to acquire enormous wealth is to become inhuman.   Nothing compares to a life characterized by integrity.  Those who think that wealth is everything have distorted values.  When values are distorted, orientation of life also becomes distorted.  Happiness in life does not come from distortions.  If you are a person of integrity, I know you will agree with me that happiness does not come from superfluity of goods.  Happiness lies within us.  It comes with tranquility of the soul and clear conscience.   If we admit that happiness lies within, then there is no reason for us to be enslaved to wealth.  A person who knows this has control of what he has.  He is able to survive and live within his means.  Such a person will not ever live under the illusion that wealth makes him. 

 

[2]Second, ACT.   Act on your needs, not on your wants.  Our needs are few, our wants cannot be counted.  Never confuse the two.  And, having known your needs, learn to prioritize them. What is beyond the necessities of life are not only superfluous; they are also unhealthy.  Too much power corrupts you; too much praise makes you conceited; too much bragging makes a big liar out of you; too much display makes you a hypocrite; too much cosmetics makes you ugly and phony; too much sex, food and drink destroys your body; too much merrymaking is dangerous to your health.  Except for love, keep everything in moderation.  More than moderating your greed, learn to live simply.  For this reason, never give in to an insatiable appetite for possessions—that would make you greedy and avaricious.  What you do not need, are no longer yours; they belong to others.  So, be charitable, give them to the poor who need them.  Never have the desire to discard goods, simply because something novel is available in the market.  Know how to save, conserve, preserve, reuse and repair.  Do not go into debts.  That you have plenty of debts is not always a sign that you lack money or are poor.  No, many times, it is a sign of selfishness and greed.  There is no substitute for a simple life.  What is superfluous is evil.

 

[3]Finally, REMEMBER.   Remember that how God looks at you, is more important than how people look at you.  We come from God, and to him we shall return.  The purpose of life is not to get rich, or to maximize our bodily pleasure.  The purpose of life is to make it in accord with the plan of God.  As Jesus himself said, what does it profit a man if he gains the whole world, but suffers the loss of his own soul?  Suppose, you are the richest person in Guiuan, or in Eastern Samar—so what?  Does that make you better than most people?  Does that improve your image before God?  Of course, how people regard us is important, but, always remember, the image they form about you does not last forever.  There is always an end to honor or fame.   Remember that on earth, life has an end, because it is meant for eternity.  You may be living a comfortable life right now, but it will not last—mapatay ka rin.  But after we die, when all of us face God at the last judgment, Christ will not ask how much wealth we have earned and accumulated, or how highly regarded we were by people because of our riches.  No, the ultimate question is how much we have loved other people.  Nothing compares to a life lived for others.  That is the kind of life that pleases God.  If there is any common denominator in the lives of Christ, Rizal, Lorenzo Ruiz, and Gandhi, it is that they are all men for others.  But for Christians, Christ’s life remains the ultimate model: “The Son of Man came not to be served, but to serve, and to give his life as a ransom for all” (Matt 20:28).

 

I have spoken.  Thank you for listening.


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Dec 31, '11 5:02 AM for everyone

 

by Lope C. Robredillo, SThD

 

IS THE HEART OF MAN in his weapons?  The statistics is staggering.  Despite all the effort to limit or abolish war, it seems that war is more normal than peace.   For instance, from 1496 AD to 1861, it is claimed that the world knew 3,130 years of war and only 227 years of peace.  From 1945 until the 1980s, there have been more than 150 conflicts throughout the world.  How normal war is could be gauged from the fact that that in the last 400 years, European nations, it is noted, have signed no less than 8,000 peace treaties.   One can easily recall Bernard Shaw’s observation in his play, “Man and Superman”: in the arts of life, man invents nothing; but in the arts of death—well, look at his inventions for murder and mass destruction; they become more sophisticated as years go by.  Nations continue to allot huge budget for their military storehouses.  If they are not in open war, they continue to engage in arms race, war of nerves, psychological warfare, war of ideology, cold war!  Who can blame Karl Marx for viewing history as a history of class warfare?

 

The Heart of Man Is Not in his Weapons

 

            For all that, however, the heart of man longs for peace.  That yearning is classically expressed by the Prophet Isaiah: “They shall beat their swords into plowshares and their spears into pruning hooks; one nation shall not raise the sword against another, nor shall they train for war again” (Isa 2:4).  Understandably enough, this hope for peace, this pining for a conflict-free human experience is central to all religions.  Jews expect the fulfillment of the divine promises about the final peace (cf Zec 9:9).  Christians affirm that when Jesus comes again, peace will be established (cf Col 3:15).  International peace is one of the 10 basic principles of Baha’i faith.  Buddhists look forward to world peace once it is established within individuals.

 

            Indeed, even ideologies accept peace as part of their goal.  Socialism, as well as communism, postulates that once the state withered away after a period of proletariat dictatorship, there will be a classless society where peace will be achieved.  In fact, even those who wage war have no other purpose than peace.  “For even they who make war,” writes Augustine of Hippo in his classic, City of God, “desire nothing but victory—desire, that is to say, to attain peace with glory  For what else is victory than the conquest of those who resist us? and when this is done, there is peace.  It is therefore with the desire for peace that wars are waged, even by those who take pleasure in exercising their warlike nature in command and battle.  And hence it is obvious that peace is the end sought for by war.  For every man seeks peace by waging war, but no man seeks war by making peace.  For even they who intentionally interrupt the peace in which they are living have no hatred of peace, but only wish it changed into a peace that suits them better.  They do not, therefore, wish to have no peace, but only one more to their mind.”

 

Powerful Nations Define Peace

 

            The problem then is not that the heart of man is in his weapon; the problem is that people are not willing to pay the price of real peace.  In most cases, nations approach peace in terms of self-interest. It is like the peace that obtains in the family because the man dominates his wife and children, or, among brothers and sisters, because the domineering brother imposes his will on the rest.  There is peace because the power of the strong remains unchallenged.  In his encyclical Centesimus annus, John Paul II analyzes it thus: “In a word, it is a question of transferring in the sphere of internal conflict between social groups the doctrine of ‘total war’, which the militarism and imperialism of that time brought to bear on international relations.  As a result of this doctrine, the search for a greater balance between the interests of various nations was replaced by attempts to impose the absolute domination of one’s own side through the destruction of the other’s side capacity to resist, using every possible means, not excluding the use of lies, terror tactics against citizens, weapons of utter destruction.”

 

            There is peace, in other words, because stronger nations weaken if not ruin others militarily and economically.  Nowhere is this more true than in the Philippines.  Since its independence in 1946, the country has been dependent on the US for its military supplies and, consequently, can be dictated upon whom to fight.  What Claro M Recto said in 1956 remains true: “In a polarized world of Giant Powers we can be described as totally unarmed… The result is that, whoever we depend on for arms necessarily is in a position to dictate to us why, when, how and against whom the arms are to be used.  Thus we are deprived of the sovereign right to determine who shall be our enemy or our friend or our ally.”   As for economy, Recto said that it was heavily dominated by aliens and not meant to develop to bring welfare to the common people.  Its economic policy, which remained colonial, “has for its basic objectives: to keep the Philippines the agricultural country that it has always been; and to attract to the Philippines foreign investments.”  This dependency state of the poor nation is ensured through the local elite that further the interest of foreigners.  In the end, it is the powerful nations that control the wealth of the smaller nations.  Thus, weakened both militarily and economically, other nations have scarcely any chance to fight the powerful.

 

            In this connection, John Paul II, in his encyclical Sollicitudo rei socialis, asserts that various mechanisms employed by powerful nations worsen the poverty of Third World nations: “One must denounce the existence of economic, financial and social mechanisms which, although they are manipulated by people, often function almost automatically, thus accentuating the situation of wealth for some and poverty for the rest.  These mechanisms, which are maneuvered directly or indirectly by the more developed countries, by their very functioning favor the interests of the people manipulating them.  But in the end they suffocate or condition the economies of the less developed countries.”

 

War of Nerves and Arms Race

 

But how is peace maintained among those who are powerful?  While on surface they are not at war, yet they are engaged in outdoing each other both militarily and economically.  Historically, what took shape was a cold war between powerful nations, led by the United States on one side, and by the former Union of Soviet Socialist Republics on the other side.  The war of nerves had the effect not only of preventing an open war between the two, but of dividing the Third World countries, which were too weak to fight the powerful, into two blocks, and which served as their puppets, almost capable of nothing except to bark or wag.  Russia had her Warsaw Pact, the US her NATO and SEATO.  But, while the cold war was beneficial to the rich nations, it further undermined the poor countries and made them dependent on the mighty.  Billions of dollars that should go to development were used in the production of arms, and dragged them into wars for which they should not have been involved in the first place.  The wars in Vietnam, Korea, Israel, Afghanistan, Congo, Kenya, are a few examples.  In these poor countries themselves, the ideological war between East and West is continuously waged, like the one between the government forces and the New People’s Army in the Philippines.

 

Arms race is the main strategy of this war of nerves.  Each side tries to outdo the other in terms of military superiority on the conviction that it assures desistance by the militarily inferior country in attacking its more powerful enemy, and therefore guarantees peace.  Which is why, although both the East and West have arsenal of arms that is enough to destroy humanity and the environment, they continue to spend trillions of dollars every year in order to ward off threat by the enemy.  Mutual assured destruction, which is possible under a nuclear war, guarantees peace between rich nations.  Besides, the arms race means good money and business for them, even though it impoverishes the poor nations that are caught up in the race, since what should go to development and uplift from misery are spent on arms.  Says John Paul II in Centesimus annus: “An insane arms race swallowed up the resources needed for the development of national economies and for assistance to the less developed nations.  Scientific and technological progress, which should have contributed to man’s well-being, was transformed into an instrument of war…  The logic of power blocs of empires… led into a situation in which controversies and disagreements among Third World countries were systematically aggravated and exploited in order to create difficulties for the adversary.”

 

Small Nations in the Face of Precarious Peace

 

In this kind of politics, only the powerful nations, it can be seen, would find the world peaceful, but almost nothing is experienced by the weak countries but year-round instability and poverty.  How then do the small nations, given their weakened position, respond to this precariously “peaceful” situation?   What are ants to do in a quarrel between elephants?  A recourse that presents itself is for the poor nations to align themselves with, and serve as satellites of, the powerful.   Here, for instance, one pursues a mendicant foreign policy.  As Recto eloquently noted after the war, “in the world of parliament of the United Nations, it is no more difficult to predict that the Philippines will vote with the American Union than that the Ukraine will vote with the Soviet Union.  American policy has found no more eloquent spokesman and zealous advocate, and Russian policy no louder critic and more resourceful opponent, than the Philippines.  Americans may disagree violently with their own foreign policy, but it has no better supporter than the Philippines.”

 

Another alternative would be to organize small countries against any form of domination by the powerful nations.  Recto, for instance, as early as 1954, envisaged an Asian solidarity “against colonialism in any form, political or economic, from whatever source and direction and by whosoever imposed upon an Asian nation.  And ‘Asia for Asians’ is the only principle they can understand because most of them are still suffering from the effects of the colonialism that first deprived them of the blessings of freedom a couple of centuries ago.”   In 1969, he envisioned Asian nations having mutual relations which could expand into a network of multi-lateral collaborations. “It will produce a truly united Asian bloc of nations which can be an effective force for peace and render valuable assistance to people who are still struggling for their freedom from foreign control.”

 

Given, however, the realities of the contemporary world, it is almost impossible not to be caught up in the overstretched and overwhelming power of the wealthy nations.  Still, some have a different way of looking at world realities and for them, peace resulting from the existence of a few powerful nations and of the many that are poor and weak is not real.  For them, a real one can come if these wealthy nations are toppled down.  Which is why, a new reality emerged: the phenomenon of international terrorism.  The fall of the twin towers in New York on Sept 11, 2001 was so far the loudest expression of that protest against the kind of peace defended by the powerful.  Unable to fight their enemy face to face, they resort to terrorism in retaliation for what they perceive as injustices done to the poorer nations.  Why most organized terrorists come from Arab countries may be an indication that for them the imperialist countries have for decades done them great injustice that has to be corrected if the world is going to experience authentic peace.

 

But others have recourse to another way to gain leverage with the powerful countries: go nuclear.  For possessing nuclear weapons, a nation may be hated, but she is definitely feared.  All know that a nuclear war would be devastating.  It will destroy not only military installations, but will kill millions through spread of radiation and contaminate large areas.  Since no one in his right mind would allow that to happen, as it result in the obliteration of this immoral civilization, no nation would ever wage a large scale war with a small that has nuclear weapons.  Thus, peace is assured. No wonder, less powerful nations like Iran, Iraq, North Korea and others lust after possession of weapons of mass destruction, thinking that once they acquire them, they would gain the respect of powerful nations.  (The only problem would be—what if an outlaw gets the nuclear bomb?  That would drive everybody scared, including the powerful!)

 

Anyway, such is the politics of peace that obtains in the present world.  But, in reality, it is merely the absence of a large scale war.  All over the world, there is war engaged in by two or three countries or war within the same country, but still a war that owes its origin to the unjust world order and, as a consequence, to the unjust order within the nation itself where there is no peace, because the needs of the many who are poor are not really addressed.   This is true of the Philippines.  As Time puts it in his cover story, “The War with No End,” “What is beyond dispute is that the government is in seemingly perpetual conflict with a significant portion of its population.  The NPA should be a cold war relict, a forgotten insurgency rotting away in the Southeast Asian jungle.  Instead—and despite its bloody purges, its ‘sparrow unit’ death squads, and its defunct ideology—it remains an enduring symbol of the failure of successive governments to improve the lives of ordinary Filipinos.”

 

Is Real World Peace Possible?

 

            Small wonder, then, that many people believe world peace is scarcely possible to achieve?   The British Philosopher, Bertrand Russell, is not alone in his skepticism of world peace: “After ages during which the earth produced harmless trilobites and butterflies, evolution progressed to the point at which it has generated Neros, Genghis Khans, and Hitlers.  This, however, I believe is a passing nightmare; in time, the earth will become again incapable of supporting life, and peace will return.”  Reinhold Niebuhr is similarly skeptic.  He thought that while individuals may be converted to peace, yet, the “immoral society” would never rid itself from the curse of war.  Indeed, the road to peace is complex and difficult, but because peace—not sword—is in the heart of man, it is possible and plausible.  Some scientists have observed that there is now a growing consciousness in the current generation that, unlike centuries before, does not accept war as a necessity or source of glory.

           

The Fundamental Principle: Humanity is One Family

 

            But where do we start?  As can be seen from the foregoing, the fundamental defect of the politics of peace in our time is that it is premised on greed, selfishness and self-interest—there is peace if my own country prevails and lives in peace, if my country reigns supreme, is sufficient in all its needs, and has access to the sources of what it wants, without having to be concerned that this entails domination, exploitation, destruction of other nations.  For this reason, the fundamental basis for real world peace is to think and act in terms of the whole humanity.

 

            Says John Paul II in one of his messages for World Day of Peace: “This seeking of peace must be based on the awareness that humanity, however much marred by sin, hatred, and violence, is called by God to be a single family.  This divine plan needs to be recognized and carried out through the search for harmonious relationships between individuals and peoples, in a culture where openness to the Transcendent, the promotion of the human person, and respect for the world of nature is shared by all.”  He continues: “There will be peace only to the extent that humanity as a whole rediscovers its fundamental calling to be one family, a family in which the dignity and rights of individuals—whatever their status, race, or religion—are accepted as prior and superior to any kind of difference or distinction. 

 

            He goes on: “For this to happen, a complete change of perspective will be needed: it is no longer the well-being of any one political, racial, or cultural community that must prevail, but rather the good of humanity, expressed in the recognition and respect for human rights, sanctioned by the Universal Declaration of Human Rights of 1948.  It is necessary, then, to abandon ideas and practices—often determined by powerful economic interests—the political, cultural, and institutional divisions and distinctions by which humanity is ordered and organized are legitimate insofar as they are compatible with membership in the one human family, and with the ethical and legal requirements which stem from this.”

 

            From a Buddhist perspective, the same fundamental basis of real world peace is echoed by the Dalai Lama in his article, “A Human Approach to World Peace”: “A universal humanitarian approach to world problems seems to be the only sound basis for world peace.  What does this mean?  We begin from the recognition… that all beings cherish happiness and do not want suffering.  It then becomes both morally wrong and pragmatically unwise to pursue one’s own happiness oblivious to the feelings and aspirations of all others who surround us as members of the same human family.  The wise course is to think of others also when pursuing our own happiness…. We are facing problems because people are concentrating only on their short-term, selfish interests, not thinking of the entire human family.  They are not thinking of the earth and the long term effects on universal life as a whole.”

 

            This principle is enormously important, and its significance cannot be overestimated.  If this fundamental basis is recognized, it will become clear why, for instance, an offense against human rights is an offense against humanity itself, why earth resources have a universal destination, why real peace is intertwined with the integral development of the poor and disadvantaged countries and why these countries have the right to share in the enjoyment of material goods, why disarmament is in accord with human solidarity, why the poor must be the agents of their own development, to mention a few.  Of course, an understanding of the consequences of this principle requires a change in our perspective.  But it will definitely imply a tectonic shift in the way we do the politics of world peace, if such peace is to satisfy the longings of man’s heart.*


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Jun 4, '11 4:14 PM for everyone

by Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD


TO THE PERCEPTION of many, Aquino’s election slogan “Kung walang corrupt, walang mahirap” so accurately described the state of the nation and its disastrous impact on the Filipinos that in no small amount it catapulted him to the presidency.  People had enough of the litany of alleged corruptions under the previous administration; and the immorality and the amount of money involved were mind-boggling: NBN-ZTE scandal, Hello Garci scandal, P738M fertilizer scam, P532M overprice of Macapagal Blvd, Nani Perez Power Plant deal, P1.3B poll automation contract, Northrail project, Garcia and other AFP Generals scandal, the results of the 2007 Mindanao elections, millions of bribe money to congressmen and governors in 2007,  Mindanao massacre, extra-judicial killings, violation of human rights, etc. And more recently, the NFA “legalized smuggling.”  These not only further plunged the poverty level of the country; they also robbed the body and soul of the nation.      

Will Aquino eradicate corruption?

To abolish corruption and replace it with “matuwid na landas” and uplift the people from the misery of poverty—what could be much better objective for a leader to pursue than that?   If PNoy now sits on the presidency, it is not so much because of what his party has done, but because of the power of the people who have grown tired about the allegations of corruption and fraudulence in the government, and the impunity of their perpetrators.  But now that he is the President, they expect him, and rightly so, to walk the talk.  But even at this point in time, many seem to be disappointed with his one-year performance.  Only recently, the SWS survey conducted between March 4 and 7, 2011 showed that his net satisfaction rating slipped from his +46 in November 2010 to +46.  Could this be an indication that in the perception of those surveyed, Aquino has yet to show tangible results?  Sen. Francis Pangilinan, himself a ranking official of the Liberal Party, was quoted to have said that the Palace should match campaign promises with concrete accomplishments, particularly with regard to poverty and corruption.  But the point is: will he be able to deliver the goods?

This question can only be answered if we have to take a good look at the corruption in the Philippines.  There is no doubt that the country is among the most corrupt in Asia, and corruption does not spare the highest government posts, obviously to the defraudation of the poor and retardation of development.   According to Political and Economic Risk Consultancy (PIRC) in 2011, the Philippines ranks third in Asia, after India and Indonesia.  For Transparency International (TI), the most corrupt countries are also the poorest.   Knowing the state of corruption of the country, it is quite natural for people to look for solutions.  Of course, popular wisdom says that to put an end to it, only untarnished candidates should be elected to lead the country, which is why people power preferred Aquino over others by a large margin.  For others, however, there should be a shift from Presidential to Parliamentary form of government.  Yet, our experience shows that from Quirino to Aquino, the corruption in the government went merrily on, despite the choice of not so corrupt—at least initially—candidates.   And as for change of government form, the Parliament (Batasan Pambansa) of Marcos has no records to show that it was less corrupt and more advantageous to the poor.  If anything, a parliamentary form in the Philippine experience is simply a different collar of the same rabid dog.

The real roots of corruption

Structural Root.  But why is the country so corrupt?  To really understand the anatomy of corruption, we have to analyze it against our socio-economic and politico-cultural structure and history.  As is typical of a largely agrarian society, ours is characterized by a majority who live in the countryside, living in real poverty, dependent on agricultural products, and a small percentage that live in luxury in the cities.  Estimates place the poor at 80%, the wealthy at 20%.  While the latter have power, privilege, and prestige, the former wallow in poverty, and find themselves taking up the burden of supporting the rich and the ruling class.  Many of those in the majority do not have the basic necessities of life and power to influence, and have scarcely received honor and privileges.  All they do is largely accept the word and explanation of the privileged minority on realities; hardly do they have any real participation on decisions that affect their own life as a class.  They are usually the victims in any attempt to question the system, and are practically left to themselves to survive.  Needless to state, such a social structure, which has persisted for centuries without any alteration, is a perfect environment for corruption to exist and prosper.  

The Government: An Instrument of Self-Aggradizement.  But quite apart from its structure roots, corruption exists and goes on because those at the top and the ruling class have a certain frame of mind that seems not to change.  From all indications, they seem to have a mentality that the state apparatus provides not the highest opportunity for service to the majority, but the greatest and highest means to self-aggrandizement, and so the primary aim of the existence of the class is to capture the state.  This is logical enough.  Those who control the state practically control the means to economic advancement.  That is why the political history of the country can be summarized as a history of the struggle among the richest families for the domination of the state apparatus, and not necessarily for the service of the constituents.  And one has to note that the struggle itself involves much corruption.  Of course, if history has anything to tell us, it is that the privileged class has yet to show that its actions are intended for the common good.  On the contrary, the wealthy endeavor to preserve their privileges and therefore their control of the state.  For this reason, elections, while the poor do participate in them, are nothing more than political exercises on who among the privileged families will control the state.  Victory in an election brings unprecedented wealth to the victors.  Few politicians or their retainers hold or leave their office without increasing their wealth.  And the increase in wealth—one has to ask: is this not tainted with corruption?

One remembers that when Arnold Clavio and Winnie Monsod interviewed Mikey Arroyo, their report showed that Mikey’s wealth increased from P5 M in 2002 to over P 70 M in 2005, or about 65 million in only three years.  At present, it is said that his declared wealth has reached a whopping P100 M.  Of course, the public wondered how he was able to accumulate such humongous riches in so short a time.  In a study made by Ibon Facts and Figures,  records indicate that from 2000 to 2008, former Pres. Arroyo’s declared net worth increased by 114% (from P20 M to 180 M); in other words, based on a year-on-year average, she added some P 10.97 M to her net worth every year.  Although Malacañang attempted to explain her statement of assets and liabilities by citing conjugal income and dividends, these have been questioned because, according to Ibon, “data from other sources aside from her undetailed SALN have yielded financial transactions, sales and ownership, and even the possible illegality of financial transactions.”

Within this frame of understanding of power and privilege, it is not difficult to see how corruption gets in.  Political power is really convertible to economic power.  Power brings about wealth, and with it, also corruption.  In their book, State and Society in the Philippines, Patricio Abinales and Donna Amorsolo, for instance, observe that as far back as the 1920s, our leaders began to use the state as an instrument of primitive accumulation, and largesse came from two sources: the state itself, and the extension of spoil system.  “Through the spoil system, Filipino politicians distributed offices (and their corresponding budgetary allocations) to relatives and appointees.  Political appointment of kin, allies, and cronies became standard practice. .. In exchange, an appointee facilitated the business success of his patron and protected other members of his network within the bureaucracy.”  In the extension of the spoil system, the vehicles were state corporations.  Osmeña, for instance, used appointments to the PNB offices to repay political debts, and it was later revealed that his appointees “authorized extravagant loans to companies in which the were themselves investors…[or] to finance personal consumptions, instead of production and commerce.”

Government Coffers as Private Possessions.  Coupled with this outlook is the attitude toward government funds.  It seems that for many among the privileged class, the money of the state is their personal possessions.  Or, least the distinction between public and private money is blurred.   Of course, who among the less privileged would dare to question the legality of the appropriation of money for personal use?  Practically, the powerful have enough instrumentalities under their control to stop any attempt to inquire into it.  All the poor do is see no evil.   According to David Timberman, in his book, A Changeless Land, this is a long-standing element of the political culture in the Philippines, but “it became much more pronounced under Marcos, because of his predilection to control virtually every aspect of society.  Thus, the resources of both the government and private sectors were viewed by the Marcoses as being available for their use.  The budgets of government ministries were regularly tapped to finance Imelda’s extravagant trips and parties, and businesses were expected to make contributions and/or offer shares of ownership to family members.”

While these forms of corruption may have the veneer of legality—and Marcos had a talent for it—a legal source of corruption is the pork barrel.  (Notice that the government does not provide an equivalent for those in the peasant class.)  Every year, each congressman is entitled to P70 M and each senator to P200 M.  Although projects for which the pork barrel that is given have already a particular government department to take care of them, yet legislators insist in keeping it.  Now rebaptized as Priority Development Assistance Fund (PDAF), the pork barrel is perceived to increase the wealth of its beneficiaries.  It is claimed that about half of the money appropriated for a government project is lost in the form of kickbacks to legislators, engineers, etc; only about half of the budget is actually used for the project designated.  But despite all recommendations to abolish the pork barrel, not a single administration has seriously considered it, simply because of the money involved and its use especially in keeping politicians in power.  The PDAF is thus enough proof that corruption will never disappear on the face of this country.

Weak Justice System?   What exacerbates corruption is the culture of impunity. Why are members of the ruling class able to get away with their misdeeds?  Why only the small fry goes to jail?  The reason is that not only many government agencies are under the control of the ruling class, but also because the corrupt functionaries are part of the structure that sustains the system and protect the ruling class from deprivation of their privileges.  To misquote a saying, “they may be sons of bitches, but they are the oligarchy’s sons of bitches!”  It is logical that in a corrupt society like the Philippines, the justice system could be weak, or never perceived to be in defense of the majority who are poor.  How would one prosecute the retainers if the trail would lead to the prosecution of a member of the ruling class?  Besides, if the leader is corrupt, how can he discipline his men about corruption?  No wonder, efforts to go after corrupt officials are perceived not get anywhere.  For instance, despite the fact that Benjamin Abalos and other Comelec officials were charged with graft and corruption for changing the Comelec bidding rules to favor Mega-Pacific, and despite the fact that in 2004 the Supreme Court declared the poll-automation contract between the Comelec and the Mega-Pacific null and void, the Office of the Ombudsman cleared those involved.

One is reminded of an account by David Wurfel in his book, Filipino Politics: Development and Decay.  In 1975, Marcos “pointed an accusing finger at those who had violated their ‘sacred trust’ and promptly announced the dismissal of over two thousand officials, including cabinet members, bureau chiefs, scores of judges and prosecutors, and many others.  The auditor general and the director of the Bureau of Internal Revenue were among them.  Most had no prior warning, and pandemonium broke loose in the bureaucracy.  When the dust cleared, however, it was discovered that many who were ‘dismissed’ had already retired or dead.  And many charges against the more influential were ‘discovered’ to have been ‘unfounded.’  Acute observers opined that those actually dismissed were those with poor connections.  The president’s promise of a purge of corrupt military officers was entirely forgotten.”    One gets the impression that all these government crusades against corruption are all for a show; nothing really substantial takes off.  After the show—that’s all, folks.

How to solve corruption

            This brief anatomy of corruption is probably enough to show that corruption is not simply about using public money for private use; its causes go back to our history as a nation and to the very structure of our society itself.  Against this background, one doubts whether P-Noy’s crusade against corruption will succeed if he simply limits himself to removing officials perceived or proven to be involved in corruption or in protecting the corrupt.  Such action may be spectacular, and win for him an increase in ratings of credibility, but without doing something that really involves fundamental changes, nothing could come out of it, no matter how sincere he is.  His effort is doomed to fail.  Something more fundamental has to happen to the gross inequality in our society.  The majority of our people have to be involved in making changes so running the government could be more equitably participative.  But this presupposes that the government is able to enhance a fluid social mobility of the majority, and provide access to opportunities largely monopolized by the elite in order to bridge the wide social gulf.   One must point out that the elite have long been leading the country since the Spanish times, and the situation has never improved; on the contrary, corruption has gotten all the worse.  Truth is, corruption is not the disease of our society; it is simply a symptom.  And it is irresponsible to make population the scapegoat of the disease.*

 


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Apr 20, '11 4:20 PM for everyone

 by Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD

 

 ALONGSIDE THE LITURGICAL celebrations that the Church observes during the Holy Week are practices which, in the Philippines, have long been linked with it. Among them are the siete palabras, the way of the cross, procession of images, salubong, pabasa, cenaculo, and penitencia. For most Catholics, they not only add color to the week-long celebrations, but are, in fact, so associated with the Holy Week that it could not be conceived without them. It is not seldom that devotees--if only for these folk rituals—would spend the Holy Week in Sta. Cruz (Marinduque), Palo (Leyte), Grotto (Novaliches), or in some remote town in Bicol or Pangasinan, rather than in their own parishes. Some, for example, may decline to attend the Good Friday liturgy, but they will certainly make an effort to witness penitentes reenact the crucifixion on that day. Indeed, it happens that these activities attract more people than the liturgical celebrations themselves. But since these practices belong to the extra-liturgical spiritual life of the Church, the question is often raised: how do you look at them a critical point of view?

 

            For the nonce, it may be well to focus on the pabasa, cenaculo, and penitencia, and, to start with, give a short description of these practices. Usually held at home, the pabasa is the singing of the life of Jesus in poetic form, called pasyon. Accompanied by a musical instrument, with the book placed between the two lighted candles, singers chant verses, oftentimes in alternation, before a crucifix. It is not uncommon for the host to serve drinks and finger foods during a pabasa. The cenaculo is the dramatization of the passion story, which normally begins with the scene of the agony in the garden, and ends with the crucifixion. It may take the form of simple passion play or a grand one similar to that of Oberammergau in Bavaria, where practically the whole village is involved in holding it once every ten years. Unlike the way of the cross which is aimed at meditating on the journey to Calvary, the penitencia seeks to dramatize the physical sufferings of Jesus bodily, either by physical flagellation, the carrying of a heavy cross, being crucified on it, or their combination. All of them are, objectively viewed, forms of participation in the suffering of Jesus: oral (pabasa), dramatic (cenaculo) and bodily (penitencia).

 

Expressions of Affective Faith

 

            It is instructive that whereas in the siete palabras, procession, salubong and the way of the cross, the priest ordinarily accompanies the participants, especially in the provinces, he is conspicuously absent in pabasa, cenaculo and penitencia. Of importance, however, is that these three rituals are basically meant for the edification of lay people. And they are held without having to be joined with the liturgical celebrations going on in the church. The priest has no role in them. They belong to the popular tradition. But they are originally aimed at participation in the celebrations of the mysteries of redemption. If these observations have anything to tell us, it is that these rituals are expressions of the people’s affective faith, which scarcely finds place in the official worship in the Church. In effect, it may be said that these popular practices are expressions of the lay people’s affective dimension of faith and at the same time are catered to it. They enhance religious affections and feelings. In the chanting of the pasyon, it sometimes happens that singers, swept by their emotion as they sing the poetic lines, shed tears; in the cenaculo, the participants become emotionally involved as they dramatize the events surrounding Jesus’ death; and in the penitencia, they are able to empathize with him in his pain. On the other hand, Roman liturgy is sober and reticent, and such emotion experience has scarcely any place for expression in it.

 

            At the same time, however, they also externalize the people’s understanding of the faith. Of course, the lay people did not compose the pasyon; priests did. Most likely too, they did not, at the beginning, write the script of the cenaculo; but they make the oral and dramatic expressions, and obviously, having been written for them, these influence their ways of thinking and acting. For this reason, it is not surprising, indeed, that in most cases, their knowledge of who Jesus is and his salvific work shows a familiarity more with the pasyon and the drama than with the gospels or the official Christology and soteriology of the Church. Moreover, today, the script of the cenaculo is being written by laymen and, although priests are consulted, the over-all outcome mirrors the understanding of lay people. But this is especially true of penitencia. Though its roots may be traced to the practice of doing penance during Lent, it expresses the lay people’s faith in what participation in the suffering of Jesus must consist of. The rituals, in the other words, are a vehicle which expresses the faith experiences of the participants, but at the same time serving to call that faith to mind, and to catechize their audience in that faith.

 

Reason for Attractiveness

 

            That these rituals (particularly the cenaculo and the penitencia) attract more people than the liturgical celebrations has at least four significations. First, this indicates their success, at least in catering to the affective dimension of their faith, and the understanding of that faith. In other words, they are able to speak to the needs of the lay people. Unhampered by liturgical discipline, they undergo changes and additions as they develop and flourish in response to those needs. For this reason, they are meaningful to them. The second implication is simply the reverse of the first. These rituals may also be interpreted as an expression of their disaffection from the official Church liturgy. For lay people, it is difficult to appropriate the meaning of the prayers and the action of the official liturgy. Hence, they feel the need for a ritual in order to plug in to the reticent liturgical celebration. A case in point is the holding of hands during singing of the Lord’s Prayer. Although it is against liturgical norms to do so, people in Manila make that gesture because, as someone said, it feels good. More should be said of this, but the point is, there is wisdom in the proposition that liturgy should not be foreign to the affective dimension of the people’s faith.

 

            Moreover, the lay people have been estranged from the official liturgy because, before the Second Vatican Council, they had a little chance--save for cantoras--to take an active part in the liturgy. They were simply spectators, who could not understand the meaning of the words and gesture in the liturgy. Third, in these folk rituals, the lay people are, on the contrary, the subject of the expressions of faith experiences, not merely the recipients or onlookers of the celebrations. And the medium of expression is the language they speak and are at home with. On the other hand, that of the liturgy before, which was Latin, was opaque to their understanding. Hence, they could never comprehend nor feel for themselves the meaning of the celebrations. And fourth, on account of all this, the rituals provide them identity.

 

Environment of Poverty

 

            The aspect of disenfranchisement brings the discussion to the social location which these religious practices presuppose: an environment of poverty. In general, those who take part in pabasa, who are involved in the cenaculo, and who engage in bodily flagellation do not came from the middle class or above it. They belong to the lower classes–those often alienated from the official liturgy. Even today, they are, in many areas, still disenfranchised, because they are not given opportunities to take an active part and express their faith in parish celebrations to a degree which these rituals allow. (Eucharistic celebrations in which members of charismatic communities are able to express themselves emotionally are an exception rather than the rule.)  Quite apart from the gulf created between the language of the liturgy and that of the poor people, the common values which these practices represent are the pain and the suffering which Jesus endured until death, and people who are poor easily understand and identify themselves with these values. Hence, solidarity in values also accounts for the popularity of these rituals in an environment of poverty. The crucifixion for them is God’s empathy from which they can derive strength and inspiration. Clearly then, these rituals speak something of the part of society or the environment in which they thrive.

 

Encounter between Faith and Culture

 

            Their practitioners to some extend cut off from the official Church, and coming from the grass roots, these rituals--it is the whole understandable--reflect an understanding which is the outcome of the encounter between the Christian faith, which they received with much limitations, and the culture in which they were brought up. They presuppose an environment removed from the centers of religion and politics. Before the coming of the Spanish missionaries, our forefathers believed in animism. Here, it was taught that the forces of nature were controlled by spirits who, by magical rituals, could be rendered beneficent or harmful. These were performed by the diwatahan, tambalan or baylana. If Holy Week folk rituals have anything to tell us, it is the animism has not been completely erased from the Filipino psyche. If one makes a survey on those who join in the cenaculo, for example, he will discover that the motive for participation is not simply to share the suffering of Christ, if at all; some likely answers are: fulfillment of a promise, thanksgiving for a favor granted, or reparation for sins.

 

            In a study made on the penitentes of Palo, Leyte, it emerged that fear of punishment was among the motives for submitting oneself to penitencia. The fear of punishment for doing something wrong the year round motivates a person to placate an angry God. By experiencing pain, one assures himself of forgiveness, escape from punishment, and peace of mind. Nonetheless, this is actually an animist theology, though one cannot blame the devotees .They probably have never been thought correct theology, or have correctly understood it, in the first place. On the other hand, the environment of poverty prevents them from having access to opportunities to learning orthodoxy. Hence, the theology of these rituals does not perfectly cohere with the official teaching of the Church. On the contrary, it represents the result of the people’s appropriation of the gospel message vis-à-vis their pre-Hispanic culture and their situation of poverty.

 

            Which brings us to other shadows of these rituals. Alienated from the centers of Catholic authority and life, they are in danger, among others, of being engaged in for utilitarian purposes.  That one participates in self flagellation to obtain God’s forgiveness values the ritual for what the subject can obtain from it. This borders on superstitions, which nurtures the belief that as long as one engages in the ritual, he will be safe, for example, from calamities. This is true of other expressions of popular piety which are celebrated in connection with liturgy. For instance, although a procession is designed as a public witness to the faith, this is not how lay people take it. In many cases, they do not participate in it for that end. That one takes part in it so his illness will be cured, or so his son will reform his life–motives like these are very common. It fact during fiestas in rural areas, many residents will complain if the conduct of the procession excludes their houses from its ambit, convinced as they are that this will also bar them from receiving the graces that are obtained through the intercession of their patron saint.

 

Subjectivism and Lack of Ecclesial Sense

 

            Related to this is the risk that these rituals are anchored on subjectivism. As already noted, one reason for the popularity of a Holy Week ritual is that it caters to the people’s affective needs. Because it is in touch with their feelings, it makes them satisfied. But there is a danger in thinking that what satisfies is good. That is subjectivism. In official liturgy, of course, this is not supposed to happen, because liturgical signs have their own meaning. That is why the Congregation for Divine Worship and the Discipline of Sacraments, for example, forbids the raising of hands during the Lord’s Prayer because this gesture symbolizes communion.  At any rate, lay people continue the practice because they feel good doing it. But it is precisely the role of liturgy to educate us in such a way we are able to express the meaning of liturgical gestures as our own, and so enter into the mystery of God and our own as a community. This frees liturgy from the danger of subjectivism. On other hand, since lay people engage in Holy Week folk rituals because they make them feel good and satisfy their affective needs, they do not lead to a real participation in the saving mystery.

 

            In addition, these rituals hardly promote a sense of belonging to the Church. Because they focus on answering the effective needs of the participants, they, in general, are individualistic in orientation. If one were to ask the motivations of Black Nazarene devotees in Quiapo for joining the January procession or for wiping their handkerchiefs on the image, the responses would hardly differ from the ones that would be given for joining the cenaculo or the penitencia: personal favors, either material or spiritual. There is scarcely any sense of being community or of belonging to one. (Which reminds us the pre-Vatican II eucharistic celebrations where each member of the congregation acted as if he or she were not related to the other worshippers in the church.)They lack social direction. Understandably, the theory of salvation or soteriology they embody is likewise individualistic: it is the individual who is saved from material and spiritual evils. Hardly ever clear is the concept of salvation of the community, still less the teaching that we are saved through the community. Consequently, the idea of building up the kingdom as part of their mission is far removed from them. On the contrary, the understanding is oriented toward the maintenance of the status quo. It is not farfetched to say that these rituals are burdened with the pre-Vatican II theology. And since they tend to develop apart from the hierarchical structure of the Church, it is not surprising that, in some cases, they are celebrated without any harmony with the liturgical time and meaning of the Holy Week. And their lack of ecclesial sense of belonging opens itself to abuse. It does happen that these rituals are held either for the personal advantage of their patrons, or for tourism purposes, or both.

 

More Important than Liturgy?

 

            As is true of other popular devotions, these Holy Week popular rituals–to many lay people–are regarded as more important than the liturgy itself for reason already noted. As a young priest assigned to the seminary, I used to say Mass in far-flung barangays. For lack of priest, only one Mass was celebrated in each of them once a month. One day, in one barangay, the old ladies asked me a favor after the mass: "Father, since you come here only once a month, may we suggest that instead of coming every first Sunday, you rather say Mass for us every first Friday?” Similar views can be encountered when it comes to the Holy Week rituals. For many, it is more fitting to act as Pilate in the cenaculo than to attend the Holy Thursday liturgy. It is more meaningful to undergo self-flagellation than to participate in the Good Friday liturgy, for, in the penitencia, one really experiences than the pain which Jesus himself experienced. And so on.

 

            The problem, of course, is that this only reinforces the development of wrong values in the sense that these are at variance with those held by the Catholic Church. And precisely because many consider these rituals more important than the liturgy, there lurks the danger that they might think that all that is needed to be in the right before God is to take an active part in these folk practices. They might believe these are the ways of approaching God. That many ritual enthusiasts do not go to Church on Sunday, that they do not receive the sacraments, that they are more familiar with their practices than with the Bible--these reflect their lack of belonging to the Church and the importance they ascribe to these rituals. That the most important in being Christian is to follow Jesus daily in discipleship within the community, not in the yearly act of self-flagellation--this, it would seem, is still lost to the devotees.

 

Incomplete View of the Passion

 

            Finally, the primary importance attached by the participants in the cenaculo, pabasa and penitencia to the death of Jesus results in the formation of values which have grave consequences for their faith and life. (Of course, such significance is not limited to the practitioners of these rituals. As may be observed during the Holy Week celebrations all the country over, it is only during Good Friday that people feel obliged to go to church; hence, pews are occupied to the full. But Easter and its Vigil, which are the culmination of the three-day celebrations, does not, except in parishes where small communities are flourishing, command as much crowd.) The value placed on the death of Jesus has serious implications for a theology of salvation, because this overlooks the life and ministry which led his death, and the vindication of him by God through the resurrection. In such a theology, Jesus came only to die. Which, of course, is a gross oversimplification. Seen in this light, suffering almost becomes valuable in itself, or at least part and parcel of being human which nothing can be done about. But then, this would almost associate Christianity with masochism! Suffering, however, is evil, even in Christianity. In systematics, God is always viewed as a pure positivity. In the Bible, Jesus never enjoyed suffering; if he suffered, it was a consequence of the life he led. He was murdered; he never sought pain and suffering. To say therefore that all that is important is to participate in the suffering of Jesus by simply undergoing self-flagellation or by joining the cenaculo is to oversimplify the meaning of Jesus’ suffering and death. Such a theological understanding would encourage the acceptance of injustice, oppression and domination, and could be used to justify them.

 

Aberrations?

 

But despite these observations, there is no reason to dismiss these rituals as aberrations. On the positive side, what the Second Plenary Council of the Philippines (PCP II) says of popular piety readily applies to them: “These religious practices are rich in values. They manifest a thirst for God and enable people to be generous and sacrificing in witnessing to their faith. These practices show a deep awareness of the attributes of God: fatherhood, providence, loving and constant presence. They engender attitudes of patience, the sense of the Cross in daily life, detachment, openness to others, devotion’’ (PCP II, Acts and Decrees, 172). In their Third General Conference at Puebla, the Latin American Bishops describe the lights of popular piety, which may be said of any of our Holy Week popular rituals: it “presents such positive aspects as a sense of the sacred and the transcendent; openness of the Word of God; Marian devotion; an aptitude for the prayer; a sense of friendship, charity, and family unity; an ability to suffer and to atone; Christian resignation in irremediable situations; and detachment from the material world” (GCLAB, Puebla, 913).

 

But then, what is to be done?              

 

Potential for Social Transformation

 

            Despite their weaknesses, they should not be suppressed. Our attitude should be “one of critical respect, encouragement of renewal” (PCP II, 175). For one thing, these Holy Week rituals are engaged in by numerous but poor Catholic all over the Philippines. And being part of the Church, they are subject of the Church’s care. This even gains prominence today since the Church in the Philippines has declared its intention to become a Church of the Poor where, among others, its “members and leaders have special love for poor.” The Church must therefore value their faith expression, however distorted or superficial, found in these rituals. For this reason, we must help the devotees in such a way that these practices can contribute to the maturing of our faith. And, probably, this could be done in two ways. First, we can identify their values and motivations and purify them in the lights of Christian faith. Then we can transform them by imbuing them with Christian values. In the process, we can show how these rituals are connected, for example, with the entire life of the Christian, and with the life of others. The purpose here is primary their coherence with right beliefs and right living (orthodoxy and orthopraxis).

 

            Second, in helping deepen their faith, we can explore the potential of these rituals for social transformation. At present, they are observed yearly, but do not have--it would seem--any visible impact on the communities they are held in. Probably for most, they are simply rituals, religious externals--period.  But it is instructive that during the Spanish period, from the 18th century onward, the Tagalogs found in the passion story a motivation for revolt against oppression. (A Filipino theology of liberation must take into account the theology of the Filipino peasant religious movements.) We are still in the process of liberation, and as the Philippine bishops noted their Pastoral Exhortation on the Philippines Centennial Celebration, “today, our liberty is eroded as much by foreign invaders, as by internal enemies as the poverty of the many and the concentration of wealth among the few, inequality and lack of participation, injustice and exploitation, deficient culture values and mind-set, destruction of the ecosystem and deterioration of peace and order, to mention a few. True freedom demands that we, especially the poor and the disadvantaged, are liberated from this evils (cf. Gal 3:25-28). It requires profound changes in socio-economics and political structures, revolution of the heart (cf. Jas 4:1) and, most important, liberation from sin (2 Chr 7:14 Rom 6 18; 1 Tim 1:5).  It dictates that we ourselves shape our history.”   Of course, we should not utilize these rituals to incite revolt—that is unchristian. But surely we can ask: what values could be appropriated from these rituals which could serve as vehicles, in a very Christian way, and how they could contribute to the process of transforming society, which the PCP II speaks of (cf. PCP II, Decree 97)?  How can “they serve the cause of full human development, justice, peace and the integrity of creation” (PCP II, 175)?* (Note: The author wrote this essay in 1998].


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Mar 23, '11 7:59 PM for everyone

Commencement Address Delivered to the Theology Graduates at the St John the Evangelist School of Theology, Palo, Leyte, on March 19, 2011

by Rev Msgr Lope C Robredillo, SThD

Vicar General, Diocese of Borongan

THE REV MSGR Benedict Catilogo, Rector of St John the Evangelist School of Theology, the Rev Ramil Costibolo, Dean of Studies, the Reverend Fathers, the Reverend Sisters, Graduates, Parents and Guests.  Good afternoon.  On this particular occasion, I would like to share with you some thoughts on the priesthood and the challenge of consumerism.  Allow me to begin with two news.

               Last week, we were told that, according to the Commission on Audit, the board of trustees of the Government Service Insurance System (GSIS) enjoyed excessive benefits in 2009 to the tune of P88 M, or P11 M for each member, which could have been used for its stakeholders.  Not so long ago, the Senate investigations disclosed that one general received P50 M pabaon (send-off gift), another P160, and still another P80.  These two, both unconscionable, are just the most recent in the series of scandals that captured the headlines.  The question I want to raise in relation to my topic is this: Why do many Filipinos sink into such morass of immorality in order to accumulate wealth?  Since our actions always reflect an anthropological presupposition, we can add the question: What concept of humanity do these people involved in these scandals presuppose in their unconscionable behavior?

I raise these questions because, if these scandals disclose anything, it is that they imply a certain outlook of life and of being human.  Of course, in Christian teaching, our common vocation is to become men and women for God and for others.  We become truly human when we give ourselves to God and to the members of our society.  Unfortunately, however, it seems that our society does not recognize this vocation.  Quite the contrary, what people know today as their vocation is to make consumer’s goods the object of their life, for the simple reason that it is consumer’s goods that they find their identity in, and that their life is oriented to.  In this assumption, we are what we have. We are what we consume.  That is the brief description of what consumerism means. 

That life is all about acquiring consumer’s goods seems to be the philosophy of life of many.  When I asked a tour guide about his religion, he said he had none.  So, what the purpose of living? I asked.  He answered, I want to make money.  It seems that people no longer want to be saints.  Saints seem no longer to have relevance for many.  Notice how town officials replaced street names of saints with names of politicians.  People want to get rich—and quickly.  In addition, consumerism posits a lifestyle.  You do not simply aspire to be rich; you want to live like one.  Hence, a certain lifestyle, which is actually artificial, is created.  This new lifestyle is pursued, often relentlessly, since one thinks that this will provide the good life—la dulce vita, filled with satisfaction and happiness.

            The problem with this is not only that possession of goods has become the be-all and end-all of life.  The problem is that, many aspects of social life have become subordinated to it—morals, culture, and religion no longer decisively matter in the process of acquisition.  What is important is not how you got rich; whether it is by hook or by crook, no one seems to be bothered about it.  What matters is you a rich. Period.  Indeed, it has become the principle by which people organize their personal lives, their relations to others and the whole society.  What is of the essence is the acquisition of goods.   Why become a lawyer?  To pursue justice? No, to get rich.  Why serve abroad?  To make money.  Why vote for this corrupt politician?  He is the highest bidder.  Why resign? A new much more financially rewarding job is being offered. Thus, if the GSIS board decided for themselves their humongous perks, obviously they never thought about the ordinary GSIS beneficiaries who find it difficult to claim even their paltry pension.  Obviously, the Generals receiving the “pabaon” (send-off gift) were not thinking of the ordinary foot soldiers suffering under fire from the Abus’ bullets. 

            Under this philosophy of life, man exists for himself, and all others have to be used to satisfy his heart’s desire.  No wonder, man has become subservient to consumer’s goods.  He is now a victim, and has become a tool, a slave, both literally and figuratively.  Thus, his conscience is not troubled by using Filipino women and men as drug mules to China in order to make money.  When he engages in drug trade, he is not upset by the fact that thousands are hooked in drugs, deprived of their future.  Take note, however, that in consumerism, what enslave people are not necessary bad things in themselves—they are enslaved to the business corporations they put up, the different palatial homes in several cities, and vacation houses in some beach resorts.  If these things happen, and not a hoot is heard, it is because we now measure a man in terms of his capacity to have.  We no longer look at a person in terms of his character, integrity.  We measure him in terms of his appearance, possessions, status.  No wonder the Vicky Belo business prospers, priests have to have PhD, MA, SThD, some even have 5 degrees appended to their name. politicians have become TV personalities, and clowns have become congressmen.

            It can be seen therefore that the more fundamental problem about consumerism is not simply about being rich, or about being materialistic.  More than that, it has become an outlook of life.  We can even go farther; it has actually become a culture.  It has become part of the thought patterns of society.   It is the way we think, and the way we live.   Which is why, it is very difficult for many to escape its influence.  They have become captive of consumerism.   As one might know, people do not look at Tibet with envy, despite the high idealism of its monks.  People no longer view China as an enemy of Christianity because it espouses communism.  To the contrary, we ape China because in a few years, it might even overtake the United States to emerge as the leading economic power.  Why pass the RH bill?  Is it far-fetched to assume that many want to have it approved because of the millions involved?  Fetuses have to be aborted because additional children affect our pattern of consumption.  Indeed, consumerism leads to a culture of death.  One wonders whether even the voice of the Church is being drowned in the whirlpool of consumerism.  Her voice no longer seems to command attention; look at the RH bill issue—even the Church has to make her power felt in order to bring home her message.

            What then can we, as Christians, say?  Consumerism is a big challenge to Christianity.  It is likewise a humongous challenge to the priests of today and the priests of tomorrow.  It essence, it represents not only un-Christian outlook but also inhuman philosophy of life and values.  And it would be unfortunate if the Church and her ministers co-opt it.  It would be a disaster for the Church if bishops and priests become captive of the tentacles of consumerism.  I believe that the great problem that the Church and her ministers right now face is not the problem of pedophilia, despite the fact that it is widely published.  Neither is it the problem of communism or atheism.  Rather, it is the problem of consumerism, and what could be more catastrophic than consumerism consuming the passion of priests and bishops?  If the Church will be almost irreparably damaged in the future, it will not come from pedophile priests and bishops; it will come from priests and bishops who are drowned in consumerist mentality.  That would be of tsunamic proportion.

My dear graduates, my dear future priests: this challenge should not remain unanswered.  If Council of Trent has stressed that priesthood is always linked with the community, obviously part of its implication is that priests should be able to speak to the community they serve.  Hence, if their people are being engulfed by consumerism, they have to exercise their prophetic role to protest against the overwhelming culture.  They have to be clear about this single message: to be human is not to have; to be human is simply to be.  This is not easy because it is to go against the current, it is to go against values being bombarded on us in television, it is to go against what people think is normal.  But that is precisely what it means to be a priest as prophet.  Prophets are abnormal people, they are fools.  St Paul himself declares that he is a fool for Christ.  In our time, only a fool does not accept kickbacks, only a fool refuses donations from jueteng.  As prophets, priests must not be afraid to protest against this consumerist culture. 

It is important to recall that Christianity was born as a protest.  Early Christianity was not engaged in accommodation; on the contrary, it was a countercultural community, and Jesus really meant it to be.  Let me cite some examples.  Consider his words: “You know that the men considered rulers of the heathen have power over them, and the leaders have complete authority. This, however, is not the way it is among you.  If one of you wants to be great, he must be the servant of the rest; and if one wants to be first, he must be the slave of all.  For even the Son of Man did not come to be served, but to serve and to give his life to redeem many people” (Mark 10:42-45).  Undoubtedly, the early Church had to be different—it lived a different way of life and treated people in a way different from how normal society of the Roman Empire treated them.

            That Christianity has to be different finds its roots in the conception of the people of God in the Old Testament.  In the Holiness Code, God declares: “You are to be holy to me, because I, the Lord, am holy, and I have set you apart from the nations to be my own” (Lev 20:26).  God intended Israel to be different from other nations, which is why he personally chose them to be his own people.  But in what way was Israel to be different?  From the way of life that the people had to live: “Therefore, take care to follow the commands, decrees and laws I give you today” (Deut 7:11).  These laws bound Israel, not other nations.  For this reason, since Israel was organized in terms of God’s covenant, with its own laws and decrees, its social structure was obviously far different from those of the neighboring nations.

            No wonder, the Church of the New Testament was clearly a counter-cultural community.  This is the reason why the NT letters use metaphors to emphasize this character.  Allow me to give one example from 1 Pet 2:9: “But you are a chosen people, a royal priesthood, a holy nation, a people belonging to God, that you may declare the praises of him who called you out of darkness into his wonderful light.  Once you were not a people, but now you are the people of God; once you had not received mercy; now you have received mercy.  Dear friends, I urge you, as aliens and strangers in the world….” Take note of the contrasting terms: “darkness and light,” “no-people and people of God”, “without mercy and with mercy”, “citizens and aliens and strangers”.  Notice also the adverb: “once” and “now.”  Thus, the Church is clearly different in terms of its election and its life.

            If the priesthood prolongs the mission of Jesus and the Church, and if priestly ministry is to serve the community it is found in, it therefore follows that the priesthood must be by nature counter-cultural.  Hence, because a priest is chosen to be different, he has also to live differently.  After all, that is the original meaning of “holiness”—one is set apart, one is clearly different.  Holiness is exhibited in one’s creativity and capacity to give to others.  But how?  How do we, as priests, face the temptations of consumerism?  I will not dwell on how consumerism should be refuted theologically.  I assume that your four years of Philosophy and four years of theology provided you with enough materials to arm yourselves against claims on the virtues of consumerism.   If you do not have enough arguments at hand, I will not allow you to graduate, if I were your Dean of Studies.  What I am more interested in are the pastoral, but essentially prophetic, means to combat it.  Of course, there are many ways, but let me focus on three points.

First, a priest has to know exactly his identity.  I am not, of course, going to make a discourse on priestly identity—I presume that you, graduates, have enough of that in the classroom.  What I mean is that we have to be aware that, more than any other, priesthood is a form of “being.” When one is aware of that, then, he acts like one.  When a priest goes to the restaurant, theaters, airplane, hotel, or when he is with politicians, police, beggars, he always acts like a priest, not somebody else.  When he speaks, laughs, argues, calls the attention of the sacristan, talks with giggling girls, he always does so as a priest.  The temptation of the priest by consumerism is precisely to have a different identity—some of us want to be jet setter, experts in tourism, connoisseurs of wine, political clowns and fashion models.  Others want to go into the buy-and-sell business, become contractors, and TV personalities.  Spiritual directors, of course, will always insist on prayers and other means to safeguard this priestly identity, but in the long run, it is really about being able to say—I am a priest, and my true identity does not consist in having more. I am content with who I am: a man for God and for others—that is who I am.

To be sure, it is difficult to be contended with who I am, because, with the pervasive influence of a consumerist mentality, there is always the temptation to define myself in terms of what I have.  There is the tendency to think that my priesthood becomes more meaningful and fulfilling if I have a big parish, if I have more women friends, if I have a fabulous rectory and church, if I have bigger deposit in the bank, if I have a good influence over the bishop, if I have visited more cities than the rest, if to my name are attached more than one abbreviation—MA, PhD, SThD, JCD, SSD.  Not surprisingly, in this kind of life, our days are cluttered with appointments sometimes without much consideration of their priorities.  Yet, one might ask: what about the priest who is assigned in a small barrio, who is sick with cancer, who is paralyzed, who has no money in the bank, who has not earned any civil or ecclesiastical degree because he was unable to finish his thesis—is he less than a priest?  Does one think he cannot experience the joy or happiness of being a real priest, because of his altered, lowly and uneventful circumstances?  One can only say “yes”, if he defines priesthood in terms of having.  Listen to this: in the face of temptations of consumerism, there is no substitute for a priest who can say, “Whatever the circumstances, I am a priest, and I am content with it.”  Of course, the greater challenge is to be faithful to it, to stand by that statement.

Obviously, this calls for simplicity of lifestyle.  In a society like ours where consumerism fills the atmosphere, it is not easy to be simple.  For one thing, our seminary training can appear less than modest and even seems not to encourage it.  Each seminarian has his own room, he lives in a building where water, electricity and food are not a problem, and sometimes, he can even sit in a classroom that has air-conditioning.   Life in the seminary, of course, may not be luxurious, but it is certainly with ease, if compared with how the majority of Filipino students live.  Still, simplicity of life should be part and parcel of being a priest.  Probably no one can be more simple that of Jesus Christ himself, the High Priest—he was born to a very poor couple, he had no house to call his own, he did not even own a burial ground, he had a simple job, he clothed himself with tunic.  Similarly, St Paul adopted a very simple lifestyle: “I have learned to be content whatever the circumstances.  I know what it is to be in need, and I know what is to have plenty.  I have learned the secret of being content in any and every situation, whether well fed or hungry, whether living in plenty or in want” (Phil 4:11b-12).   If Jesus and Paul lead a life of simplicity, there is no really why a priest should cultivate a taste for luxury.

A simple lifestyle is the secret of faithfulness to priestly identity.  But at the same time—and this should be emphasized, it is a prophetic gesture that brings home the message that lavish lifestyle is contrary to the Gospel.  Also, it gives witness to the transitoriness of this world.  As Paul puts it, “The time is short.  From now on, those who use the things of the world, [should live] as if not engrossed in them.  For the world in its present form is passing away” (1 Cor 7:31).  As a witness against consumerism, a priest cannot spend most of his nights in socializing, or a large chunk of a year in travels abroad, or his days in endless dinners, drinking, mahjong sessions, shows, and excursions.  When one engages in so many appointments that have little to do with the priesthood, they make him succumb to the temptation of identifying the priesthood with who he is with or with what he has.  Little will be left for reading God’s Word and for care of the little ones.  At the same time, they engender so many pressures, and in the end blood pressure shoots up.   Priestly life is meant to be simple; more than that is an abnormality.  To me, it is certainly very unsightly see a priest transferring to a different parish as his new assignment, bringing with him 5 truckloads of his accumulated personal belongings, equipment and paraphernalia.

Which brings us to this point: the greatest temptation that makes a priest succumb to consumerism is his own possession.  Here, I do not have to mention how much money one has deposited in the bank, because that seems too obvious to require comment.  Others are not so.  One has to examine whether having two or three brand new cars, a vacation house in Boracay is within the limits of simplicity.  One has to consider whether his stockpile of shoes and clothes, and yes, even fancy and fabulous vestments and sacred vessels with their famous signatures, does not border on superfluity.  One has to ask whether he really needs up-to-date and costly cell phone, VCRs, TV set, Notebook, Ipad, Ipod, and fabulous gadgets and expensive dogs and exotic animals in order to be effective ministers.  For the life of me, I still cannot understand why a priest has to own one or two private houses, or a condo unit in Global City when there is already a convento to shelter him from the rain.  But even more important, one has to examine whether all these acquired things make him closer to God, and enhance his priestly character, improve his homilies, and deepen his life of prayer and improve his relationship with others.

Finally, and this is my last and third point, I really feel—and this is my belief—that simplicity of life and priestly identity would get him nowhere unless he makes himself insecure—yes, you heard it right, not secure, but insecure.  Ordinarily, a priest, like any other person, is sometimes blind to the fact that the form of this world is passing away; he sometimes forgets his identity because he wants to be secure now and in the future.  Living well today always implies that one cultivates the proper social appearance, right connection, good social networking and diplomacy.  His concern for security in the present forces him to limit his vision to himself.  Of course, I would say that all this is normal.  After, who would reject a worry-free life?  One can always say that there is no substitute for a kind of living where everything you need is within your reach.  Just look at advertisement, offering us wares that free us from worry—from feminine napkins to car batteries.  That is human need, and advertisement caters to that need.

Come to think of it: consumerism makes one think that financial security will assure a person of a happy life.  The refrain is, one cannot be happy and be contended unless he is financially stable.  Not surprisingly enough, insurance companies have mushroomed because they answer a created need in a consumerist society.  No wonder, it is not difficult to accept a pabaon of P50 M because, with the prospect of retirement when perks will no longer flow, that amount will surely help in making a secure future.  But even worse, like other elements of consumerist culture, accumulation of wealth not only subordinates morals to it, but action is judged on the basis of its effectiveness in the success of acquisition.  Even family values are jettisoned, and good family relations are broken only because of one’s desire to amass wealth.  Thus, there is no moderation in greed.

And yet, one has to take Jesus’ words on this point not simply metaphorically but quite literally: “Do not worry about your life, what you will eat or drink, or about your body, what you will wear.  Is not life more than food, and the body more important than clothes?  Look at the birds of the air, they do not sow or reap or store away in barns, and yet your heavenly Father feeds them.  Are you not much more valuable than they?... Why worry about clothes?  See how the lilies of the field grow.  They do not labor or spin.  Yet I tell you, not even Solomon in all his splendor was dressed like one of these.  If that is how God clothes the grass of the field, which is here today and tomorrow is throne into the fire, will he not much more cloth you, O you of little faith?” (Matt 6:25-30).

I seriously think that if a priest is to stand by his identity, if he is really convinced of leading a simple lifestyle, there should be an element of insecurity in his life-experience.  He cannot be faithful to his prophetic ministry if everything around him gives him a sense of security.  When a pig is full, there is nothing more to do but sleep.   A priest cannot testify to the transitoriness of this world if he continues to cultivate friendship with the security that worldly life offers.  On the other hand, his insecurity will reinforce that idea that priesthood is really about “being”, not “having”.  After all, priesthood is, before anything else, an ontological gift.  Therefore, insecurity makes him human, enhances creativity, and therefore makes his vocation even more real.  It brings him back to the reality that being a priest is actually about character, virtue and integrity, not about accumulation of passing things.  At the same time, it opens his eyes to the workings of God, to his providential care, and makes him realize that there are values higher than financial security.  There is no substitute in finding security in the arms of God.  It makes one realize that in the final result, priestly life is about being wholly for God and for others.  There is, therefore, no reason to be obsessed with a worriless future.  One has to leave room for God.  That would be enough.  Solo Dios basta.

 


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Dec 25, '10 12:15 AM for everyone

by Lope C. Robredillo, STD

 

YEARS AFTER the worst disaster in memory struck Southeast Asia on December 26, 2004, the survivors of the tsunami went on with rebuilding their lives.  In this process of recovery, massive international aid kept pouring in.  But beyond the problems of survival, and of economy, science and psychology that they had to resolve in order to make their lives whole again, there remains a question that baffles not only most of the survivors who believe in a God who cares for human beings, but even us who were spared: where was God in that catastrophe?  Why did the tsunami have to occur, and devastate thousands of Asians?

 

In a letter to the editor, Sen. Aquilino Pimentel, Jr. of the Philippines asked: “Was the tsunami that hit and killed tens of thousands in Indonesia, India, Sri Lanka, Thailand, Maldives, Myanmar and other nations an act of God?” (Philippine Daily Inquirer, Jan. 20, 2005).  Not so long after the disaster, Imams in Indonesia, Pimentel went on, were quoted as saying that the tsunami was a wake-up call from God who was displeased because people were not faithful to their duties as set forth in the Koran.  Another Imam claimed that it was God’s punishment, since Muslims were killing Muslims in Aceh.  However, Sen. Pimentel finds the view of a chief rabbi, Jonathan Sachs of the United Hebrew Congregation of the Commonwealth preferable.  According to this Jewish rabbi, the tsunami was a natural calamity that is a consequence of our having been placed in a physical world.  But the Senator decried that he has yet to read a Catholic theologian speak on the matter.

 

Truth to tell, though they may not have the tsunami particularly in mind, Catholic scholars have wrestled with problems of that nature.  Admittedly, however, there has never been a solution proposed that adequately satisfies.  Just to illustrate how difficult it is to give a definitive answer to a problem like it, one can single out the proposal of Teilhard de Chardin, a Catholic author, priest and scientist.

 

For Teilhard who looks at the universe in convergent evolution toward Christ, such calamities as earthquakes and tsunamis are but an inevitable condition, the price of evolution.  The universe, he says, undergoes a process of arrangement and “in such a system which advances by tentative groping” toward a higher form of complexity, it is inevitable that there are failures, disintegrations and discordances.  “We are realizing,” he says in his book, Activation of Energy, “that within the vast process of arrangement from which life emerges, every success is necessarily paid for by a large percentage of failures.  One cannot progress in being without paying a mysterious tribute in tears, blood and sin.”

 

Evil, like the big quake or the tsunami, is thus a by-product of evolution.  Says Teilhard in his book, The Phenomenon of Man: “Indeed, if we regard the march of the world from this standpoint (i.e., not that of its progress but that of its risks and the efforts it requires) we soon see under the veil of security and harmony… a particular type of cosmos in which evil appears necessarily and abundantly as you like in the course of evolution—not by accident (which would not much matter) but through the very structure of the system.  A universe which is involuted and interiorized, but at the same time and by the same token a universe which labors, which sins, which suffers.  Arrangement and centration: a doubly conjugated operation which, like the scaling of a mountain or the conquest of the air, can only be effected objectively if it is rigorously paid for—for reasons and at charges which, if only we knew them, would enable us to penetrate the secret of the world around us.”

 

But, if one may ask, why is there a need for God to create a world that has to undergo an evolutionary process at such a price?  If the tsunami were a condition for progress, who is the man, were he given the choice, who would accept this bargain in the name of evolution?  By what logic does one justify the occurrence of such a disaster in order to succeed in the arrangement and centration? The point raised is a bit similar to Fyodor Dostoevsky’s, in his book, The Brothers Karamazov: “Imagine,” says Ivan to Alyosha, “that you are creating a fabric of human destiny with the object of making men happy in the end, giving them peace and rest at all, but it was essential and inevitable to torture to death only one tiny creature—that baby beating its breast with its fist, for instance—and to found that edifice on its unavenged tears, would you consent to be the architect of those conditions?”

 

How much wisdom, then, one would ask, is there to creating a world that has to evolve from a less perfect state to a more perfect one?  One cannot, for sure, maintain without blasphemy that God, like a Roman emperor pleased to see a slave dancing in the arena before the horns of a bull, is such a sadist who enjoys himself in failures, clapping for a encore, seeing an elimination round.  To do so would lead one not just to doubt or deny his wisdom, omnipotence and providence, but even, more particularly, to question the discrimination it would engender.  What is wrong with a world not subject to continuous changes, a world in its highest state of complexity right from the start of creation?

 

Probably, it would make more sense to accept the view that evolution must exact its price, if those who pay it are only those who have turned against God.  In that sense, one could agree with the Imam who said about the tsunami being God’s punishment for Muslims who kill their fellow Muslims in Aceh. In fact, this is how some Old Testament texts view misfortunes that befell on Israel.  In the book of Judges, for instance, God would raise up an enemy to punish the people for their sins.   The friends of Job held the same conviction.  For them, God would never have allowed Job to suffer adversity if the latter had never defied him.  If Job suffered, he must have done something to deserve it, even though he refused to admit it.  But if the victims of the tsunami deserved it, were they more sinful than the people of Europe and America?  Were the poor people in Indonesia worst off than the rich who control the economy of the Third World?  Thieves, criminals, terrorists, and swindlers should be in jail—and yet where does one find many of them if not in the parties of the rich and famous, or gracing in the society page?  One can always ask why the greedy and the very corrupt prosper, while the honest, the meek and the humble are often damned.

 

Voltaire, who was perplexed at the Lisbon earthquake that killed more than 30,000 people and happened, ironically, on All Saints’ Day, November 1, 1755, has a point, when he asks in his poem, “The Lisbon Earthquake”--

 

Was there more vice in fallen Lisbon found

Than Paris, where voluptuous joys aboud?

Was less debauchery to London known,

Where opulence luxurious holds her throne?

Earth Lisbon swallows; the light sons of France

Protract the feast, or lead the sprightly dance.

 

But the truth is, many innocent people, including children, perished in that tragedy with the guilty.  And that is very hard to comprehend. What have the innocent children of Southeast Asia to do with the price to be paid for the evolution?  Why should they be the ones to pay?  One is reminded of words of Dr. Rieux, an unbeliever, in Albert Camus’ book, The Plague, to Father Peneloux who has been preaching that the calamity that struck Oran was a just punishment from God for the people’s godlessness: “No, Father, I’ve a different idea of love.  And until my dying day I shall refuse to accept a scheme of things in which children are put to torture.”

 

No doubt, Teilhard’s cosmic vision sheds much light on the problem.  Tsunami, for him, has to be understood in terms of evolution, the general good which conditions it.  Perhaps, of this tragedy that hit Southeast Asia, he may speak as a condition for the order and arrangement of the evolving universe, whose value is far greater than the evil it conditions.  The tsunami must be taken not as an isolated phenomenon but as a structural part of the total ensemble of stages in evolution.  “Provided the peak is actually there,” he says in his book, Activation of Energy, “and the game is worth the candle, what mountaineer is surprised or complains at having to be injured as he climbs, or at having to risk a fatal fall?  Taken as static facts and in isolation, pain and perversity are meaningless.  Taken as dynamic factors, in a system that is fluid and feeling its way, they are both vindicated and transfigured.”

 

Even so, Teilhard does not adequately solve the issues his proposal raises.  But if his solution fails, like all other explanation, it is because, to get into the heart of the problem, one has to go beyond the cerebral.  Rational explanations are doomed to conk out.  Teilhard’s theory is acceptable in shedding light on some aspects of the problem, but it sorely fails in its other dimensions.  It leaves several questions unanswered, like the inclusion of the innocent children in that tragedy.  It seems, however, that the problem is not one of lack of solutions.  Rather, it is about the inadequacy of tools.  Logic, in this matter, is a failure, because it does not have enough tools to get into the kernel of the matter.  There are realities in life where logic fails, like the experience of beauty, the ecstasy in sex and love, the drawing power of the innocent, or the language of love.  Love defies logic.  When one makes it logical, one deprives oneself of the experience.

 

The same is true of finding God in the tsunami.  One has to go beyond logic.  In the face of Asia’s worst tragedy, probably the real question is not about why God allowed it to happen, or where was he when it struck, but about our approach to it.   For a Christian, one has to share the experience of Job in the Old Testament.  Because his friends failed to account for his suffering adequately, he wanted to hear what God had to say about his it.  But when he spoke, God, far from justifying his action, merely overwhelmed Job with his power and omniscience. Job’s encounter with the Almighty’s power and knowledge made him realize how futile human logic was; he had to retract his rational approach. “I heard of you by word of mouth, but now my eye has seen you.  Therefore I disown what I have said and repent in dust and ashes” (Job 42:5-6).

 

What does this imply?  Since there are no adequate rational approaches to the problem of tsunami, a Christian must learn to live with realities that defy logic.  Even more important, he has to transcend it.  Following Job, one can only stand in awe at God’s wisdom, realizing how incomprehensible his system that governs the world.  His omniscience and man’s knowledge are unbridgeable.  Like Job, one must surrender to God’s mystery. One must trust him, even if he does not understand.   When one abandons himself to the incomprehensibility of God’s wisdom, knowing that God is God and not man, it would not be difficult to find God even in the tragedy of tsunami.  A man of faith knows that God is not absent in such an event.  He is there in the victims.  As Hans Kung puts it, in his book, On Being a Christian, “suffering, too, is encompassed by God: suffering, too, even though it seems like being forsaken by God, can become the point of encounter with God.”

 

Illustrative of this is a story that happened in a concentration camp during the Second World War, in Elie Wiesel’s book, Night. After the electric power was blown up, the Gestapo eventually put its three suspects on the gallows, two adults, and one child.  After the three necks were placed within the nooses, someone said, “Where is God?  Where is he?”  Finally, the two adults died, their tongue hung swollen, but the third rope was still moving.  Being so light, the child was still alive.  “Where is God now?” the same man asked.  Then, Weisel heard a voice within him answering the man: “Where is he?  Here he is—he is hanging here on this gallows.”  To see God in the child on the gallows, to see him suffering with the victims of tsumani—that should be the specific Christian experience in the tragedy, because Christ himself revealed on the Cross that God suffered with victim. 

 

Hence, the tsunami is never an evidence of God’s absence.  Quite the contrary, it is there that a Christian, who abandons himself to him amid utter meaninglessness, can encounter him.*


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Oct 25, '10 9:43 AM for everyone

By Lope C. Robredillo, SThD

This essay is dedicated to the Most Rev Godofredo P. Pedernal, DD, a saintly bishop

(The original text of the talk delivered by the author in Samarenyo [or Binisaya] language to the delegates to the 50th Anniversary Celebration of the Diocese of Borongan at the Borongan Cathedral on October 22, 2010, 8:30 AM)

THOUGH the Estehanons’ first recorded encounter with Christianity occurred on March 16, 1521 when Magellan’s expedition reached Homonhon island, the historical beginnings of the Diocese of Borongan may be traced to as far back as 1585 when Augustinians set foot on Eastern Samar, but especially 1595 when Jesuits from Dagami, Leyte, systematically preached the gospel to the natives of the southern part of the island.  The people in the eastern littorals, on the other hand, were evangelized by Jesuits from Catubig and, later, Palapag as early as 1601.  In spreading the Christian religion, the missionaries initiated the reduccion of the population and founded towns, educated the inhabitants in the faith, raised stone churches, taught agriculture, and protected the faithful from Muslim raids.  The major bungtos at that time were Bacod (now part of Dolores river bed), Jubasan (now Giboangan, Can-avid), Sulat, Libas, Borongan, Guiuan and Balangiga.  On the whole, there was no stiff opposition to the reception of Catholic faith.  After half a century, however, the mission suffered a major setback in the Sumuroy rebellion in 1649.

When the Jesuits moved out in 1768, the Franciscans took over the parishes that the former had created save for Guiuan and Balangiga which were briefly administered by Augustinians.  The major problems that they faced were largely the same: population dispersion, Muslim raids and cholera epidemics.  They founded the parishes of Lanang (1851), Balangiga (1854), Sudao (1862), Oras (1863), Libas (1863), Nag-as (1864), Paric (1878), and Quinapondan (1894). These parishes, together with those founded by the Jesuits, all twelve of them, constituted the Vicariate of the Eastern Coast of Samar, under the Diocese of Cebu.  In terms of orthodoxy, however, they found a big challenge in the influential but heretical teachings of Don Gaspar de Guerrero.  It may be remarked that during this period, some Samareño priests already held parishes as pastors. However, the Spanish-American war in 1899 shook the Franciscan ministry and the local Church on Samar as a whole, what with the anticlericalism and Aglipayanism of Gen Vicente Lukban who had presented himself as Aguinaldo’s appointed Governor of Samar.  In fact, the Spanish friars resigned from their posts.  But at the same time, many people, including a number of Filipino priests, suffered from American ill-treatment.  Bucolic life was disrupted; hundreds of Samareños were killed.  Though Lukban was captured in 1902, peace never reigned; in the fierce war of the Philippine scouts with the local freedom-fighters, the Pulajanes, the latter practically controlled the island until 1905, leaving much suffering in its wake.  As a consequence, there was dearth of priests, between 1899 to 1905, to serve the needs of Samareños.

On April 10, 1910, the Estehanons became part of the Diocese of Calbayog, when the island of Samar was separated from the Diocese of Cebu.  Protestantism, American education system, and American culture became a challenge. Several Franciscans returned to work in the parishes.  Partly to counteract the spread of Protestantism, a Catholic school was established in Guiuan in 1927, as was done in other towns of the island.  Other schools followed eventually placed under the management of or established by the RVM sisters (Assumption College of Samar, 1940; St Joseph’s College, 1946; Holy Cross Institute, 1947; Our Lady of Fatima Academy 1949; and St Anthony’s Academy, 1949; Loyola Academy 1958 reverted to Msgr Desoloc).  During World War II, which displaced, decimated and impoverished the Estehanons, some priests aided Filipino guerillas.  After the war, the following parishes on the eastern part of the island were created, now all under Filipino priests: San Ramon (1955), Giporlos (1955), Maydolong (1956), Can-avid (1956), Sulangan (1957), Pambujan (1958), Matarinao-Burac (1959) and San Policarpo (1959).  Catechesis in elementary school was engaged in by almost all parishes.  In 1957, A lone Italian missionary (FdCC) started working in the parish of Jipapad.

On October 22, 1960, Pope John XIII issued the apostolic bull, Quod sacri, creating the Diocese of Borongan (Dioecesis Boronganensis), which originally included the aforementioned parishes as well as the parishes of Gamay, Basey, Calbiga, Pinabacdao, Villareal, Osmeña, Talolora and Sta Rita.  Bp Vicente P Reyes, DD, was the first bishop, installed on April 11, 1961.  The minor seminary, Seminario de Jesus Nazareno, was formally inaugurated in 1965.  Partly to halt the inroads of Protestantism in parishes, and in compliance with the First Plenary Council of the Philippines, diocesan schools, managed by diocesan priests, were also established: Jesus Nazareno Academy (Maydolong) 1962; Divine Child Academy (Lawaan) 1962; Borongan Cathedral School 1965, and Guimbaolibot Memorial School 1965.  Apart from Lapinig in Northern Samar, erected were the parishes of San Buenaventura/Balangkayan (1961), Lawaan (1961), Mercedes (1964) and Lalawigan (1964).  The faith was sustained among others by the strengthening of the Catholic organizations/cofradias (San Antonio, Lourdes, COM, Apostolados, San Jose, Holy Name, etc.) under the umbrella of Catholic Action, the best known being the Catholic Women’s League (CWL), Knights of Columbus (KC) and the Legion of Mary which had 12 Curiae and 105 Praesidia.  Cooperatives and credit unions in parishes were organized. 

With the closing of the Second Vatican Council, the Diocese moved toward the implementation of some conciliar decrees. In 1962, the Cursillo de Cristianidad became popular in the renewal of Christian faith and life, but the movement that penetrated the common people both in the poblaciones and the barrios was the Barangay han Birhen.  To involve the laity, pastoral councils were organized in several parishes as early as 1961.  It was in the 1970s until the early 80s that the faithful in the Diocese, including the clergy, were confronted with the problems spawned by Martial Law: deterioration of peace and order, human rights abuses, displacement and evacuation of inhabitants, among others.  People were caught up in the crossfire between the Philippine Army (PA) and the New People’s Army (NPA), with many untold and unhappy consequences. In the 80s, population declined.  The clergy tried to respond concretely to these problems.  The diocesan thrust, following the response of the Philippine Church, was development and liberation. Developmental projects were pursued, especially for farmers and fisher folk.  On December 5, 1974, the Diocese became confined to the civil province of Eastern Samar, when some of its parishes were ceded to the new diocese of Catarman. Only one parish was added in the 70s: Homonhon (1979). 

Late Martial Law period (1980s) and onward saw the rise and growth of movements that sustain and deepen the Catholic faith—Charismatic under various brands, Neo-Catechumenate, Marriage Encounter (ME), Oasis of Love, El Shaddai, Light of Jesus, Chrisma, Brotherhood of Christian Businessmen and Professionals (BCBP) and the Couples for Christ family (CFC), the last one having branched out to all the parishes and large barangays.  They appeared to have put a break to the spread of Fundamentalism and Pentecostalism.  Lay ministries were introduced.  In 1991, DYVW, the only Catholic radio station in the province, started a new media ministry.  New parishes were born: Maslog (Quasi-Parish, 1982), Buenavista (1999), Sapao (2004), Maypangdan (2005), Hinolaso (Quasi-Parish, 2006), Buabua (Quasi-Parish, 2006) and Sabang, Borongan (in process).  Several religious congregations, each with its own apostolate, enriched the pastoral ministry: Missionaries of the Sacred Heart (MSH) in 1987, Sister Servants of the Visitation (SSV) in 1988, Society of Don Bosco (SDB) in 1991, Franciscan Sisters of the Sacred Heart (SFSC) in 1995 in Dolores, Daughters of Charity (DC) in 1995-2005, Order of Friars Minor Conventual (OFMConv) in 1997, Oikos Ptochos Theou (OPT) in 1998, Sisters of the Presentation of Mary (PM) in 2010 and the Living the Gospel Community (LGC) also in 2010. The Nativity of Our Lady College Seminary was established (1996) to form seminarians in the local context.  Partners in formation in the faith are 2 colleges (St Mary’s College of Borongan and Mater Divinae Gratiae in Dolores) and 9 high schools, mostly run by religious sisters, a good number of pre-schools, and 1 technical school. One has yet to see, however, how the recently aired (2010) diocesan channel, Borongan Catholic TV, Channel 13, will contribute to faith formation.

In keeping with the recommendations of the Second Plenary Council of the Philippines (PCP II), the Borongan Diocese, after a two-year preparation, held its greatest ecclesial event: the First Diocesan Synod (1997), defining its life and mission in the present and coming years, and providing basis for its pastoral plan. Its diocesan pastoral plan was formulated in 2004, almost decade after the synod, supposedly to culminate in the golden anniversary of the diocese, but it has yet to see its implementation phase.  Although the Diocese had several social programs to help the poor, like the now defunct Emergency Livelihood and Assistance Program (ELAP) in 1991, and those handled by the Social Action Center, like Small Enterprises and Kapital Assistance Program (SEKAP) in 1995, Community Health Base Program (CHBP), involvement in the election process, anti-mining advocacies, not to mention other services (orphanage, home for the aged, clinics, home for children of the poor), its pastoral thrust, as enshrined in the first synod and in the pastoral plan, was the formation of Basic Ecclesial Communities (BECs).  The Daughters of Charity (DC) handled the program for 10 years (1995-2005), and several other communities sprouted in various parishes after they left.  On the other hand, as a service to its ordained workers, the Diocese has its own medicare program (1984), pension program for the elderly priests (2007), and priests’ home (2010).

In its 50-year history, the Diocese of Borongan was governed by nine Ordinaries: (1) Bp Vicente Reyes, DD, 1st bishop of Borongan (1960-1967), his Vicars General being Msgr Simeon Desoloc (1961-1966) and Msgr Angel Hobayan (1966-1967); (2) Msgr Hobayan, JCD, Vicar Capitular (1967-1968), (3) Bp Godofredo Pedernal, DD, 2nd bishop (1968-1976), his Vicars General being Msgr Angel Hobayan (1968-1969), Msgr Conrado Balagapo (1969-1971); Msgr Desoloc (1971-1973), Msgr Hobayan (1973-1974); Msgr Desoloc (1974-1976) with Fr Exequiel Singzon as Pro-Vicar General (1974-1976); (4) Bp Ricardo Tancinco, DD, Apostolic Administrator (1976-1977), (5) Bp Sincero Lucero, DD, 3rd bishop (1977-1980), his Vicars General being Msgr Emiliano Balein (1977-1978); (6) Bp Nestor Carino, DD, 4th bishop (1980-1987), his Vicar Generals being Msgr Conrado Balagapo (1980-1985) and Msgr Alfredo Amistoso (1985-1987); (7) Bp Leonardo Medroso, DD, 5th bishop (1987-2006), his Vicars General being Msgr Crescente Japzon (1987-2001) and Msgr Lope Robredillo (2001-2006); (8) Msgr Robredillo, SThD, Diocesan Administrator (2006-2007), and (9) Bp Crispin Varquez, DD, 6th bishop (2007-to date), with Msgr Robredillo as Vicar General (2007-to date).   

As of 2010, out of the around 400,000 inhabitants of the province, the Diocese has about 385,000 Catholics, who populate the 34 parishes/quasi-parishes.  Compared with other dioceses, Borongan may be categorized as economically poor.   In terms of personnel who co-work with the Ordinary in serving the People of God, the diocese has 89 priests. Of the 58 working in it, 5 are religious, and 54 were ordained for the diocese.  Of the 29 who are outside the diocese, 10 are in Manila and suburbs, 16 are in the US, 1 in Canada, 1 in Australia, and 1 in Italy.  Professionally, the diocese has 9 priests who earned doctorate degrees: 1 doctor in biblical studies, 1 in dogma, 1 in moral theology, 1 in spiritual theology, 1 in philosophy, 1 in mass media and communications, and 3 in canon law.  In addition, it has 14 clerics who finished licentiate or masteral degrees in various ecclesiastical sciences.  

Currently (2010) shepherding Christ’s faithful in Eastern Samar is Bp Crispin Varquez, DD, the Ordinary of the Diocese.  His Vicar General or deputy is Msgr Lope Robredillo, who also serves as Chancellor, assisted by Rev Neil Tenefrancia, the Vice-Chancellor.  In charge of the financial affairs is Fr Inocentes Abuda, the Financial Administrator.  For administrative purposes, the Diocese is divided into three regions, Northern Region, with Fr Dan Gañas as Episcopal Vicar, Central Region, with Fr Leroy Geli, and Southern Region, with Fr Joberto Picardal.  Each region has two vicariates, each headed by a Vicar Forane: the north has Msgr Alfredo Amistoso and Fr Romeo Solidon; the central Fr Eutiquio Belizar and Fr Marlon Gacho, and the south Msgr Crescente Japzon and Fr Nemesio Quiloña.  In the diocesan tribunal, the Judicial Vicar is Fr Antonio Alconaba, Auditor Fr Geli, and Defender of the Bond, Fr Abuda.

To implement its various programs, the Diocese has a Pastoral Secretariat, which is directed by Fr Geli, the Executive Secretary.  Corresponding to the various aspects of its pastoral life and work are the following commissions along with their respective chairs: Doctrine of the Faith, Fr Belizar; Catechesis, Fr Joseph Orsal, Mass Media and Communication, Msgr Pedro Quitorio III; Liturgy: Msgr Robredillo; Clergy: Fr Marlon Gacho; Vocation: Fr Jan Michael Gadicho; Biblical Apostolate: Fr Dan Gañas; Family and Life: Jonas Rebamontan; Youth: Fr Edgar Abucejo; Mission, Fr Philip Campomanes; Social Action, Fr Juderick Paul Calumpiano; Basic Ecclesial Communities, Fr Roderick Rodeles; Religious Associations, Fr Joberto Picardal; Cemeteries: Fr Joberto Picardal; Custody of Church Properties, Fr Edwin Juaban, and Cultural Heritage of the Church: Msgr Robredillo.  These commissions, however, have yet to move on in terms of concrete pastoral plans and program of action.*


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Sep 22, '10 8:09 AM for everyone

Challenges of the Times and the CBCP's Responses: A History of the Catholic Bishops' Conference of the Philippines 

 

 

By Lope C. Robredillo, SThD

 

(Originally, a paper read by the author before the assembly of the Catholic Bishops’ Conference of the Philippines in Tagaytay City, in January 1995 on the occasion of the 50th anniversary of the CBCP.)

 

I

Introduction

 

           Best known for its initials CBCP, the Catholic Bishop’s Conference of the Philippines of the Philippines is, in its present structure, a creation of the Second Vatican Council.  A Permanent institution, it is a grouping of the bishops of the Philippines “whereby, according to the norm of law, they jointly exercise certain pastoral functions on behalf of the Christian faithful of their territory in view of promoting that greater good which the Church offers to humankind, especially through forms and programs of the apostolate which are fittingly adapted to the circumstances of the time and place” (CIC, c. 447).  However, it does not, in the exercise of its apostolic and pastoral role, encroach the autonomy of the individual bishop.  In its recently amended constitution (1994), the CBCP specifies the following among its objectives:  the promotion of the spirit of solidarity in the Philippine Church; the formulation of joint pastoral policies and programs; the active engagement of the Philippine Church as a body in the pastoral thrusts of the universal Church; and the assumption of responsibilities as evangelizer in its relationship with all peoples in the country, especially the civil authority.  Its pastoral policies and programs are implemented through its 23 commissions with the coordination of the resources of the different dioceses.  It meets twice a year.  Aside from a president, a vice-president, a secretary-general, and a treasurer, it has an Administrative Council which acts on its behalf in between meetings.  At present, it has 96 active members who are diocesan bishops or their equivalent in law, coadjutor and auxiliary bishops.  Headed by the Most Rev. Oscar V. Cruz, D.D., archbishop of Lingayen-Dagupan, the CBCP holds offices in a three-storey building at 470 General Luna Street, Intramuros, Manila and is staffed by 27 priests/religious and more than 82 lay workers.

 

            In 1995, the Catholic Bishop’s Conference of the Philippines was 50 years old, not many years in terms of the whole life of the Philippine Church, but sufficient to show its usefulness and relevance to the time and the people it serves, and the degree to which it so far realized its major objectives.  It is the purpose of this essay to write the history of the CBCP’s 50 years of existence.  In writing that history, one has various options.  He may follow the traditional historiography in which history is centered on the acts, achievements or failures of its leaders, as is employed in most history textbooks.  This is “history from above.”  Or, he may approach it from the point of view of all the bishops and their co-workers.  This is “history from below.”  Or he may even apply a philosophical approach (e.g., Marxist theory of class struggle) to interpret the CBCP history.  Here, I do not intend to use any of these approaches. Rather, in describing the 50 years of its existence, I would like to take into account the ecclesiological framework within which the Conference operated and moved, as well as the changing and diverse historical experiences of the Filipino people which shaped it.  In writing this essay, it is my thesis that the major shift in ecclesiological paradigm in the Philippine Church, which entailed changes in values and orientations, transpired in the Second Vatican Council and that when the CBCP responded to the various challenges which the particular situation of the country presented, it did so within the possibilities of its perception and its ecclesiological framework which did not always coincide with the paradigm-shift.  In view of these two considerations, I would like--at the risk of oversimplification--to divide the history of the CBCP into four periods: (a) the period of defensiveness (1945-1965);  (b) the period of difficult transition (1966-1975);  (c) the period of awakening and prophetic ministry (1976-1986); and (d) the period of renewed vision for the Church and society (1987-1995).  Before treating these periods, I would like, first of all, to describe the beginnings of the CBCP.

 

II

The Beginnings of the CBCP

 

            The origins of the Catholic Bishop’s Conference of the Philippines may be traced to as far back as February 15, 1945 when the Apostolic Delegate, Bishop William (Guglielmo) Piani, even as the war was raging, created the Catholic Welfare Organization (CWO), with its central office at a remodeled coop at the University of Santo Tomas interment camp.  (Eventually, the office was moved to the following addresses in succession:  La Consolacion College at 260 San Rafael Street, Manila in the same year; 1500 Taft Avenue in 1953; 2472 Taft Avenue in 1955; 2655 F.B Harrison in 1974;  Cabildo; and finally, 470 General Luna Street, Intramuros in 1983.)  Obviously with the National Catholic Welfare Council (NCWC) of the bishops of the United States as his inspiration and model, Msgr. Piani’s major objective was “to meet the war emergency created by the destruction of so many towns.”  Seeing the need of a coordinated effort to aid the stricken populace, Msgr.  Piani offered the services of the CWO to General Douglas MacArthur, and the offer was accepted.  In charge of the relief work was the Rev. John Hurley, SJ.  Its first personnel included lay men and women as well as clerics.  During and after the battle refugees, acted as important outlet of the PCAU (Philippine Civil Affairs Unit) foodstuff, and sent out burial squads to bury countless corpses.  In the first five months of its existence, it distributed food, medicine, clothing, etc.  valued at P906,030.

 

            On July 17, 1945, all the bishops met in Manila for their first meeting after the Japanese Occupation, and three days after, Msgr. Piani granted their request to place in their hands the direction of the CWO and make it the official organization of the Hierarchy of the Philippines.  After the Apostolic Delegate received from the Holy See the proposal and directive to incorporate the CWO, the articles of incorporation were duly registered in the Securities and Exchange in Manila, on January 23, 1946, with 18 incorporators.  As appears in the Articles on Incorporation, the purpose of the CWO was “to unify, coordinate, and organize the Catholic people of the Philippines in works of education, social welfare, religious and spiritual aid and other activities.”  The Board of Directors was composed of bishops Gabriel Reyes (Cebu), chairman; Constancio Jurgens (Tuguegarao), Mariano Madriaga (Lingayen), Santiago Sancho (Nueva Segovia) and Alfredo Verzosa (Lipa), members.  A few years later, a new constitution was approved by the Sacred Consistorial Congregation on June 28, 1952 and took effect on June 30, 1953.  Such were the beginnings of the CWO.  It was a welfare organization which had no juridical status in the Church.  It was financed through regular quota subscription from all the bishops. and partly from the shipping service and the War Relief Services (WRS).  Later on, the quota subscription was made on the basis of the Catholic population in each diocese.

 

The Period of Defensiveness (1945-1965)

 

            To understand its subsequent history until the close of the  Second Vatican Council in 1965, it is to be remembered that with the imposition of the American rule, and in the aftermath of the Second World War, the Philippine Church found itself in a new and difficult situation.  Quite apart from the destruction of its churches, schools, hospitals and other institutions which was estimated at P25,000,000, it continued to be confronted with various enormous problems which compounded the problem of poorly instructed Catholics, it suffered from a dearth of financial resources because the people, though generous in other ways, were slow to contribute to the Church, whose needs were supplied by the Patronato Real for nearly four centuries.  It wasl also faced with the invasion of Protestant missionaries, the anti-religious influence of masonry, the anti-Catholic tendencies, the anti-clerical Filipino elite who were inheritors of the anti-clerical feeling during the Revolution of 1898, and those who held up important positions in the government and in business.  It suffered, too, from the effects created by the Aglipayan schism.  In addition, it came to grips with such American innovations as public school system and the separation of the Church and State.  While all this had to do with the inner life of the Church, the bishops were aware of such social problems as social injustice and the menace of Communism, especially with the growth of the Communist Party’s military arm, the Hukbalahap (Hukbo ng Bayan Laban sa Hapon, later renamed Hukbong Magpapalaya ng  Bayan), not to mention the incursion of Western ways and styles and their corresponding values.  Given its ecclesiological framework which was largely defined by the ecclesiology of the Council of Trent and baroque theology, it is not surprising that since its foundation until the end of the Second Vatican Council, the CWO for the most part looked inwardly, and was principally concerned with the defense, protection, strengthening and furtherance of vital interest of the Catholic Church as a social institution and of supernatural values.  (During this period of CBCP history, the body was headed successively by the following archbishops:  Gabriel Reyes [1945-1949/1950-1952], Rufino Santos [1953-1956], Juan Sison [1957-1960] and Julio Rosales [1961-1965].)

 

            Immediately after the war, the CWO was largely engaged in relief services.  When it was made the agency for War Relief Services (WRS), its 18 bishops and prefects apostolic became the 18 regional directors for WRS relief, with the parish priests and various congregations seeing to the equitable distribution without racial or religious distinctions.  From 1946 through 1948, it distributed relief amounting to P4,645,282. 95.  Not a few of its services were directed toward the institution herself.  For instance, aside from the War Damage Claims services it offered to make possible the war damage payments to the Catholic Church, its churches, rectories and schools, it rendered services in particular legal problems for various bishops and religious orders, and, through its Shipping Department, handled their incoming and outgoing, cargoes, inter-island and overseas.  Likewise, it took care of a variety of problems of bishops, priests and religious with the Department of Foreign Affairs, Customs, Immigration, Office of the Registrar General, Registrar of Priests and Ministers division, among others.  Its information Department issued bulletins that were of interest and use of the bishops and the major religious communities.

 

            Eventually, the CWO became the means through which the interests and values of the Catholic Church were defended, protected and furthered.  Faced with the consequences of the separation of Church and State, among them being lessening of the means by which it could fulfill its teaching mission and influence the people, the CWO fought much for the religious instruction in public schools which was strongly opposed by Masons, anti-Catholic individuals and religious sects, and the private schools’ right to exist.  For the bishops, the Catholic schools could help create and support a Catholic order.  Largely for the same reason, and to spread the faith under constant attack, it tried to maintain a national weekly, The Sentinel, despite the financial burden, until its closure in 1968.  Likewise, it had a radio program over DZPI and DZST in Manila and DXMS in Cotabato, even though its original plan, as early as 1949, was to put up its own radio station in order to “guarantee Catholic independence to speak out on any question of morals.”  The “Ting in Mange Juan” radio program was instrumental both in the defense of Catholic faith against Masons and other anti-Catholics, and in the return of many to the Catholic fold.  Faced with the treat of the Communist take over in the 1950’s, the latter two became vehicles through which the Catholic view on Communism was expounded.  In the face of indifferent or even anti-Catholic politicians and Masons, it tried to influence elections and the legislature, and mobilized public opinion. For example, it helped rouse public opinion against the efforts to liberalize divorce, introduce unwise sex education in the schools, discriminate European teachers in private school because of their religion, sterilize children of lepers, etc.  With not much success, it opposed taxation or religious organizations.  And against the corruption of morals, it set up, among others, the Legion of Decency, which later became a commission, to discourage the public from seeing morally objectionable pictures and from patronizing theaters which exhibited indecent films.  As can be gleaned from its resolutions and letters, the CWO, of course, tended to confine the problems of morals to issues related to smutty movies, sex and birth control.  In 1956, it approved not to admit ballet students to Catholic high schools.  Obviously, it then lacked focus on more important moral hardly ecumenical, either in its pronouncements or its activities.  As already noted, all this reflects the ecclesiology of the period, and illustrates an effort to construct a social order in which faith can be embraced, grow, and thus create a Christian culture.

 

            At times, its battles for the protection of the legitimate interests of the Church and the furtherance of supernatural values became celebrated cases.  In 1952, for instance, it was discovered that three top men in the Department of Education, sworn into office to uphold and implement the teaching of religion in public schools, were also sworn in by their Masonic affiliation to eliminate it.  The CWO handed a letter to the President stating the stand of the Church with regard to the Masonic commitment of the three officials.  It availed of the services of Atty. Raul Manglapus, Atty. Ambrosio Padilla, Atty. Jose Feria and Atty. Francisco Rodrigo in prosecuting the cause of the Church.  The Rizal Bill No. 438 is another case in point.  Jose Laurel, proposed to make Rizal’s Noli Me Tangere and El Filibusterismo compulsory reading in all universities and colleges.  The measure ignited a hot controversy, and encountered a determined opposition from the CWO, not to mention the various Catholic organizations, on the ground that it violated freedom of conscience and religion.  The controversy ended with a susbstitution of a different measure which accommodated the objections of the CWO.

 

            But the concerted voice of the CWO was also communicated to the Catholics and the whole nation at large through its letters and statements.  The CWO was almost able issue them on issues of national importance.  Its opposition to Freemasonry found expression in a joint pastoral letter, issued on Jan. 18 and 24, 1950, on the anti-Catholic book of Rafael Palma, The Pride of Malay Race, which tried to prove the Jesuits concerned were liars and the ecclesiastical authorities forgers of Rizal’s retraction, and in its statement on Masonry (Jan. 14, 1954).  Its concern over the threat of Communist takeover can be seen in its pastoral letter on social justice (1949) and on Communism (August 15, 1954).  In these letters, the bishops wisely pointed out the social roots, and criticized the injustices of Capitalism which encouraged the growth of the communist movement; and with the surrender of Luis Taruc, showed its opposition to witch-hunt, even though it rejected Communism.  That it considered the transmission of Christian truth and values through the schools important in a society that fostered pluralism in religion can be inferred from its letters and statements on Religious Instruction in Public Schools on Feb. 18, 1953, on Catholic Education on April 10, 1955, and on the Religious Instruction Bill on June 6, 1965.  The ground for its opposition to the Rizal Bill finds expression in a statement on the two novels on April 21, 1956.  And against the corruption of morals, it wrote a pastoral on materialism, its first joint letter to Filipinos after the war.  All in all, the CWO issued 39 joint pastoral letters and statements from 1945 to 1965.  It may be observed that although these letters and statements were strong when Catholic interests were under attack, in general they tended to dwell on general principles and lack of prophetic slant when it came to political and social questions.

 

            It would appear from the foregoing that the CWO was for the most part concerned with the Church ad intra.  In fact, its administrative structure lends support to this observation.  After 8 years of existence, in addition to the agencies under the secretary general (Sentinel, Relief, Legion of Decency, and Public Relation Office), it had only three episcopal commissions: Department of Catholic and Social Action, and Department of Mission.  That, however, is understandable.  The ecclesiological framework derived from the theology of the Council of Trent put theological limits to the CWO involvement in the socio-economic and the political structure of the nation.  It is not surprising, therefore, that despite the unrest in agriculture and labor fronts, its involvement in these spheres may be characterized chiefly as social charity or welfare.  The importance of the Catholic schools, orphanages, hospitals and other charitable institutions may be viewed from this angle.  Indeed, although it issued letters on social principles (1948) and social justice (1949), the place of these social principles was not yet well integrated into the ecclesiological outlook inherited from Trent.  Obviously, the CWO needed some vehicles to translate these principles into the particular situation.

 

            Initially, its work for the socio-economic aspect of the people’s lives was handled by the Social Welfare Department.  However, in 1952, the Social Action Department of the CWO was established to promote, on the national level, a sound and effective program of Catholic action in the social order in accord with the directives set forth by the popes especially in Rerum Novarum and Quadragesimo Anno .  On April 13-27, 1953, the department organized the Priests and Laymen’s Institute of Social Action (PLISA) under, auspices of the Ateneo de Manila, and one of the concrete results of the PLISA was the establishment of the Federation of Free Farmers (FFF) on Sept. 8, 1953, under the leadership of Atty Jeremias Montemayor. Staunchly anti-Communist, its purpose was the organization of small farmers and tenants for cooperative action defense of their rights, and promotion of their social welfare.  (Federation of Free Works [FFW] was organized earlier, but this was not the initiative of the CWO, even though it was inspired by Catholic social teaching).  Even so, the CWO was not very much involved in labor and rural problems of the day, despite the fact that its statements often quoted papal social encyclicals.  In 1956, the organization suffered a setback in its socio-economic involvement, because after the UST strike by the FFW--affiliated UST Employees Organization, the Catholic Church, in the words of Bishop Lino Gonzaga, “lost much prestige in the labor front.”  It would not be until 1970, and even more strongly in 1976, that the bishops’ body issued a statement on labor.

 

            The same ecclesiological framework limited the lay participation in the social apostolate.  Understandably, Pius XI, in his “Ubi arcano Dei” (1922), within the limits of a monarchial ecclesiology, defined lay apostolate in terms of cooperation in the apostolate of the Hierarchy.  Still, that cooperation was a major link between the Bellarminian view of the Church which rooted all ministry in the Hierarchy and the consciousness that each Christian had to be a witness to the Gospel in the world.  In the Philippines, the lay participation was effected through the coordination of various religious organizations on a national scale under the Episcopal Commission on Catholic Action.  Their primary objective was to strive, give practical effect, in their respective fields, to the mandata of the Hierarchy in accord with the directives of Pius XI.  The Catholic Action was represented at both the diocesan and parochial levels:  the Barangay Sang Birhen, Knights of Columbus, Catholic Women’s League, Legion of Mary, Student Catholic Action, Young Christian Workers, Sodality of Our Lady, etc.  At the national level, these federated into the Catholic Action of the Philippines (CAP).  Aside from such traditional activities as organization of religious celebrations, congresses, and catechesis, these organizations were the front liners in many rallies, lobbying in Congress, and in various social activities.  The Catholic Action of the Philippines sponsored the first Lay Institute of Social Action (LISA), and held its first post-war convention in 1952.  It was not within the province of the lay apostolate to be directly involved in socio-economic institutions and their activities.  Obviously, it was the thinking at that time that if the social order was to be renewed, it would come from the top.

 

            Four outstanding events, which occurred during this period of CBCP history, and in which the CWO was involved, may be recalled because, among other reasons, they demonstrated that the Philippine Church, despite the onslaughts against it by the anti-Catholics, was vibrant and flourishing.  The first one was the convocation of the First Plenary Council of the Philippines in Manila from Jan. 7 to 25, 1953, presided over by Norman Thomas Cardinal Gilroy, archbishop of Sydney (Australia).  Its purpose was to bear witness to the Catholic faith of the Filipino people, and to decree such legislations as may be necessary for the preservation, enrichment and propagation of Catholic life.  To solve the problems confronted at the time, the Council offered to renew the social order through the renewal of spirit of both clergy and laity.  That spirit was to be manifested in the concern for individual salvation and formation of social conscience.  And the individual and social energy generated was to be organized in the forms approved by the Church and under the direction of the hierarchy.  The second one was the Marian Congress in Manila, held on Dec. 1-5, 1954, with Fernando Cardinal Quiroga y Palacios, archbishop of Santiago de Compostela (Spain) , presiding.  It was a grand demonstration of Catholic faith, which culminated in liturgical celebration, participated in by more than a million Catholics, headed by President Ramon Magsaysay and his family.  Then, on Oct. 7, 1961, the Pontificio Collegio-Seminario Filippino, whose cornerstone was laid on Aug. 1, 1959, was finally inaugurated and blessed, so that Filipino seminarians and priests could be trained sub umbra Petri.  Lastly, the nation observed a six-day celebration of the 4th centenary of the Philippine Christianization in Cebu (Apr. 27-May 2), graced by Archbishop Vagnozzi,  Apostolic Delegate to the US, and by most of the Philippine bishops.  It saw the birth of the Philippines Mission Society.

 

The Period of Difficult Transition (1966-1975)

 

            When the Second Vatican Council ended in December 1965, it created a paradigm shift in ecclesiology, as noted earlier:  from a Church understood mainly as a social institution, the self-understanding moved to a Church as the people of God.  The CWO was met by the challenge of the shift, and its corresponding theological and pastoral implications.  The changes brought about by the council was, of course, partly noticed even in the CWO Constitution itself which was revised pursuant to the conciliar decree, Christus Dominus (nn. 37-38), and in accordance with the legal specifics provided for by Paul VI’s motu propio,  Ecclesiae santae (I, 41).  The revisions chiefly consisted in the altering of the name from CWO to Catholic Bishops’ Conference of the Philippines thus:  “to study, promote, coordinate in a way corresponding ever more to the needs of the present time the apostolate of the Church in the Philippines.” Unlike the CWO, however, the CBCP was now a canonical body, a status not given in the preconciliar period.  Approved by the Sacred Consistorial Congregation on Dec. 12, 1967, the newly amended constitution was filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on Feb. 29, 1968.  (However, since this constitution was ad quinquinnium experimenti gratia, it was revised and approved in July 1973, and given recognitio by the Holy See on May 21, 11974).  The episcopal commissions were augmented:  created were the Commission on Seminaries, Commission on Family Life Remuneration and Distribution of the Clergy, and the Commission on Emigration.  (From 1966 to 1975, the following were Presidents of the Conference:  Archbishops Lino Gonzaga [1966-1969], Teopisto Alberto [1970-1973] and Julio Rosales, whose terms extended to the next, more difficult, period.)

 

            Admittedly, however, the impact of the conciliar ecclesiology in terms of the collective theological outlook of the bishops was not immediately felt in the years that immediately followed.  Like the pre-Vatican II CWO, the CBCP tended to look inwardly, and it would, and it would even seem that Bellarmine’s institutional model of the Church continued to dominate the greater part of this period, and its mission in society seemed to be premised, at least in the initial stage, still on the social-charity model.  In fact, on average, most of the CWO/CBCP decisions were concerned with intra-Church renewal in accord with the conciliar decrees on liturgy, ecumenism, seminaries, canon law, etc.:  others pertain to CBCP internal affairs, and the promotion of Catholic faith and doctrine (religious instruction, clerical attire, etc.).  On this score, the post-1965 episcopal body was much in continuity with the post-war CWO.  This is reflected in the subject matter of most of its joint pastoral statements from 1965 to 1971:  religious instruction, Humanae vitae, priestly celibacy, the Holy Father, East Pakistan Refugees, prayer and interior life, etc.  The intra-Church endeavors saw an important event when Pope IV visited the country on Nov. 27-29, 1970 which the bishops regarded as a reminder of the country’s vocation in a new world.  A year before, the Radio Veritas (Asia), which could be heard as far as the People’s Republic of China, was founded.

 

            This is not to say, however, that the CBCP remained on the defensive.  Quite the contrary, it slowly changed its focus from defensiveness to awareness of the role of social apostolate in the mission of the Church, as it did not fail to address the problems of the time, which by 1968 through 1970, especially in the First Quarter Storm, became the issues of rallies, strikes and demonstrations in Metro Manila.  Hence, the appropriateness of calling this period (1966-1975) one of difficult transition.  The issues during these years of rage were the widening gap between the rich and the poor, the feudal economy, graft and corruption, compartmentalized justice, and inadequate law implementation.  These were summed up in the student slogan, “Down with Feudalism, Fascism and Imperialism.”  These years saw the resurgence of the Communist Party of the Philippines, and its influence on students was greatly felt in the unprecedented growth of the Kabataang Makabayan (KM) in 1964.  Later, a Marxist-oriented group of the CCP was established, and by 1969, the New People’s Army (NPA) was already vocal about its intention to change the society by revolution.  But while some sectors of society opted for radical change, others preferred social and political reforms.

 

            The CBCP was socially aware, and it stood for the amelioration of the socio-economic order.  Indeed, at this stage the Conference, in its letters and statements, showed a better contextualization of Christian principles.  Already on Jan 8, 1967, it issued a pastoral letter on social action and development in which it stressed, among others, the mission of the Church in the temporal order, the relationship between evangelization and development, and, in particular, the rights of workers.  In answer to the request of  PISA (Priests’ Institute of Social Action) participants, the CBCP created the NASSA (National Secretariat for Social Action) which served as the secretariat of the Commission on Social Action.  In the same year, it organized the National Congress on Rural Development (Feb 4-11) to promote a genuine awareness of the socio-economic problems.  The Church Goes To The Barrio” was the popular slogan at this time.  The congress was followed up by a pastoral letter on social awareness (May 1, 1968).  In its statement on bishops and moral leadership on July 5, 1969, it affirmed that the mission of the Church included the concern for man’s bodily and temporal welfare, though” her mission is a work of mercy and love.” Acting on the suggestion of the Pontifical Commission on Justice and Peace, it decided in 1967 to adopt the Commission on  Social Action as its counterpart of the pontifical commission.  Priests were trained to head the Social Action Centers in different dioceses.  The following year (May 1), it issued a pastoral letter on social action in which it affirmed the role of the Church in creating a more just social order.  It appears, then, that in the late 1960s the CBCP saw non-conflictual development (cooperative, credit unions, self-help projects) as its new and relevant form of social involvement.  It is probably from this perspective that one is to interpret the CBCP’s response to the statement of the Divine Word Junior Clergy Conference (May 16, 1969), calling on the Hierarchy to respond to the critical social situation.  Obviously, the development model was a step forward from that of social charity.

 

            It is within the familiar framework that the Conference addressed political and government-related issues and problems.  By 1970, student and peasant demonstrations became more frequent, and the CBCP was at first concerned with the demonstration themselves and the analysis of their tactics.  It saw in them the dangers of Communism, and defended the Church against the accusation that it was rich.  It proposed dialogue between teachers and the youth, establishment of recreation and training programs for the youth, even recommending the holding of a congress for the purpose.  When the issues raised in these rallies and demonstrations led to an urgent call for a Constitutional Convention, the CBCP, on Jan 25, 1970, appealed to Congress for a non-partisan convention.  In preparation for this convention, the CBCP agreed to deliver talks and sermons about this political exercise, cooperate with other groups for honest and free elections, hold convention priests on the subject, and allow clerics to run as candidates.  It may be noted that the Conference exerted much effort and worked hard so that provisions on religious instruction and tax exemption of Church properties be included in the proposed Constitution.  Six months later, as the violence in the country escalated, it issued a letter on civic responsibility, denouncing what it perceived as the evils of society, and asking citizens to participate conscientiously in the political life of the nation.  Admittedly, however, there were progressive members of the CBCP who perceived that more than social charity and development were needed to restructure the Philippine society and thus solve the social ferment.  Though these were minority, this nonetheless indicated that the CBCP was being caught in the difficult transition from the old to the new ecclesiological paradigm.

 

            But to what extent the paradigm shift in Church’s understanding of itself and its mission after the Second Vatican Council affected the collective ecclesiological outlook of the CBCP is probably nowhere shown more clearly than during the years of Marcosian regime from 1972 to 1986.  Ostensibly declared on Sept. 21, 1972 to save the Republic and reform the society, martial law eventually showed its true colors:  with the democratic institutions dismantled, Marcos acquired almost unlimited powers clothed with a veneer of legality by the 1973 Constitution, curtailed the freedoms of the media, revoked the writ of habeas corpus, forbade assembly, strike and mass action, legalized arbitrary arrest and detention.  In the process, thousands of opposition leaders and suspected “subversives” were jailed.  With US support, he beefed up the military to more than 150,000 in  6 years, and to more than 275,000 in 8 years, flung open wide the country to world market.  The economy deteriorated, and foreign debt ballooned to around $28 B later.  The poor became poorer, and violation of human rights was almost pandemic.  In the face of these realities that affected the Philippine Church, the CBCP met head on with a new challenge which almost eclipsed many side but grave issues.

 

            In general, it may be said that the responses of the CBCP to the challenges under the new dispensation underwent development, and were not always homogenous.  Five days after the declaration of martial law, its Administrative Council issued a letter recognizing the right and duty of civil authorities to take appropriate steps to protect the sovereignty and assure peace and security of the nation, and asking martial law implementers to exercise prudence and restraint and respect human dignity, and the people to be calm and law abiding under the new political realities (Sept. 26).  But despite the uneasiness of a number of bishops, and despite such important issues affecting the nation as the approval of the 1972 Constitution, the abolition of Congress, the Referendum of 1973 through National Assemblies, and despite the grim realities spawned by the new order, the CBCP was generally silent in the first five months, nay, in the first three years of the martial law regime (1972-1975).  Of course, in its first plenary meeting in 1973, the bishops agreed to organize a CBCP liaison group with the government, but then the issues were intra-Church: radio stations closed, Catholic schools, Chinese priests’ integration with Philippine society, and cases of priests having difficulties with martial law.  This concern for the interest of the institutional Church is reflected in its various decisions.  In the same year, it made a stand of contraception vis-a-vis the government policy, and condemned sterilization which a decree of Marcos’ made officially acceptable.  Late in the year, a Church-Military Liason Committee (CMLC), which, among other tasks, monitored arrests, detentions, and subversive activities, was established, with Citizen’s Committee on Justice and Peace at the local level and urged citizens to vote in the referendum as a moral obligation, and which was thought to be in contradiction to “A Declaration for Human Dignity at the Polls” signed by 14 bishops.  The latter called the referendum “a vicious farce.”  The right of the Administrative Council to issue the statement was questioned by 12 bishops on October 6, 1976.  (The dissent, it may be conjectured, was not lost to Marcos who, after the massive boycott in the Oct. 16, referendum, retaliated against the Church by deportation, raid, closure of radio stations and publications, as well as arrest and detention of lay workers.)  Chiefly for this reason, the Jan. 1977 meeting of the CBCP was preceded by a colloquium which brought to conclusion the bishops’ thinking on the Church’s involvement under the martial law regime.

 

            From 1977 to 1982, the CBCP became more united and its collective approach to the challenge of martial law is best described by Cardinal Jaime Sin’s policy, namely, “critical collaboration,” although, in the light of the bishops’ letters and statements, it was largely more critical than collaborative.  Even though at this point in time, it did not yet question to legitimacy of the regime, the CBCP, no doubt, was in touch with the concrete historical experience and the aspiration of the people.  At the same time, it became obvious that in its understanding of the role of the church in the socio-economic and political order, it was not only development but, more accurately, it was liberation, and the CBCP became more committed to it.  Its statement of its mission in the Jan. 1977 pastoral letter, “The Bond of Love in Proclaiming the Gospel,” deserved to be quoted:  “This is EVANGELIZATION:  the proclamation, above all, of SALVATION from sin; the LIBERATION from everything oppressive to man:  the DEVELOPMENT of man in all his dimensions, personal and communitarian:  and, ultimately, the RENEWAL OF SOCIETY in all its strata through the interplay of the GOSPEL TRUTHS and man’s concrete TOTAL LIFE (Pope Paul VI,  Evangelii Nuntiandi, n. 9, 29).  THIS IS OUR TASK.  THIS IS OUR MISSION.” This shift to the liberationist understanding of ecclesiastical mission can be noted even in the themes of Alay Kapwa in the early 1980s:  Communal Action Toward Human Liberation” (1980), “Beyond Poverty into Total Liberation” (1981), and “People’s Participation, a Way to Total Human Liberation” (!982).

 

            These constitute an advance from the cooperative and development thrust in the late 1960s.  But in this Jan. 1977 pastoral letter, the CBCP sharply criticized the government population program, the treatment of national minorities, the handling of the Mindanao situation, the harassment of basic ecclesial communities (BECs) was viewed as springing from the mandate of the Church’s mission, the lay workers being essential in the implementation of that mission.  This teaching marks a change from the pre-conciliar one in which lay apostolate was understood to spring from the mandata of the Hierarchy.  Clearly, as a body, the CBCP awakened to its mission of liberation and assumed the role of “a prophet to the nation.”  The year 1977 may then be considered a turning point in the CBCP history.  Henceforth, the Conference no longer engaged in the pronouncement of principles, as it did in 1969.  Instead, it courageously made moral judgment, denouncing the excesses of the regime.  As the socio-economic and political situation deteriorated, and as militarization and repression intensified, the CBCP came out with a pastoral letter, “Exhortation Against Violence,” on Oct. 7, 1979 to stress that the escalating violence in the country has its roots in the unjust structure of society, and that it can be stopped by putting peace with justice to the same structure.  Marcos lifted martial law in 1981, but this was merely a cosmetic (it was most likely timed for Pope John Paul II’s pastoral visit to the country Feb. 17-22), for the dictatorial effects were well in place.  In fact, the following year was a bad one for the Church, for it saw what amounted to Church persecution:  arrests and detention of priests, lay workers, and activists; raids of institutions; attempts at infiltration; accusation of communist infiltration in the Church; trial by publicity in the media, etc.

 

            By 1983, the year in which many Filipinos, as a result of the tarmac incident, were mobilized in the struggle for freedom and justice, the CBCP understandably became even more prophetic and critical of the martial law regime.  And it may be conjectured that the Pope’s socio-political messages during his visit two years ago could have emboldened the bishops in their concern for the construction of an alternative vision of society.  In fact, the CBCP’s posture, as it finally turned out in 1986, was on collision course with that of the dictatorship.  The Conference was not only, as it were marching with the people; it was leading them on the march, and it did so credibly.  The Church--and probably no other--was looked up to as the bastion of hope.  No doubt, the collective ecclesiological outlook of the CBCP was liberationist, and the understanding of its role in the socio-economic and political order was not hazy.  Indeed, it called for the transformation not only of individuals but also of societal structures as part of integral liberation.  In the final result, what was under criticism was not simply the individual acts of martial law; the whole structure of dictatorship itself stood under severe criticism.  It is not insignificant that from 1983 through 1986, all its joint pastoral letters and statements, except for its statements on biblical apostolate (Feb. 1985) and on the Marian Year (February 1 and August 6, 1985), had direct reference to martial law and the major problems it engendered.  Not surprisingly, then, the CBCP-Government relationship became increasingly strained.

 

            Thus, on February 20, 1983, it made the first of its strongest indictments against the dictatorial regime in the pastoral letter, “Dialogue for Peace,” even though it was meant as a call to restructure society in accordance with God’s plan.  It amounted to an expose of problems (arrest and detention, disregard for due process, torture, etc.) which have roots in poverty, anti-people economic program, economic corruption, and unjust laws.  It took a clear preferential option for the poor, supporting them in their assertion of dignity and defense of rights.  The letter was followed up by the CBCP’s “Pastoral Guidelines for Priests, Religious and Lay Workers in the Task of Social Justice.”  As a result of the pastoral letter, Marcos asked the bishops made it known that reform of structure was what was in their mind.  In the same year, the CBCP withdraw its membership from the Church-Military Liaison Committee because of an apparent pattern of government pressure on Church people and activities.  With his authority slipping off, Marcos instituted the PCO (Presidential Commitment Order) by means of a decree, which enabled the military to arrest arbitrarily and detain indefinitely.  The CBCP, in its message to the people on the exercise of PCO, passed a moral judgment on the presidential decree, calling it, along with its implementation, immoral.  The second half of 1983 was marked by a worsening of political, economic and social conditions, precipitated by the assassination of Sen. Benigno Aquino Jr.  With the country on the brink of chaos and anarchy, the CBCP issued a statement of reconciliation on Nov. 27, calling for a social transformation--transformation of unjust structures and individuals--required by authentic reconciliation with God and with one another as an alternative to the continuance of present injustice and violence.

 

            Late in the year, the CBCP Administrative Council (Dec. 28) decided to issue a statement on the coming plebiscite and Batasan elections in May 1984.  Published on Jan 8, 1984, it did not fail to mention, among others, the right not to participate in political exercise which citizens consider contrary to their conscience.  Meanwhile, the national situation continued to turn for the worst:  people were being “salvaged” both by the Left and by the Right” the foreign debt ballooned to $24 billion; the peso depreciated very much and the economy was almost bankrupt:  Marcos revived the “secret marshals” who were virtually licensed to kill; and he continued to exercise martial law powers through the notorious Amendment 6.  It is against this background that on July 11, the sacredness of human life and its defense:  “Let there Be Life.”  It called for a revamp of the entire economic and political structure and, in particular, severely criticized the institution of secret marshals (which Marcos later disbanded), the Amendment 6 whose repeal it demanded, and the economy, whose crisis, according to the bishops, could be solved it, in the first place, confidence in the government is restored.

 

            The following year, the CBCP did not issue any pastoral letter or statement which had direct bearing on politics, except the one on terrorism (July 8).  In this letter, the CBCP denounced the murder of those dedicated to the service of others, the execution of civilians suspected of collaboration with the Left, the use of cultists in counter-insurgency campaign, and urged the reorganization, if not the dismantlement, of the CHDF.  Early in the year, it released a joint pastoral letter on biblical apostolate (Feb.) and two on the occasion of the observance of the Marian Year (Feb. and Aug. 6).  But the worsening situation was not far from their minds.  In their January meeting, they held a brainstorming on the national issues and searched for positive action regarding them.  They discussed such issues as the question of Communism (faith and ideology), violence and non-violence, and such specific questions as US bases, nuclear plant, social justice and social development.  The CBCP committed itself to a free, clean and honest election and to support Namfrel in its work to achieve the goal.

 

            The climax of the CBCP’s involvement and commitment during the Marcosian years came in 1986.  When Marcos called for a snap election in late 1985, the CBCP took up the issue in their January meeting and on Jan. 26 issued the joint pastoral letter, “We Must Obey God Rather Than Men.”  Having stated that elections can become a great scandal and an offense against God, it said that the forces of evil bent on frustrating the people’s will should not make them succumb to cynicism, and in the conflict of interest and loyalties, it reminded them to let God’s will prevail.  It assured them that the bishops stand with them.  Elections were held on Feb. 7, and as the bishops feared, the fraud and deception were systematic and of incredible proportion.  The Namfrel tally showed Aquino leading by a large margin, but the Comelec tabulation had Marcos coming ahead. Eventually, the Comelec computer operators walked out to protest the discrepancy between the input and the Comelec count.  On Feb. 12, the KBL-dominated Batasang Pambansa declared Marcos winner.  The following day, the Bishops drafted a post-election statement and issued it to the public on Feb. 15.  The statement labeled the elections as unparalleled in fraudulence, and virtually accused Marcos of criminally using power to thwart the people’s sovereign will.  In its strongest condemnation of the Marcos power through fraudulent means had no moral basis.”  It called for a peaceful, non-violent and systematic struggle to correct the wrong.  The pastoral statement proved to be historic.  In a few days, the EDSA Revolution was born, and Marcos was dislodged.  Clearly, the CBCP stood as a moral leader of the people, showing itself as champion of democratic principles, and its statement became a catalyst of non-violent revolution.

 

            With Marcos gone, the CBCP assumed the role, it may be said, of a moral and spiritual leader and guide in the direction which efforts at social transformation must take.  No doubt, its ecclesiological outlook remained one of integral liberation, and though it continued its policy of critical collaboration with the Aquino government, this time the emphasis was on collaboration. On the whole, it would seem that the CBCP was supportive of the Aquino Administration, probably because it had high hopes that it would be instrumental in the renewal of the social order and in the establishment of a more lasting peace.  Of course, there is little doubt that the bishops had some influence on President Aquino.  She appointed to the Constitutional Commission four people easily identified with the Church.  Such provisions in the Constitution as the primacy of family, the prohibition of abortion and divorce, and religious instruction in public schools were indicative of the moral influence of the CBCP.  Understandably, with its pro-life, pro-poor and pro-Filipino provisions which are consonant with authentic human values, it was not surprising that the CBCP, after much discussion in a meeting to which some members of the Constitutional Commission were invited to speak, opted in its letter “Covenant Toward Peace” on Nov. 21, 1986, for the ratification of the proposed constitution.

 

The Period of Renewal of Vision for the Church and Society (1987-1995)

 

            This period was one of hope and expectations.  (The archbishops who served the CBCP as President during this period were Cardinal Ricardo Vidal, whose term ended in 1987, Leonardo Legaspi [1987-1991] and Carmelo Morelos [1991-1995].)  As the socio-political situation has changed, it appeared to the bishops that an opportune time had come to renew the local Church.  As already noted, a paradigm shift in ecclesiology took place in the Second Vatican Council, and while its effects influenced the collective thinking of the bishops, there was a need to exteriorize the implications of the shift in terms of the theological thinking and aspiration of the people and the pastoral programs of the local Church, which had become even more complex and problematic.  While the CBCP understood the Church as the People of God, and its mission as integral liberation, yet the implications of this understanding had yet to be enshrined in a vision and made concrete in a comprehensive program for the Philippine Church.  Thus, in January 1988, the CBCP approved to hold a plenary council.  Preparations, immediately began, and the Second Plenary Council was finally celebrated from Jan. 20 to Feb. 1991, participated in by a total of 479 participants (96 bishops, 181 priests, 21 major religious superiors, 12 presidents or rectors of Catholic universalities, 24 rectors or deans of seminaries and 146 lay faithful).  The decrees of the PCP-II were given recognitio by the Holy See on April 25, 1992, and promulgated at the Cathedral-Basilica of the Immaculate Conception in Manila on July 22, 1992.  Without exaggeration, the council may be recognized as the greatest ecclesial event in the CBCP’s 50 years of existence.

 

            Basically, what the Council did was to define what the Philippine Church ought to be.  In its final document, the Council envisioned a Church which is a community of disciples, in which there is unity in diversity, equality in dignity and participation; a Church which is at the same time a community-in-mission:  a Church of the poor expressed in basic ecclesial communities.  Its mission is integral evangelization, which implies the salvation of the total human person and the liberation and transformation of society.  Clearly, this is far removed from the institutional understanding of the Church (presupposed in the first years of the CWO/CBCP) whose mission is the salvation of the soul by means of grace, word and sacrament.  This vision of the Church needed to be actualized.  Hence, the CBCP resolved to implement the Council’s mandate for a National Pastoral Plan.  On July 11, 1993, it gave its official approval to the plan.  The present challenge to the Conference is to see to it that the plan is implemented through a pastoral management and administrative system that will operate from the top down to the smallest ecclesial community in the parishes.

 

            Though the council was the most significant event in this period, yet the CBCP’s vision for renewal not only for the Church but also for society can also be seen in its ad-extra statements and activities.  By 1987, the different branches of the democratic government have been restored.  But despite the hope that a new political society would emerged from the EDSA Revolution, it became clear that the old society was back.  Thus, precisely because the socio-economic ills did not disappear at the February Revolution, the CBCP, conscious of its mission in the socio-political order, was critical of the post-EDSA administrations.  For example, the realization that corruption still remained, involving even high government officials, occasioned the pastoral letter, “Thou Shalt Not Steal,”  on July 11, 1989.  The letter considered graft and corruption a sin that is hateful because it steals money from the poor.  It suggested the formation of multi-sectoral anti-graft council across the country to monitor the use of public funds and muster public opinion in the hope that a massive, persistent campaign would discourage the practice.  On July 24, 1992, it opposed the Ramos Administration’s move at restoring the death penalty and, instead, proposed that the President does something to the ground which breeds criminality (poverty, defects in the enforcement, justice and penal systems, presence of scalawags in uniform).  In its pastoral statement on kidnapping (Jan. 25, 1993), it appealed to the Philippine National Police (PNP) and the Military to cleanse their ranks of kidnapper accomplices or masterminds.  Of no less importance, it called for a thorough review of the Republic Act 7716 in a statement on taxation and expanded value-added tax, questioning whether the law merely strengthens the tax structure’s bias against the poor (July 10, 1994).

 

            Of course, it appeared to the bishops that the transformation of society requires more than a change of leadership; it is a work of justice in which the community participates and cooperates.  Hence, on Jan. 26, 1987, it addressed the issue of peace process, and stressed that only non-violence is consistent with Gospel values.  It called for land reform, denounced political extremists, condemned atheistic communism and liberal capitalism, and encouraged dialogue.  In its efforts to help transform society, the bishops reiterated its call for a comprehensive land reform in its exhortation on July 14, “Thirsting for Justice.”  It is the landless, the exploited, the disadvantaged and the powerless who have the single most urgent claim on the conscience of the nation, the bishops said.  When the putchists attempted a coup d’etat on August 28, 1989, which dealt a serious blow to the government stability, 17 bishops, headed by Cardinals Ricardo Vidal and Jaime Sin, issued a statement of support to the Aquino government the following day.  And on Jan. 31, 1990, in the pastoral letter “Seek Peace, Pursue It,” it likewise condemned the attempted Dec. 1989 coup d’etat, the bloodiest, costliest and most serious one, as immoral and unjust usurpation of power.

 

            To be sure, the transformation of society does not only require the reform of those in the government, the participation of the governed in the peace process, and in the cooperation of the Rightists.  Of no less importance, it cannot dispense with the support of the Left, specifically with the effort to put an end to their two-decade struggle.  Dialogue with the CPP-NDF was essential.  In fact, in 1992, President Fidel Ramos organized the National Unification Commission (NUC) to make contacts with the group.  The CBCP supported the move, and in Jan. 25, 1993, it issued a pastoral letter on peace to participate in the peace process, directly or indirectly.  This was followed by another letter, “Peace in Our Times,” in which the Conference expounded the meaning of real place.  Indeed, as early as Jan. 1992, the CBCP acceded to the request of the National Peace Conference (NPC) to head a delegation which would meet with the CPP-NDF representatives, either in Hongkong or in Switzerland, to discuss proposals for a dialogue. But despite its effort to enlist them to the peace process, the CBCP never recoiled from criticizing the Left (even as its criticism applies to the military as well) on various occasions, as in its statement on the manipulative use of human rights violations on July 11, 1989.

 

            If the CBCP lodged criticisms such as these, it was a part of its effort at helping the people (including the administration, and the oppositionists) in the renewal of the social order.  It is for the sake of this renewal that it gave much importance to the holding of truly democratic, peaceful and clean elections in which citizens must be truly involved.  In its “Pastoral Letter on Preparing for the 1992 Elections” on July 22, 1991, it pointed to the wastage of the nation’s resources and the perversion of democratic principle in the disservice done by individual’s unworthy of the office, and hence the need for education of voters.  Thus, in its desire to strengthen the democratic ethos, widen the horizons of peace and unity among the people, it issued “Renewing the Political Order” on Nov. 28, 1991--a pastoral guideline on choosing candidates for the May 11, 1992 elections.  It is noteworthy that among the desirable qualifications of candidates that the letter enumerates are maka-diyos, spirit of service, vigorous defender and promoter of justice and an enduring and preferential option for the poor-qualifications which are consonant with integral liberation.  And on Jan. 31, 1992, it issued another letter, “Decision at the Crossroads,” appealing to the people to set priorities aright:  honor and dignity before money, service before power, common good before self-interest, the nation before utang na loob.  The following year, it decided to recognize and encourage the PPCRV.  In all this, the CBCP asked the people to take seriously their participation in the political process by various means.  It reiterated this point in its statement “Election 1995--A Challenge to the Young”  (Jan. 16, 1995).  The CBCP, was active in the elections through NASSA’s votecare (Voter’s Organization--Training and Education for Clean, Authentic and Responsible Elections) program in all the 79 dioceses, with more than 250,000 volunteers.

 

            Equally important, the integral-liberation ecclesiological outlook helps explain why in the post-Edsa situation, the CBCP addressed itself to various issues of national importance: devastation of nature, overseas contract workers, foreign debt, oil prices etc.  For instance, having observe the devastation of natural resources, which has to do with the inequality of the social structure, it issued the letter,  “What is Happening To Our Beautiful Land?” on Jan. 29, 1988--probably the first one issued by an episcopal conference in world history.  In protest of the inhumanity, abuse and exploitation of overseas workers, whose migration is rooted in the poverty of the people, it asked the government to take effective measure to safeguard the rights of Filipino expatriates, and appealed to all for economic recovery so Filipinos would not be forced to leave the country.  In 1990, it recommended that a desk for pastoral care of migrants and their families be set up in the diocesan social action centers.  On the occasion of Flor Contemplacion’s funeral a few weeks before the 1995 elections, it repeated its appeal to the government to provide the overseas workers protection, which should take precedence over potential economic gains.  Even its rather long pastoral letter on the the Eucharist, “To Live in Memory of Him:  One Body, One People” (Mar. 21, 1988), does not fail to allude to integral human liberation:  “we desire to become eucharistic communities active in the defense and promotion of the downtrodden, ready and willing to give ourselves eucharistically to others, struggling in the building of a just, peaceful and loving society.”  The same may be said of foreign debt which weighed heavily on the people and which constituted a humongous obstacle to economic recovery.  Of course, the CBCP, through the permanent council, offered no solution in its statement on Sept. 10, 1990, but it asked the government to consider the debt crisis within the context of the ethics of survival.  And of no less significance, in 1994, it registered a strong protest against the price increase of petroleum products authorized by the Energy Regulatory Board (ERB).  It saw no objective justification for the increase, and regarded the increase prior to the holding of hearing a lack of concern for the common good.

 

            It may be said that the 50th year of CBCP existence ended with a historic note.  In 1995, John Paul II made his second pastoral visit to the Philippines on the occasion of the 10th World Youth Day, the theme of which was: “As the Father sent me, so I am sending You”  (John 20:21).  The purpose of his coming was for the youth who, as the third Christian millennium approaches, “are entrusted in a special way with the task of becoming communicators of hope and workers for peace in a world that is in ever greater need of credible witnesses and messengers consistent with [Christ’s] message.”  At the same time, it saw the quadricentennial celebrations of the Archdiocese of Manila, Cebu, Nueva Segovia, and Nueva Caceres.  But for the CBCP itself, this period (1987-1995) witnessed other important events and activities:  the canonization of Blessed Lorenzo Ruiz (1987), the publication of the final draft of the Catholic Faith Catechism (CFC) by the Episcopal Commission on Catechesis and Catholic Education, and the Catechism of the Catholic Church (CCC), the Statement on Fundamentalist Groups (Jan. 27, 1989), and the Guidelines for the Eucharist (1990), the birth of the Program for the Rehabilitation of Mt. Pinatubo Victims, and the holding of the National Retreat for Priests (1992, 1993 and 1994).

 

III

Conclusion

 

            That, in brief, is the history of the Catholic Bishop’s Conference of the Philippines--a body that leads and builds up, engages, commits, prays, and serves.  Its 50-year history sketched out above may be succinctly described, however, in terms of transformation: from a CWO that was defensive to a CBCP that was involved in the liberation of society:  from a silent body to a prophetic one in the face of social injustice:  from a CWO that saw the Church as a social institution to a CBCP that regards the Church as the People of God: from a CWO that had answers to human problems to a CBCP that listened to the “signs of the times”:  from a CWO that tended to focus morality to problems of sex, birth control and smutty films to a CBCP that questioned and protested against violation of human rights, social injustices and violence to the poor:  from a CWO that saw involvement in the social order as a part of pre-evangelization to a CBCP that considered transformation of the social order as a part and parcel of its mission; from a CWO that looked at the work of the laity as part of the apostolate of the Hierarchy to a CBCP that viewed the laity as ecclesia discens (the learning Church) to a CBCP that respected them as partners in the task of integral evangelization:  from a CWO that was tried to renew the social order from the top to a CWO that was engaged in social charity to a CBCP that was involved in total development and liberation.  Undoubtedly, this description is a generalization, if not oversimplification, but the truth may not be far removed from it.

--Lope C. Robredillo--

    

 


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Sep 21, '10 8:09 AM for everyone

By Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD

 

(Pre-Note: Partly revised to fit the format, this piece is an excerpt from the body of a letter addressed to the parish priest of Sulat, Eastern Samar, who sought the author’s opinion on the accuracy and appropriateness of celebrating the centenary of Sulat in 2006.)

 

 

WAS SULAT created in 1906?  Since the Philippine Commission of 1906 seems to say that Sulat was given independence on October 31, 1906, some have construed this to mean that Sulat became a municipality on that date.  The impression created, however, is far from correct.  Quite the contrary, Sulat was constituted a municipality long before 1906.  The truth is, Sulat was one of the earliest pueblos (townships or municipalities) to be established on Samar, dating back to the time of the Jesuits. 

 

Let me cite some history references attesting to its creation:

 

 (a) According to F. Huerta, Estado Geografico, topografico, estadisticoen las Islas Filipinas (Binondo: Imprenta de M. Sanchez, 1865), p. 308, when Sulat came under the administration of the Franciscans in 1768, it was already a pueblo or a municipality that was founded by the Jesuits: “Seiscientos ochenta y nueve tributos con 3,637 almas contaba este pueblo, fundado por los PP Jesuitas cuando el año 1768… de su administracion y se le asigno por primer cura franciscano….”

 

(b) F. Redondo. Breve Reseña… (Manila: Sto Tomas, 1886), p. 222, citing Cavada, states that the town was founded in 1650: “Creado en 1650, segun Cavada, y tiene la advocacion de San Ignacio de Loyola.”

 

© A. Pastrana, “The Franciscans and the Evangelization of the Philippines (1578-1900),” Boletin Eclesiastico de Filipinas, XXXIV (1965) 435, p. 86, says that Sulat was founded before 1768.

         

     Indeed, even the souvenir programs of Sulat town fiestas argue against 1906.  Why? The reason is that in those programs, Sulatnons usually publish the names of the gobernadorcillos and presidentes of Sulat during the Spanish and early American time.  But then, one must remember that only towns had gobernadorcillos or local presidentes.  In other words, the souvenir programs themselves admit that Sulat was a township before 1906.  The gobernadorcillos, capitan municipal and presidente del pueblo in the 19th- and early-20th century Sulat were the equivalent of today’s municipal mayors.  If Sulat were a barrio in the 19th century, it would not have gobernadorcillos, but simply tenientes. 

         

     Moreover,  if Sulat were not a municipality in the 19th century, it would have been called not pueblo (which is the Spanish equivalent for municipality in the Philippines), but visita (barrio) or rancheria (sitio).  Huerta (1865), for instance, merely describes Catalab-an as a visita of the pueblo of Sulat, because it was a barrio.  In 1886, Dolores is named among the rancherias (sitios) of Paric, because it was not yet a town; rather, it was simply a sitio of Carolina, which was a barrio of Paric.  Yet, none of the latter terms (visita, rancheria) were used to describe Sulat—it was always called pueblo in all documents dating from 1768 that I encountered at the Philippine National Archives.  This means that Sulat was already a municipality even before the Franciscans came to Samar in 1768. 

 

     It would seem that the idea that Sulat was founded in 1906 derives from a rather incorrect reading of historical documents.  The assertion that Sulat was born in 1906 obviously comes from the Reports of the Philippine Commission, because nowhere else (I like to think)  is the establishment of municipalities of Samar in 1906 mentioned, except in the report of 1906.  But before one reads the report of 1906, it is important to read the report of 1903, Act 960, Section I, no. 17: “The municipality of Tubig shall consist of its present territory and that of the municipalities of Paric, Sulat, and San Julian, with the seat of the municipal government at the present municipality of Tubig, under the municipality of Taft.”  Note the word—municipalities!  Hence, Sulat was already a municipality even before 1903!

 

          Now, in the Report of the Philippine Commission of 1906, Act No. 1558, Section I, we read: “the former municipalities of Paric, Sulat, and San Julian [are separated] from the municipality of Taft.”  The significance, therefore of October 31, 1906, is simply the restoration of Sulat to its former status as a municipality, after it was combined with Taft in 1903, when the 43 municipalities of Samar were reduced to 25 only.   In other words, if the Report of the Philippine Commission of 1906 uses the word establishment, what it meant is not that it was establishing the municipality of Sulat, but only restoring it to its former independent status (as municipality).

 

          This brings us to the question: What is the significance of October 31, 1906 for Sulat, if it is not its creation as a municipality?   I can write a lengthy dissertation on this subject, but because of the nature of this piece, I will be short.

 

          To begin with, when the Americans came to the Philippines, they tried to picture that we Filipinos embraced them, and that there was not much armed opposition.  Hence, in 1901, they declared the pacification of our country so their imperial designs would be acceptable to the Americans at home, the senators and other government officials who opposed the colonization.  To the contrary, Samar was turbulent!  But they concealed the turmoil by handing over the administration of the island to the civil government on June 15, 1902.  To put the island under martial law or under the military government would be to admit that there was war on Samar.  The truth is, even after the surrender of Gen Vicente Lukban, the Samareños carried on the war against the Americans, largely through the Pulajanes.

 

          One can gauge the turbulence by the following figures of 1904 I lifted from the history of the Philippine Constabulary: “There were 1,800 native soldiers on Samar and 16 Companies of the United States Infantry occupying the coastal towns.  Eleven officers and 197 enlisted men had been killed in action, 48 officers and 991 men had died of disease, 46 officers had been wounded in action, 768 men had been discharged for disability.  Firearms to the number of 7,474 and 45,018 rounds of ammunitions had been captured or surrendered to the Constabulary, 4,862 [Pulajanes] had been killed, and 11,997 prisoners had been taken.”

 

          Why did the Philippine Commission of 1903, Act No. 960, combine Sulat with Taft, together with San Julian and Paric?  The reason is that the civil government had no control of these municipalities; they could not be defended by the PC or the Scouts, nor could they be governed by the pro-American inhabitants! In the whole Eastern Samar, the municipal police had no arms, except in Borongan!  The Americans could not arm them in the first place, because they were not sure of their loyalty!  On the other hand, the Pulajanes were too numerous, their force overwhelming.  Terror reigned. What could a few scouts do in town? 

 

In Dolores, for instance, on Dec. 17, 1904, the 38th Scouts encountered 1,000 Pulajanes who attacked on the rear and flanks, and Capt Hayt and all of his 37 men were butchered, except one sergeant who bore fearful bolo wounds. In Oras, on Nov 10, they overpowered the Scout garrison, massacred all the 13 Scouts and took their rifles. Moreover, sometimes the town officials were also the officials of the invisible town government of the Pulajanes!  Yet the Americans did not call in the US Army to Samar until later (practically only to Eastern Samar) because they wanted to create the impression that there was only banditry, no insurrection!  The result was that thousands of people, because they could not be protected by the Scouts and the Constabulary, joined the Pulajanes; otherwise, the latter would have to eliminate them. (Oh, our written history has been unkind to the Pulajanes.)

    

      Thus, in order to have control of some people, and make it appear that the municipal governments have not fallen into the hands of the Pulajanes, the government resorted to the concentration of the natives.  The remaining inhabitants in Sulat, Dolores, San Julian and Taft were concentrated in Taft, with Angel Custodio Crisologo, a Paricnon, as their Municipal President.  The truth is, most of these towns on Eastern Samar, including their barrios, were sacked and reduced to ashes, left with practically no dwellers!  Because they did not summon the Army, the Americans allowed many Samareños to die.  On the other hand, those Sulatnons, San Juliananons and Paricnons who went to Taft for protection were not having picnic, either!  Numerous as they were, they suffered hunger, fear, sickness, disease and death.  Moreover, they were far from their fields, carabaos, and their livelihood!

 

However, by 1906, the Pulajanes, who were the virtual rulers of the entire island until 1905, were decimated, albeit there was still resistance.  That is why, although before 1903, there were 43 municipalities, now in 1906, there were 32—an increase of 7 from the 25 towns of 1903, among them being Sulat.  This implies that the Sulatnons who had survived, those who had surrendered, and those who had lived in Taft, returned to Sulat, and began rebuilding the poblacion and the barrios.   (But unlike Sulat, the 11 other towns could not yet be given back their former status as municipalities because protection of life and property, let alone governance, could not be assured.) 

                     

     I have more to say about this unfortunate period of Samar history, but I hope this would be enough to give a background to the significance of October 31, 2006 for Sulat.  In our time, it would be comparable to liberation the town of Maslog by the local government and the military after it was ruled over by the NPAs in the 70s, although with a formal declaration by a duly constituted body, similar to the Philippine Commission during the American period. *


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Sep 21, '10 8:07 AM for everyone

By Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD

 

            (This piece was delivered by the author to the Sangguniang Bayan of Salcedo in December 1999 upon invitation by the Mayor to help settle the question on the exact date of the founding of the town, which for many years was thought to be December 8.  After the talk, the Sangguniang Bayan made a resolution changing the date.)

 

IN MAKING HISTORY, there is no substitute for carefulness.  Let me begin with a real case. During the Marcos era, it was proposed that the name of the country, the Philippines, be changed to one that does not convey colonialism.  It was then suggested that it be named Maharlika, a Tag-alog word for noble and aristocrat.  If I remember right, Senator Eddie Elarde brought this proposition to the floor of Batasan Pambansa.  Of course, Marharlika was the name of the guerilla band that Lt Marcos allegedly led.  But scholars came on the scene, recounts Time magazine.  They pointed out that Maharlika was probably derived from Sanskrit.  But then, they observed, the original words for Maharlika were most likely maha lingam which means great phallus!  From that time on, the plan to change the name of the country to Maharlika was pulled out.  Were it pushed through, it would have made us the laughing stock of the world.

 

The Current Observance of the Foundation Day

 

            If this contemporary example obviously brings home the point that we should be very careful in making history, it is no less important that we should be critical in writing it.  We should listen to scholars.  We are writing for generations to come.  And not many people have the leisure, still less the talent, to write history.  Most of us depend on historical accounts handed down to us, never bothering to inquire whether they are authentic or not, whether they are correct or not.

 

            And this especially applies to the writing of the history of Salcedo.  For a number of years, Salcedo has been observing its founding day on December 8. Personally, this came to my knowledge two years or so ago, when I happened to come to the place.  Having seen how busy people were, I inquired what the celebration was all about, and I was told that they were commemorating the founding of the municipality.  As a student of Eastern Samar history, I was surprised at the information, because I never recalled that a certain Eastern Samar town was founded on the solemnity of the Immaculate Conception.  So, I went over my collection of historical data, and sure enough, I discovered that the foundation day of Salcedo was being observed on a wrong date.

 

The Exact Date of the Founding of the Township

 

            When, indeed, was the township of Salcedo founded?  On the basis of my historical inquiry, I can say squarely that the exact date of the creation—or, to use the proper term—erection, of the municipality or pueblo of Salcedo is December 5, 1862.   This is what one discovers when he wades through the documents on parish erections.  Contrary to the impression of many, the creation of a municipality is done not because a group of people decided to establish a town in a way they want.  I am a bit uneasy when I read local histories that appear in souvenir program of town fiestas, recounting how so and so or his family founded the town.  Even as early as the time of the governor-generals, there was already a process observed in the creation of towns.  Which is why, it is properly documented.  Indeed, when one reads the records on parish erections at the Philippine National Archives, he will find out that certain procedures are observed.

 

I wish to add, for the sake of information, that just as the country of 1990s has the local government code that stipulates the requirements for the creation of a municipality, so in the 1800s the Spanish government had its own provisions for its founding in the island of Samar, and whole Philippines for that matter.  First of all, there must be a petition by the people for its creation.  But before a petition could be made, they must see to it that they have established the institutional requirements, namely, the proposed pueblo should have a church, a rectory (convento), and a casa tribunal (roughly, a municipal building), and should have a population of at least 600 tributos.  Once a petition is formulated, it has to be approved by the priest who has jurisdiction over the proposed pueblo, then approved by the bishop of Cebu and the gobernador political-militar of Samar.   Only then it is forwarded to the governor-general of the Philippines who issues the royal decree.  In the case of Salcedo, it was approved by Governor Geneal Rafael Echague, because it had all the physical requirements and had a population of 783 tributos, roughly, 3,000 inhabitants, enough, according to law, to support a parish priest.  There are, in other words, documents when the town of Salcedo was created, and it is on the basis of these documents that we should ground our assertions.

 

A Set of Evidence for This Correct Dating

 

            But quite apart from the original documents on the erection of the pueblo, the following standard works should be enough evidence to argue for December 5 as the correct date:

 

1.      Felix Huerta, Estado geografio, topografico, estadistico, histori o-religioso de la santa y apostolica provincial de S. Gregorio Magno, says: “De una visita del pueblo de Guguan [Guiuan] titulada Sudao, se formo este por decreto del Superior Gobierno de 5 de Diciembre de 1862, quien le dio el nombre que lleva.”  Huerta further states that a stone church and a parish house were built by Fr Pedro Monasterio.  The pueblo had also a escuela de primeros letras (primary school).  It had a population of 3,400.

 

2.      Felipe Redondo, Breve Resena de lo que fue y de lo que es, gives some more information.  Aside from saying that the pueblo was established on December 5, 1862, he also states that the parish was erected on August 19, 1865: “Erigido en parroquia por el Diocesano en 19 de Agosto de 1865, for Superior aprobacion de 5 de Diciembre de 1862.

 

3.      Bruce Cruickshank, a Fullbright scholar, who earned his doctorate in East Asan History from the University of Winsconsin, Madison, USA, says in an article in Leyte-Samar Studies on 19th century settlement on Samar that “on December 5, 1862, it [Salcedo] was taken from Guiuan and made both a pueblo and an independent parish… It had been known as Sudao, but evidently changed its name when given pueblo status.”

 

This set of evidence makes it difficult to argue that the present observance on December 8 is correct.  It may be noted that one of the revered criteria of historicity is multiple attestation.  According to this criterion, a historical material should be witnessed by multiple sources.  Here, December 8, 1862 fails, because it is not witnessed in any other document.  On the other hand, what is attested to by various sources is that Salcedo was made into a pueblo on December 5, 1862.

 

The Source of this Erroneous Dating

 

            In view of this, a question may be raised.  If Salcedo was erected on December 5, 1862, according to all reliable historical records, then, how come the foundation anniversary is observed on December 8?  I think, I know the answer.  Sometime in the late 70s up to early 80s, a certain priest (let us call him Fr N.) from Samar collected historical materials on Eastern Samar.  He asked a lady to copy some translations of some materials from the files of Fr Cantius Kobak.  Unfortunately, the copyist made several errors in her work.  For example, for the erection of Paric, she wrote 1892, whereas the document says it is 1878.  The same may be said of the date of the creation of Salcedo.  The copyist had it wrong.  (Of course, we make mistakes in copying materials!)  My certainty about this error is reinforced by the fact that, in my file on the town of Salcedo which comes from the late Fr Kobak, the papers date the founding on December 5, not December 8.

 

            Now, part of these erroneous documents was, unfortunately, too, used when the brief history of Salcedo was written.  I do not know who wrote the brief history, but I am quite sure that he/she obtained the material from Father N.  (he is now deceased), or must have consulted him.  The proof is that the translation of the relevant documents corresponds almost exactly to that of Father N.  I hasten to add that only Father N. was in possession of these erroneously copied documents.  And therefore, the error in the writing of Salcedo history could have come only from this document in question.  In other words, there is only one explanation for this historiographical inconsistency; it is a case of erroneous copying.

 

            Let me put in bluntly.  As far as I know, there is no existing historical record which states that Salcedo was born on December 8, 1862 (except, of course, the one that the municipality of Salcedo now has and the source of that erroneous dating—the copied document of Father N.).  It is, of course, unethical on my part to challenge any one to produce documentary evidence which claims that December 8, 1862 is the correct date for its founding.  Nonetheless, one can always inquire for himself whether my research on the exact dating can be invalidated by some other documentary evidence.

 

Final Remarks

 

            Let me end this talk with a short note.  History is an on-going science.  It is always updated.  We change historical assertions as soon as we discover new historical facts, and we change historical interpretations on the basis of newly discovered data.  To illustrate: the Philippine independence was celebrated on July 4 for many years.  But it was changed to June 12 by then Pres. Diosdado Macapagal, upon the advise of historians, like Teodoro Agoncillo.  For more than a hundred years, historians, including Rizal, thought that the recorded first mass in the Philippines was celebrated in Butuan.  But it was on the basis of a mere footnote in the work of Blair and Robertson, The Philippine Islands, published in 1901, that historians began re-reading the account of Pigafetta and came to the conclusion that the first mass was in Limasawa (of course, there are scholars who continue to defend Butuan).  And who knows, a few years from now, it may become acceptable to assert that the first mass was held in Homonhon, Guiuan, Eastern Samar?

 

            My hometown is another example.  For many years, Dolores was thought to have been founded in June 1888.  However, when I started making research on its history, I was able to obtain original documents, and I discovered that the township was erected on April 20, 1878, much to the surprise of many Doloresnons!  I also came to know that the 1888 dating came only from oral source, in particular, from two old men who were already in their 70s (?) when they were interviewed in 1952, recollecting what happened when they were still children.  A last example: for many years, the Pulajanes of Eastern Samar were viewed as fanatics, who were said to have been fooled by their leaders.  Today, they are seen in a new light, thanks to such historians as Renato Constantino and Reynaldo Ileto.  When I wrote on the history of the Pulajanes in Dolores, I embarked on a new interpretation of the movement.  Indeed, while writing the histories of various towns in Eastern Samar, I discovered so many inaccuracies in their earlier historiographies—those that can be read in parish/town fiesta souvenir programs.

 

            Changes in historical assertions and historical interpretations are always inevitable.  If this is true of the Philippines, this should be true of the history of Salcedo.  There is no reason why we should stick to the wrong date.  It would not be historically valuable to assert that the observance on this wrong date is traditional, because historiography is a science.  Wine is always valued for its vintage, but not historiography.  It would not be flattering to insist on this wrong dating which, after all, owes to an error of a copyist.* 


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Jul 29, '10 11:42 PM for everyone

by Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD (Biblical Studies)

 

WHEN our committee translated into Binisaya (Samar-Leyte version) the Order of Mass in 1995, the majority opined that the translation of the Lord’s Prayer need not be changed, since it has been hallowed by tradition.  However, I felt then, even as I do now, that a new translation was in order.  For one thing, we do not have a common translation of it (as can be seen shortly).  For another, its translation, I like to think, should reflect contemporary biblical scholarship.

 

In what follows, therefore, I would like to present my proposed Binisaya version and give reasons why I give a different rendering.  My translation is anchored on the almost unanimous scholarly consensus that the Our Father (traditionally known among Catholics as Pater Noster) is an eschatological prayer, that is to say, it is a prayer that is closely connected to the period of the last days, when Christ returns, the forces of evil are destroyed and God establishes his kingdom (see R Brown on the subject). In other words, my translation does not view the Lord’s Prayer in terms of everyday needs and aspirations.  For purposes of comparison, I give here five translations in existence (nos. 1-5), and the last one (no. 7), which follows the original New Testament Greek Text (n. 6), is my own version (LCRV), followed by an explanation for my distinctive rendering.

 

1.      American Bible Society (ABS, 1948): Amay namon, nga aada ka ha langit.

2.       Philippine Bible Society (PBS, 1984): Amay namon ha langit.

3.   Traditional Version, Devocionario (TrV1, 1953): Amay namon nga aada ka sa mga langit.

4.      Traditional Versions, Ordinarium Missae (1965), Tanaman han Kalag, (1972) (TrV2, there is no difference between the two save that the former uses sa and san instead of ha or han): Amay namon nga aada ka ha mga langit.

5.      Balerite’s Translation (BaT, 1995): Amay namon ha mga langit.

6.      Greek Text: pater hemon ho en tois ouranois

7.      Robredillo’s Version (LCRV, 2010): AMAY NAMON NGA AADA HA MGA LANGIT.

 

My proposed translation has langit in the plural (contra ABS and PBS) because the Greek is in the plural (tois ouranois).  Nga aada (so ABS, TrV1. TrV2) is retained (contra PBS, BaT), since the Greek ho is used to stress the distinction between the one in the heavens and the one on earth.

 

1.      ABS: Gindadayaw an imo ngaran

2.      PBS: Pagdayawon an imo baraan nga ngaran

3.   TrV1: Pagdayawon an imo ngaran

4.      TrV2: Pagdayawon an imo ngaran

5.      BaT: Pagdayawon an imo ngaran.

6.      Greek Text: hagiastheto to onoma sou

7.      LCRV: [PAG]SANTOSON AN IMO NGARAN

 

The word santos is used, rather than dayaw, to translate hagiastheto whose infinitive is “to make holy;” in Samarenyo language, dayaw (ABS, PBS, TrV1. TrV2, BaT) generally means to praise, not to sanctify.  The Greek word is translated [pag]santoson because, contrary to the common impression, it is not in the subjunctive—this is the mode used in the Latin Vulgate translation—but rather in the aorist, imperative passive.  Also, it should be noted that the

grammatical construction here is divine passive, that is to say, the agent is God, not man.  It is God who makes his name holy: [Pag]santoson an imo ngaran. However, it may be admitted that it is also legitimate to translate it as [pag]himayaon an imo ngaran because to make holy and to glorify is synonymous.  The prefix pag is in brackets inasmuch as the word can stand without it.  Of course, instead of pagsantos, which is really an adaptation of the Spanish santo, one might use the verb pagbaraan, but the former has an almost universal acceptance among Samar-Leyte Bisayans, whereas the latter literally means fortunate.

 

1.      ABS: Kumanhi an imo ginhadian

2.      PBS: Maghadi ka unta ha amon

3.   TrV1: Ikanhi mo sa amon an imo ginhadian

4.      TrV2: Ikanhi mo ha amon an imo ginhadian

5.      BaT: Ikanhi ha amon an imo Ginhadian

6.      Greek Text: eltheto he basileia sou

7.      LCRV: IKANHI AN IMO PAGHADI

 

Ikanhi is used to translate the Greek word eltheto which is also in the aorist imperative, not subjunctive, which seems to be the assumption of the PBS translation.  (In Samar-Leyte Binisaya, unta is usually employed to indicate contrary to facts; its use in this verse by PBS is therefore surprising!)  This sentence follows the Matthean construction—imperative + article + subject + sou.  Like the previous petition, this one is also divine passive, which can be loosely translated as Ikanhi an imo paghadi.  If paghadi is used instead of ginhadian (contra ABS, PBS, TrV1, TrV2, and BaT), it is because ginhadian connotes territory or space, which is hardly envisaged by the context, whereas the Greek word basileia is a dynamic concept—a concept which seems to be behind the maghadi ka unta ha amon of PBS.

 

1.      ABS: Matuman an imo pagburot-an, sugad ha langit, amo man ha tuna.

2.      PBS: Matuman dinhe ha tuna an imo kaburut-on sugad han didto ha langit.

3.  TrV1: Matuman an imo boot dinhi sa tuna sugad san didto sa langit.

4.     TrV2: Ipasunod an imo pagbuot dinhi ha tuna sugad han pagsunda didto ha langit.

5.      BaT: Matuman an imo pagbuot dinhi ha tuna sugad han pagsunda didto ha langit.

6.      Greek Text: genetheto to thelema sou hos en ourano kai epi tes ges.

7.      LCRV: [PAG]TUMANON AN IMO KALADNGANAN DINHI HA TUNA, SUGAD HAN [PAGTUMANA] DIDTO HA LANGIT.

 

Also in the imperative passive is the word genetheto, here translated as tumanon. (Most translations use the verb pagtuman [so ABS, PBS, BaT, TrV1] instead of pagsunod [so TrV2] which literally means to fulfill, observe.)  Like the previous two petitions, this one has the imperative + article + subject + sou construction, and is also in divine passive, with God as agent.  Instead of pagburot-an (so ABS) or kaburot-on (so PBS) or pagbuot (so TrV2 and BaT) or boot (TrV1), the word kaladnganan is used to translate the Greek thelema which is more than the buot or “will” of God; its meaning is actually the divine plan of God.  The thought of the petition is that the community of Christians asks God to effect on earth the divine plan which is faithfully observed in the heavens.

 

1.      ABS: Tagan mo kami niyan hin kan-on ha ikinaadlaw.

2.      PBS: Tagi kami yana nga adlaw han pagkaon nga amon ginkinahanglan.

3.   TrV1: Tagan mo kami niyan san kan-on namo sa ikinaadlao.

4.      TrV2: Tagan mo kami niyan han karan-on namon ha ikinaadlaw.

5.      BaT: Tagi kami yana han karan-on namon ha ikinaadlaw.

6.      Greek Text: ton arton hemon ton epiousion dos hemin semeron

7.      LCRV: TAGI KAMI NIYAN HAN AMON KARAN-ON HA TIARABOT NGA ADLAW

 

Tagi is used, instead of tagan, because dos in Greek is an aorist imperative.  The crux interpretum in this petition is the Greek word epiousion which, admittedly, is one of the great unresolved puzzles of the New Testament lexicography.  It is not found outside the Gospels.  In standard New Testament handbooks, four meanings have been suggested: (1) necessary for existence; (2) for the current day; (3) for the coming day and (4) that which belongs to it.  The majority of current biblical scholarship favors the third option.  Among other reasons, the Lord’s Prayer is eschatological, and so is the bread.  Hence, rather than karan-on ha ikinaadlaw (so ABS, TrV2, BaT) the proposed translation is karan-on ha tiarabot nga adlaw.  Karan-on is used to translate artos which, in English, means bread; kan-on, favored by ABS and TrV1, is generally identified with rice.  On the other hand, pagkaon (so PBS), is generic, which means food in Binisaya, and does not fit the context.  However, there seems to be no difference between yana or niyan, and therefore, either can be used.  

 

1.      ABS: Ngan pagwad-on mo an amon mga utang, sugad han amon pagwara han mga nakakautang ha amon

2.      PBS: Pasayloa kami han amon mga sala sugad han pagpasaylo namon han mga nakasala ha amon

3.   TrV1: Ngan pagwad-on mo an amon mga sala, sugad san pagwara namon san mga nakasala sa amon.

4.      TrV2: Pagwad-on mo an amon mga sala, sugad han pagwara namon han nakasala ha amon

5.      BaT: Ngan pasayloa an amon mga utang, sugad han pagpasaylo namon han nakautang ha amon

6.      Greek Text: kai aphes hemin ta opheilemata hemon hos kai hemeis aphekamen tois opheiletais hemon

7.      LCRV: NGAN PAGWAD-I KAMI HAN AMON MGA UTANG, SUGAD NGA GINWARA NAMON HA MGA NAKAUTANG HA AMON.

 

The Binisaya word ginwara is used because in Matthew the Greek aphekamen is aorist indicative (meaning, have cancelled, remitted, pardoned or forgiven), whereas in Luke it is present indicative—aphiomen.  The thought is that God’s cancellation presupposes cancellation on man’s part.  Mga utang (so ABS, BaT), not mga sala (so PBS, TrV1, TrV2) is used to translate the Greek word opheilemata, which means debts.  It should be borne in mind that mga sala is more proper to the Lukan version which has harmatias, meaning sins.  Consequently, what is proposed here is pagwad-i rather than pasayloa (so BaT, PBS), because the sense demands it.  Moreover, the verb pagwara (ABS, TrV1, TrV2) is more inclusive than pagpasaylo.  PBS and TrV2 failed to place Ngan (kai in Greek) at the beginning of the sentence.

 

1.      ABS: Ngan diri mo kami pagdad-on ngadto ha panulay

2.      PBS: Ayaw itugot nga hingadto kami hin makuri nga kataragman

3.   TrV1: Ngan diri mo kami itugot san panolay

4.     TrV2: Ngan diri mo kami bayaan basi diri kami pagdag-on han mga panulay

5.      BaT: Ngan ayaw itugot nga masulay kami

6.      Greek text: kai me eisenegkes hemas eis peirasmon

7.      LCRV: NGAN AYAW KAMI PABAY-I HA TAKNA HAN KAKURIAN

 

The Greek me eisenegkes, which is in the aorist subjective, literally means ayaw pagdad-a. This, however, cannot be translated as diri… pagdad-on (contra ABS) because God does not tempt man (see James 1:13).  If the proposed translation reads ayaw pabay-i (the words used in TrV2), the reason is that the prayer asks God to preserve us in the final diabolical onslaught.  But the problem in this petition, which affects the translation of me eisenegkes is the Greek word peirasmon which cannot be merely translated as pagsulay (contra ABS, BaT, TrV1, TrV2).  Most New Testament scholars opine that this refers to the final (eschatological) onslaught of Satan (see Rev 3:10).  If this consensus is right, the word cannot refer to ordinary temptation, even though that meaning is not excluded.  Since the entire Our Father is eschatological, it would make sense if it is translated as ha takna han kakurian, a translation which has most likely similar exegesis that the makuri nga kataragman of PBS has.

 

1.      ABS: Kundi luwason mo kami ha karautan.

2.      PBS: Kundi bawia kami ha Karat-an.

3.   TrV1: kundi bawion mo kami sa karautan.

4.      TrV2: kundi bawion mo kami ha mga karat-an.

5.      BaT: kundi bawia kami ha karat-an.

6.      Greek text: alla rhusai hemas apo tou ponerou.

7.      LCRV: KUNDI TALWASA KAMI TIKANG HAN MARAOT. 

 

The controversial Greek phrase here is apo tou ponerou.  The word poneros is ambiguous; it can be translated either as karat-an (evil) or an maraot (the evil one).  Given, however, the preceding petition in which we ask to endure the onslaught of Satan, it is but logical that the word ponerou be translated as an adjective with the understood subject, namely, Satan, whose titles in the Bible include ho poneros (an Maraot).  By translating it as an maraot, the ambiguity of poneros is preserved, because it can refer to a person or a thing.  It seems to me that the Bisayan karat-an (PBS, TrV2, BaT) or karaotan (TrV1) refers more to “evil thing” or “evil event”, a meaning hardly envisaged in the petition, if viewed eschatologically.  The petition thus understood, it would be more correct to translate the Greek rhusai as talwasa (contra BaT, TrV1, TrV2, PBS), rather than bawi-a.  The Bisayan talwasa is quite similar to luwasa that ABS uses.

           

             My new version of the Lord’s Prayer, directly translated from the original New Testament Greek that appears in Matthew 6:9-13 reads: Amay namon nga aada ha mga langit, [pag]santoson an imo ngaran, ikanhi an imo paghadi, [pag]tumanon an imo kaladnganan dinhi ha tuna, sugad han [pagtumana] didto ha langit.  Tagi kami niyan han amon karan-on ha tidaraon nga adlaw, ngan pagwad-i kami han amon mga utang, sugad nga ginwara namon ha mga nakautang ha amon.  Ngan ayaw kami pabay-i ha takna han kakurian, kundi talwasa kami tikang han maraot.  Having proposed this, I hasten to add that I am not sure if a direct translation from the Greek text can be accepted in the Order of Mass, because strictly speaking, the Lord’s Prayer in the Mass has to follow the Latin text.  But even so, for reasons I cited at the start of this essay, I would still propose that the people of Samar and Leyte use a new translation of the Our Father (from the Greek text), if only to make them aware of the eschatological meaning Jesus gave it when he taught his disciples.

 

PS: This new rendering of the “Lord’s Prayer” is a part of a new translation that I have embarked on, beginning with Matthew and ending with John.  Hopefully, I could finish a new Binisaya (Samar-Leyte) version of the New Testament in a few years.


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Jul 29, '10 11:37 PM for everyone

by Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD

 

(Pre-Note: The data used in the writing of this essay were taken from rare books and archival documents found at the Philippine National Archives [Manila], Philippine National Library [Manila] Archivo-Franciscano Ibero Oriental [Madrid, Spain], Cebuano Studies Center [Cebu], Divine Word University Museum and Library [Tacloban], Lopez Memorial Museum [Pasig] and University of Santo Tomas Library [Manila]. Other sources were provided by Dr Bruce Cruikshank, sometime Visiting Professor of Georgetown University, Washington DC, the late Rev Dr Pablo Fernandez, Professor of Church History at the University of Santo Tomas, and the late Rev Cantius Kobak of the Franciscan Friary [Manila].)

 

THE BEGINNINGS OF the pueblo (township) of Can-avid may be traced to as far back as 1604 when the Jesuit missionaries who farmed out from the Residencia de Palapag (Palapag Residence) started evangelizing the various pre-Hispanic hamlets on the eastern littorals of Ibabao (pre-Hispanic term for Eastern Samar).  In order to introduce the faith and make it grow, and to facilitate social intercourse, the early missionaries embarked on a process called reduccion, by means of which the infinitely scattered hamlets were organized into larger villages, called bungtos.

 

            Jubasan: A Pre-Hispanic Settlement. Among the bungtos which the missionaries consolidated was Jubasan, nestled a few kilometers from the mouth of Can-avid (formerly known as Ulot or Loquilocon) river, on its southern bank. The scattered gamoros (by gamoro is meant a cluster of houses, headed by a datu) along Ulot river were organized into a large village called Jubasan.  It became an important village because Jubasan river was the normal passage-way if one had to cross from Ibabao to Samar (Western Samar): “este es el paso ordinario en tiempo de brisas para ir desde Samar a Ibabao.”  In 1616, Jubasan had around 600 population.  Admittedly, it was not easy for the missionaries to congregate the people in the bungto not only because of the frequent Moro raids which drove people deeper into the hills, the raiders devastating their houses and crops, but also because of the frequent cholera epidemics, as in 1608-1609.  Even more significant, the people, as they have been used to since time immemorial, wanted to live near to their fields.

 

            The Sumuroy Rebellion.  As center of the scattered tiny settlements along the Ulot river, the bungto of Jubasan, did not last long, however.  When Agustin Sumoroy, the castellan at the Palapag fort, began a revolt against the Spaniards on June 1, 1649 in Palapag, the first bungto to join the rebels was Bacod (now submerged in Dolores river), where the inhabitants burnt the church and the convento (rectory).  The Jubasanons also joined them.  Because the rebellion assumed an almost unmanageable proportion, a huge military force was assembled under Don Gines de Rojas.  In Jubasan river, Capt. Juan Fernandez de Leon, who just came from the cotta of Guiuan to beef up the forces under de Rojas, was ambushed, although the rebels failed to kill him.  When the rebellion was quelled, the people paid dearly.  In Bacod, the gobernador del pueblo, the fiscal mayor del padre and the mayor principal were executed.  As a punishment, the bungto of Jubasan, like Bacod, was suppressed and became almost deserted.  Later on, however, people started settling again on the place, which, after the Spanish-American War, came to be known as the rancheria [sitio] of Giboangan. 

 

            The Rise of Paric. With the suppression of their bungto, most Jubasanons who survived the rebellion started gathering on a smaller settlement east of Jubasan, called Paric. In the 1720s, years before the Jesuits were expelled from Samar, Paric was already a big visita of Tubig.  Under the political jurisdiction of Paric, which was ecclesiastically dependent on Tubig, were the visitas of Carolina, Bacod, Dapdap and Oras.  When the Franciscans came in 1768, one of the first things they did was to propose the separation Paric from the mother bungto of Tubig.  Toward this end, Fr Manuel Valverde, OFM, in 1839, directed the construction of a convento, a escuela de instruccion primaria (parochial school), and a church of mamposteria (rubblework).

 

            Creation of Paric as Pueblo and Parish.  In the 1860s, the visita of Paric already had what were required for the creation of a pueblo (township), namely, a church, a convento, and a tribunal (roughly, municipal building).  It also had enough population, as the law so required, to support a parish priest.  As early as 1858, it had around 2,300, according to the German naturalist, Feodor Jagor, who visited Paric that year.  So, when the parish priest of Tubig and the town officials petitioned for the creation of Paric into a pueblo, through an expediente of August 31, 1863 written by the Franciscan Provincial, their petition was granted by the King, who decreed its creation on April 5, 1864.  The decree was communicated to Don Rafael Echague, Governor-General of the Philippines, through the Overseas Ministry.

 

            The Governor-General issued his Superior Conformity Decree on June 16, 1864.  Although Paric was created a pueblo and parish simultaneously, its ecclesiastical independence actually came only on April 20, 1878 when the Bishop of Cebu, Bp. Benito de Madridejos (1867-1886) issued the decree of the erection of the parish, placing it under the patronage of St Joachim, Jesus’ grandfather.  The bishop appointed Fr. Jose del Olmo, OFM, as its first parish priest.  Under the jurisdiction of the new township and parish were the visitas (barrios) of Bacod, Dapdap, Carolina, and the rancherias (sitios) of Dolores, Jinolaso, Tubabao and Balagon. (Oras was no longer under its jurisdiction because it was made into a separate pueblo in 1850.)  Of course, the poblacion (town proper or central village) of the municipality, needless to state, was located in Paric.

   

         The Relinquishment of Paric as Poblacion.  A problem, most likely more pressing than anything else, with which the Paricnons were confronted, was the eating up of the poblacion by the Ulot (or Loquilocon) river.  The constant erosion of the river bank on the northern part of the poblacion, caused by the big and frequent floods, has so took its toll that the portion on which a cluster of houses stood became part of the Ulot river.  At this time, the parish priest of Paric was Fr Juan Vicente Carmona. OFM (who was born on May 6, 1862 in Campo de Criptana, Spain).  The municipal officials (1885-1887), as recorded in the Relacion de los nombramientos hechos para constitutivo los tribunales municipales, Provincia de Samar, were as follows:

            Gobernadorcillo: Carlos Robredillo

            Teniente Primero: Leoperto Planesniles

            Teniente Segundo: Martin Irasga

            Juez Primero:  Pedro Esido [Hesido]

            Juez Segundo: Martines Geroy

            Alguacil: Fernando Bongon

            Alguacil: Joaquin Cebrero

 

The Growth of Barrio Maria Angeles.  In 1886, after much deliberation, the parish priest, together with the municipal authorities, formally petitioned the Governor-General of the Philippines for the transfer of the poblacion to a growing visita, known for many years as Dolores, a kilometer from the mouth of Bacod (later on, Dolores) river, thinking that the new poblacion would be safe from floods and erosion.  The petition having been approved, they effected the transfer in 1887, and the visita of Dolores became the poblacion of Paric.  However, not all the residents of Paric went to the new poblacion of Dolores.  A few remained (it may be noted that in 1912, the church and the convento were still there, and today, a part of old poblacion of Paric constitutes barangay Canteros); but others transferred to a small settlement near the mouth of the Ulot river.  This already existing settlement, known for many years as Maria Angeles, eventually became the largest visita of the poblacion of Dolores. 

 

Although they sometimes engaged in fishing, the inhabitants of Maria Angeles were basically farmers who planted rice, gabi and coconut.  In 1891, it was already connected to the poblacion by a road whose construction was started in 1887 under the direction of the friars Vicente Carmona, Vicente Millan, Pedro Calvo, Antonio Rodriguez and Gil Martinez. (May I suggest to the present municipal officials of Can-avid not to change the name of Real Street, because it is the original or “royal” street of Maria Angeles, connecting the visita to Dolores.)  The visita was placed under the patronage of the Blessed Virgin, Queen of Angels.  Politically, it was large enough to warrant the election of two tenientes to head the visita or barrio.  During the elections for the municipal and barrio officials on March 19, 1893, the following were elected to administer the visita de Maria Angeles:

       

            Teniente Primero: Mariano Lazarra

            Teniente Segundo: Alejandro Godian [Gudian?]

            Juez Primero: Ventura Gele [Buenaventura Geli?]

            Juez Segundo: Braulio Obayan [Hobayan?]

            Alguacil Primero: Onato [Donato?] Obleñana

            Alguacil Segundo: Pablo Gerces [Gercen?]

 

(In passing it may be mentioned that in the same elections, the visita of Carolina had the following officials: teniente primero: Gabriel Robeños; teniente segundo, Felipe Rebato; juez primero, Oliva Lazarra; juez segundo, Martino Robes [Robis, Robin?]; alguacil primero, Ceriaco Lazarra; alguacil segundo, Esrael Gele [Israel Geli?].  The visita of Balagon had Alfonso Goldara as teniente, and Timoteo Jucusol as alguacil.)  They held their post from 1893 to 1895.

 

            Changes in Name: From Maria Angeles to Victoria and to Canabid.  At the end of the Spanish regime, Maria Angeles was already a flourishing visita, the biggest of all the visitas of Dolores.  In 1896, it had a population of 913, half of the total population of Dolores.  Carolina had only 322, while Balagon had 170.  Its principal products were abaca, copra, gabi, palay and palawan. When the war between the Filipinos and the Spanish government broke out, Maria Angeles supported Gen.Vicente Lukban, who represented Aguinaldo’s revolutionary government in Samar.  And one of the symbolic gestures the barrio officials made to support the movement was to change the name of the visita from Maria Angeles to Victoria.  When the Filipino revolution was crushed, the officials again altered the name of the barrio, and called it Canabid (note the spelling: Canabid, not Can-avid.)  According to the 1903 census, it had a population of 1,107, whereas Balagon had 192. 

 

            Canabid Becomes a Municipality.  Canabid remained a barrio of Dolores until June 15, 1948, when it became a municipality under Republic Act No. 264, through the presentation of Congressman Adriano Lomuntad, to the Philippine Congress on February 14.  Its first mayor was Lucendo Benitez, then vice-mayor of Dolores. On June 9, 1954, the people of Can-abid, through their mayor, Julio F Irasga, and supported by the parish priest of Dolores, Fr Rufo Castro, expressed their desire to Msgr Federico Moreno, Apostolic Administrator of Calbayog, to have a permanent pastor.  It became a parish, separate from Dolores, only on July 10, 1956 when Bp. Miguel Acebedo, bishop of Calbayog, issued the decree erecting it.  The decree stipulated that the jurisdiction of the new parish, canonically dedicated to Our Lady, Queen of Angels, coincided with the civil jurisdiction of the municipal government.  Tasked to build up the parish was Fr. Clodualdo Arcales, whom the Bishop appointed as its first pastor.  He took position of the parish on July 26, with Fr Bernardino Baxal, Vicar Forane, as installing prelate.*

 

APPENDIX: EXCURSUS ON THE NAME CAN-AVID

 

I WOULD LIKE make a short comment on the changes of the name of Canabid.  As I noted previously, the earliest name of Can-avid was Maria Angeles.  During the Filipino-American war, it was changed to Victoria, no doubt to signify the victory of the revolution.  Because Lukban’s war never succeeded, Victoria became Canabid.  I suspect that the barrio officials changed the name to Canabid, instead of reusing the old one--Maria Angeles--to create the impression that the barrio has severed itself from its historical past, specifically its ties with Spain.  It is probably for the same reason why Jubasan was changed to Guiboangan and Paric to Canteros. These names--Canabid, Canteros, and Giboangan--were given after the fall of the Spanish regime.  That these are new names is evidenced by the fact that the map of Jose Algue, published at Manila in 1899, still have the names of Maria Angeles, Paric and Jubasan. (One can take a look at this map in the rare books section at the mezzanine, Philippine National Library. However, Commissioner Marcelino Libanan also possesses a copy of this rare map; he showed it to me last July 25, 2010.)

 

            But whatever value there is to the changes in names, I have not found any documentary evidence on what is so meaningful and valuable in the term Canabid that it was chosen to be the name of the settlement.  As a student of Eastern Samar history, I consider the derivation from “nahabid” as a pure aetiological legend. Incidentally, the word “habid or habed” does not appear in the authoritative 1814 Spanish-Bisaya dictionary of Mateo Sanchez de la Rosa; abid does occur, but has no meaning that relates to a formation of houses, which habid is supposed to mean.  The word is neither found in modern Samarenyo dictionaries. What can be encountered in the old lexicon is abid, derramar in Spanish, which in English means to pour, to let out of a vessel, to leak, to disembogue. Also, it may be noted that, later on, the spelling was changed to Can-avid. Why letter “v” replaced “b” is not clear.  One possibility is that it was intended to create the impression that the name is old, because it uses letters of the Spanish alphabet (“c” and “v”), and therefore can claim a long tradition.  Still, this modern spelling, Can-avid, does not appear in the documents even in the early 1900s.  At any rate, I would not object of the Congressman of Eastern Samar, through a resolution by the Can-avid Municipal Council, would file a bill changing the name of Can-avid to its original name, Maria Angeles.  There is no doubt that the original name of the town is more meaningful.*


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Jul 29, '10 11:34 PM for everyone

By Lope C. Robredillo, SThD

 

POLITICS IN THE Philippines has become largely an exercise in which the rich, the privileged and the elite vie among themselves to capture positions of power, retain them for themselves, and expand them.  It is more than a mile removed from the Jeffersonian ideal.  By and large, it scarcely has the advantage of the majority who are poor and the common good for its primary purpose, however lofty might what holders of power trumpet otherwise.  On the contrary, the majority are shut out, for those who do politics represent not the poor but themselves and their interest.  And because power, as Lord Acton puts it, tends to corrupt and absolute power corrupts absolutely, corruption tends to inhere in its exercise.  The greater the power and privilege, the more extensive the corruption, or the opportunities for it.  As practiced in this country, politics is the art of governance of the rich, by the powerful, and for the privileged.

 

            To begin with, those who dominate national and even local politics belong to the privileged class—mostly big landlords, big businessmen, or their agents.  (Of course, that a good number of all the 90 million Filipinos can qualify for elective positions, is enshrined in the law; but that they can actually run for elections is enshrined in the ocean.)

 

            If these privileged people run for office, one is tempted to say that it is not primarily to serve the majority, though political advertisements may argue the contrary.  In reality, they run in order to capture political power.  Why so?  The reason is that it is the single most important power in the country.  Political power enables them to control people, pass laws and make policies that are to their advantage, even legitimize their control, and dominate others.  Even more significant, political power, as we shall mention shortly, can be converted to economic power.  Hardly would they pass a bill that would be contrary to their interest, although it would be beneficial for the many.  That is why, for instance, land reform program has not been successful—that clashes with the stake of the landed gentry.  Anti-dynasty provision is found in the constitution, but one can be almost sure that until the second coming of Christ, no enabling law would be enacted.

 

            Once power is captured, they are able to convert political power into economic power.  Understandably enough, as can be seen, they become richer once they are comfortably ensconced in positions of power.  In some, their accumulated wealth may increase in geometric proportions.  Even an honest statement of assets of many of them would show that their income fantastically increased.  This leaves one with a question whether they could have amassed such wealth if they were far removed from the seats of power.

 

            Power and privileged, however, are difficult to give up.  It is within their inherent logic to perpetuate.  Which is why, politics is dominated by the same families election after election.  After the man is through with his term, the wife succeeds him, or his son.  In some municipalities, it happens that once one finishes 3 consecutive terms, all of 9 years, as mayor, he runs for vice mayor in the hope that in the next election, he will run again for the post he was no longer qualified to hold.  Political dynasty has its own logic for being. 

 

But power tends to last indefinitely not only in the same family; it tends to perpetuate in the same class.  The pre-martial law oligarchs were succeeded by rich and powerful cronies.  After two EDSA revolutions, what obtained was that one set of powerful and privileged class was simply replaced by another.  Yet, almost everything remained the same.  The shift in government never had any effect on the price of galunggong that would be to the delight of the poor.  Only faces of people within the same economic tier changed. 

 

If people power did not alter the landscape of politics, neither do elections.  Elections are only partially an exercise where voters choose their leaders to represent them.  In reality, it is an activity that enables the privileged to capture political power.  And sometimes, the ultimate object is to concentrate this power preferably in the hands of members of one’s own family and relatives.  In the country, politics is probably the best family business, which gives enormous returns that could hardly be acquired in other enterprises.  Not surprisingly, one finds that in a certain place, the husband is a governor, the wife is a mayor, an uncle is a councilor, an in-law is a board member, and the grandfather is an ex-congressman.  It would be far fetched to assume that only their family had the monopoly of talents related to governance, but voters still allow them to rule over them.

 

It has to be said that elections have little to do with an exercise in which people are enabled to choose the best men to govern them.  For one thing, the choice is limited—it is an exclusive club of the moneyed and the powerful.  What qualifies one is not so much one’s honesty, integrity, capacity for governance, or talent.   The single most important qualification is wealth; if one is not wealthy, one is most likely to be thrown into the dustbin of nuisance candidates.  After all, only the rich and the powerful can engage in nationwide campaign.  For another, many of the best have the common sense not to run for government positions, knowing that in the final result, the system would engulf them.  They cannot escape from eventually becoming a part of a corrupt system. Election, then, is an activity in which the people choose who among the rich and privileged will control them.  In practice, it is not then a choice for the principled, for people of competence and knowledge.  Voters are not given real alternatives.  Who among politicians have ever talked, assuming they have the wisdom to do it, about the problem of globalization, or trade liberalization or of democratization of wealth?  Truth is, given the ignorance of people, and under a culture of money, people vote not on the basis of issues and programs, but, with a few exceptions, on the basis of popularity and, especially in local elections, on the basis of the amount of money that politicians give them in exchange for their support.

 

In this case, election is simply an exclusive intramurals among the wealthy.  The election of 1986 could be looked at as a fight between rich and the privileged who belonged to the Marcos camp and the rich and the privileged who sided with the Aquino camp.  The same may be said of the 2010 elections.  The infighting among the privileged is all about who among them would take control of the state.  Practically, all the presidential, vice-presidential and senatorial candidates come from wealthy families.  Provincial elections are often a rivalry between two families that dominated politics in the province for many years.  Mayoralty bets oftentimes merely represent two warring families in a particular municipality.  Indeed, for the hoi polloi, elections are “their’ [the elite’s] fight; it has little to do with a contest of those who would really embody the interest of the constituents.

           

              In view of this, it is easy to understand why, when they run for office, they represent not the people, but themselves and their families as well as their own concerns.  Quite the contrary, political office is looked upon as if it were a feudal title which father and mother pass on to their children from generation to generation. It is estimated that there are about 250 political families; majority of those in congress come from these families.  If it is difficult to change the political landscape, it is because they simply continue the vision of their families for generation, and they are well entrenched.   Under such a system, a newly elected official easily becomes like a traditional politician, if not one.   After all, what can he do, other than follow the politics of his own family?  One would have to wait a Damascus experience to alter the course.

 

As a result, in many cases, one is given the impression that for these politicians, they are actually the government.  That they use public funds as if these were their own personal property is a common conclusion.  One might consider, for example, government projects.  Whenever roads are constructed, few are the exceptions among them who would not make sure that notices are posted to call people’s attention that it is their project, as if their own money, and not people’s taxes, were being spent for it.  Streamers are put up that say “Thank you, Governor, for this project.”  Is not this a sheer effrontery? 

           

              Precisely because they represent almost no one else save their families and interests, it becomes logical why in Philippine politics, political parties are in practice devoid of meaning.  In theory, parties are means through which ideology, vision and programs for running the government are made.  In reality, parties are convenient structure that candidates use to capture power.  One switches party affiliation as family or personal interest demands.  Turncoatism is as easy as changing shoes. During the 1987 elections, the Laban ng Democratikong Pilipino (LDP) was the ruling party, which won the majority seats in Congress, but because Ramos won, the LDP lost most of its members before one could say abracadabra.  Oh yes, even such a good entity as party list has been used to further one’s self-interest.

           

             Since they have to capture the seat of power by means of the majority vote of electors, politicians use practically all means, foul and legal, to persuade people to support them and eventually vote for them.  During election campaign, they not only present their plans, but oftentimes many misrepresent themselves, use unethical advertisement, provide entertainment circuses, and get media exposures.  During election time, they buy votes and use flying voters.  If these are not enough, they employ intimidation, bribery, violence, and defraud their opponents, change election results, if not assassinate them.

           

             Once they are elected, the main task now is to control the whole system, if not perpetuate their stay in power.  To cinch their continuance in office, it is important to influence not only the executive but all the other branches of the government.  Sometimes, the courts are not immune to influence.  During the Marcos years, the Supreme Court was, for obvious reasons, called the Marcos Court which lasted until President Aquino disbanded it.  The executive does everything in its power to place the legislative under its influence.  As we shall see below, this is done by patronage politics.  One glaring example is how the executive dangles the pork barrel.   Sure enough, if the judiciary and the legislative are weakened, the politician-executive has nothing to fear—all he wants, he gets.  He can always hope that the law or its interpretation can bend.  If the law sets limits on one’s term, for instance, somebody can be trusted to initiate a move to change the law.  With branches of the government under one’s influence, one can always make the educated guess that impeachment complaints against him can never prosper.   Small wonder then that, at the local level, a congressman would be tempted to influence, if not intervene even in the mere appointments of teachers, janitors, and other workers.  This is to ensure that his power and control extend to all parts of his fiefdom.

           

            To perpetuate their control of the people, they reinforce the patron-client culture that obtains in the country.  Under this system, politicians perform various functions and favor for their favorites.  In the national scene, probably the worst expression of this was the crony capitalism of Marcos years.  According to Aquilino Pimentel, Marcos “sort of legitimized and institutionalized crony capitalism in the country.  Many businesses changed hands due to various reasons, but always, these enterprises wound up in the hands of a favored few.  For those were dangerous times to be out of favor with Marcos and his in-laws, the Romualdezes and their close circle of friends and cronies.”

 

In local politics, these could take the form of money for burial, being a godfather at baptism or a sponsor at weddings, employment, scholarship, sponsorship of basketball teams, prizes, etc, all meant to make clients dependent on their patron.  Because they feel indebted to them, the clients cultivate loyalty to their patron-politicians, especially during elections.  At the same time, these favors cement their relationship with each other.  These make the former lords, while the latter are made to feel they are dependents.  That is why, instead of implementing policies to deliver services, it works better for corrupt politicians if they perpetuate the patron-client arrangement, because it creates an utang na loob among the constituents. 

           

             At the same time, that while perpetuating themselves in office, they amass great wealth seems to be a given, at least if one judges it from people’s expectation. Money, of course, can come from various sources.  But many critics think that most notorious is the pork barrel, rebaptized in 2000 as Priority Development Assistance Fund (PDAF).  The head of the executive department has of course the biggest share, but those of the senators and congressmen are not paltry.  With pork barrel, one has great opportunities to beef up his wealth.  Some observers say that almost half of the appropriated funds for projects ends up in the pocket of corrupt politicians in cahoots with businessmen.  Hence, even if he does not receive his salary—and some flaunt to make sure that people know they do not—the corrupt official can still dip his finger into his PDAF.  No wonder, many infrastructures are substandard, and are easily ruined.  On the other hand, despite the corruption involved, people are still grateful to them for being allowed to work in the project.  Politicians have their cake, and are able to eat it, too.  Can one be blamed for demanding that the PDAF be abolished?

            

             It is easy to see, then, how corruption becomes part of the political system; but that is another story.

           

              Jealous of their power, politicians make sure that no one else would grab their seat of power.  There are many ways of doing this, but its ultimate expression is violence—killing the opposition or the challenger. We know how Stalin eliminated his enemies, and later, even those whom he perceived to be. The death of Benigno Aquino was for many people a political murder.  The massacre of 57 people in Maguindanao last November 2009 has to do with vying for power.  But ensuring that no one grabs one’s seat need not be violent.  At the national scene, it happens that people at the top would allow warlords to maintain their fiefdom on the understanding that when election time comes, the latter assures them of the delivery of winning votes.  One, then, need not be surprised why warlordism cannot be eliminated, despite the fact that the executive, with the police and armed forces, is very powerful, and has enough logistics to scuttle it.  The set-up is profitable for those at the top.  It is part of patronage politics. “I protect you; you assure me.”

           

              If the Philippines, therefore, is in such a sad state, if it is a society in which the majority are poor and disenfranchised and only a minority who hold much power and enjoy privilege are rich, it is largely because of its current political system which is rotten.  Politicians might blame other factors.  One remembers that shortly before martial law, a newspaper headlined that the Church was an obstacle to national progress.  Poverty of the nation may be conveniently imputed on overpopulation.  Politicians may charge that the current presidential system is the root cause of all misery; that a parliamentary one can cure the sick man of Asia.  Some might propose the need of a strong man—as if we have never been there.  But these are simply a mirage.  They represent an effort to divert the blame that should be laid on the door of our lopsided political system.

           

              Such a political system creates a culture in which people, especially the majority who are poor, think and act as if they are not the government, or part of it.  In practice, for the many who are disadvantaged, the government is of the rich, by the rich and for the rich. The former feel and remain outsiders.  As a consequence, it has become natural for these people that services to them are hardly more than crumbs that fall from the rich man’s table.  And they tend to accept it.  Thus, they sell their votes, they ask donations, and even act as their agents during elections.  Ultimately, of course, people get officials they deserve.  The corruption of the people is matched by the corruption of politicians.  Indeed, if Filipinos are passive to what politically happens to them, it is because the system makes them subservient and dependent.  Although the Constitution says that power emanates from the people, what comes up is that power emanates from the elite, the powerful and the privileged.  They are the one who make things happen, not the people.  If some would insist that people really participate in governance, that participation can be found only in political-science textbooks.

 

  Logically enough, it is situation in which the majority cannot do anything.  They are not part of the decision making, to begin with.  If they whine against the system, devices are there to make sure that that the elite cannot be dislodged.  If they do not have some military men, corrupt officials have their private army and battery of lawyers of high caliber to secure their ground.  It might be worth repeating to say that, as years go by, what happens is that one set of politicians who belong to the aristocracy is replaced by another that comes from the privileged class, but everything remains the same.  The system, one is tempted to think, is almost incapable of change.  Under the sun of the power and privilege of the elite, nothing is really new.  What has been is what will be.  If there is change—well, what does one really anticipate, an improvement of the lot of the majority who are poor?

 

  In the end, one may not say that Philippine politics is hopelessly rotten, but just the same, it remains rotten to the core.*


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Jul 25, '10 10:32 PM for everyone

A Religio-Historical and Literary-Critical Once-Over

at the Padul-ong "Tradition"

(or, A Theory on the Padul-ong)[1]

 

(A paper read by the author during the "Padul-ong

Conference"  at the Provincial Governor's Office Conference Hall, Provincial Capitol, Borongan, Eastern Samar, on June 23, 2002)

 

by Dr Lope Coles Robredillo

 

IT IS THE purpose of this paper to examine the story of the so-called Padul-ong[2] tradition[3] from a religio-historical and literary-critical point of view.  This is to distinguish it from other approaches that one may use in studying this tradition, e.g., a psychological—particularly Freudian—approach, or a structuralist one using the work of Levi-Strauss. How the story is expressed in performing arts is beyond the purpose of this work, though I will certainly make an aside.  My purpose is much more modest.  I simply aim to take a once-over at the Padul-ong story, as a student of Eastern-Samar history and as scholar of biblical studies.  Toward this end, I will first present the most recent version of the story.  Then, I will examine it closely in the light of history and religion as well as of literary criticism, and wind up with some tentative conclusions and recommendations.

 

I. THE MOST RECENT VERSION OF THE PADUL-ONG ACCOUNT

 

Let me begin by quoting a contemporary retelling of the story at length, without corrections or parenthetical remarks.[4]

 

 A woman in Portugal requested the captain of a ship to board the vessel as she was bound for the Philippines.  The Captain, thinking that his crew members were all men, denied the request of the woman.  He thought that it was improper to take in one single woman on board a vessel with all men around and considering the month-long journey to Asia, to let her in was unfitting.  For a time the vessel remained by the Port of Portugal since it could not sail-off due to bad weather.  The captain relaxed and fall asleep in his cabin.  Later he was getting impatient for the delay and when he happened to open a window to check the weather outside, he was surprised to see the woman sitting on her baggage—her dress and entire body wet all over—she was trembling.  Because of that sight, which appeared before the eyes of the captain, his heart was pinched with guilt and pity that he himself went down the ship and helped conduct the woman up and inside the vessel.  His conservative thoughts placed the woman locked behind a separate cabin for fear that some crew members might disgrace the naiveness of his guest.

            All of a sudden the weather turned clear and the sea calm and cool.  They were then ready to sail-off to the Philippines.  The journey was fast and smooth but it took a month-time to reach the shores of the Philippines.  Approaching the area, the captain realized that he had a lady-visitor locked inside a cabin and that he forgot to serve his guest a single meal in their entire trip.  Realizing, he ran in haste to the cabin of the woman but his visitor was fallen to the floor, dead.  The captain noticed the baggage of the woman—a rectangular wooden box that bear letters which he believed to have been the woman’s address that would somehow guide them where to take the woman and the baggage.  However, the letters inscribed on the box were blurred that they could hardly read: Nuestra Señora de Br… 

            As they entered the area of the Philippines, the vessel could not point at whichever direction.  They tried so many targets headlong but could not pursue farther because the sailing was very hard and difficult.  When they finally face eastward of the archiphelago targeting the island of Samar—the sailing was different—it was very smoothly flowing as if they found themselves docked in the silent shore of (now) Punta Maria.  The inscription is now very clear: “Nuestra Señora de Borongan.”  When the captain asked what’s the name of the place, the native who met them answered, “Borongan.”  By that answer the problem of the captain was solved so, he told his men to carry down the baggage.  The natives were all anticipating the content of the rectangular box—thrill, anticipation, excitement prevailed in their hearts.  When the box was fully opened—there appeared before their eyes a beautiful image of the Virgin.  The natives were happy and gathered in jubilation for having received such a beautiful and rare gift.

            The news spread to the entire municipality of Borongan but the image was placed in strategic place of Punta Maria for anyone to see.  After a time, rumors have reached the parish that a beautifully scented lady frequents the Hamorawon Spring on evenings, taking a bath and leaving behind a convincing scent that is beyond description.  The old ones predicted that it could be a miracle because witnesses say that she easily vanishes when she is through taking a bath.  It was proven when a certain woman who had a skin disease got well after dipping her arms in the waters of Hamorawon Spring.  After a consensus made by the parishioners, some credible members of the community together with some town officials—the image was transferred to the town of Borongan through a “bilos”(a beat with flag) from Punta Maria.

 

II. A RELIGIO-HISTORICAL CRITICISM OF PADUL-ONG

           

       Such is the Padul-ong story.  But—the question may be asked—how are we to consider this account?  I have not heard a native of Borongan question the authenticity of the narrative.  Most Boronganons, I think, assume that it preserves an actual event that happened in a specific period and place.  I am not an iconoclast, but such an assumption raises questions that cast doubts on its historicity. 

 

            A. Internal Evidence

 

            Let me begin with the internal evidence.  Sad to say, the story is replete with inconsistencies and improbabilities. A few examples may be cited from the details. (1) Is there really such a place as port of Portugal?  There is certainly a port of Lisbon, but to say port of Portugal is like saying that there is such a place of port of the Philippines.  (2) Was there really a ship that sailed from Portugal and came to Borongan, when the bungto was already a parish?   Though the bull of Pope Alexander VI, Inter caetera, issued in 1493 and the treaty of Tordesillas in 1494 between Spain and Portugal theoretically make it a possibility,[5] the fact that the Philippines was under Spain make it an improbability. (3) What type was the vessel?  The account does not tell us; but Ladera’s recounting of the story describes it as a galleon.  But this is improbable, because the Philippines had no galleon trade with Portugal!  (4) However, assuming for the sake of argument that, since our version says that all those on board—except the woman—were men, the ship was not a galleon, but could have been something like a cargo ship, still, one wonders whether such a vessel ever plied between Philippines and Portugal.  Was it a pirate ship?  It is most likely, but the way its journey to the Philippines is described rules it out.  In other words, there seems to be no ship that fits its description.

 

      (5) Moreover, where was the ship really going?  If indeed it went from one port to another just to unload the cargo, did it have a destination?  Even that of a buccaneer does not make such erratic voyage.  (6) What makes the lady’s luggage so unusual that the moment the ship reaches a port, the crew could only try to unload it without success?  (7) If the ship were as big as, say, the Doña Angelina of the Carlos Go Thong Company in the l970s, it is possible that the captain might not have minded about the woman.  But in a ship so small like the flagship of Magellan, would a captain ever forget his passenger—considering that it took months to cross the Pacific Ocean?  (8) Moreover, in an all-male ship, could any man forget a woman?  In an age of chivalry, would the crew missed to feed her?  (9) If indeed the woman had a box that contained the image of the Virgin, would the custom have allowed its loading without inspection?  It should be noted that cargoes had to be accounted for.  In the natural course of things, it would be unlikely that no one from the staff of the captain knew anything about its content..  (9) Also, would the captain allow a woman to board his ship without knowing her identity and destination?  (10) Other questions may be asked.  It is alleged that the captain asked about the name of the place upon landing on Punta Maria.  But why did the people reply “Borongan”, and not “Guintaguican,” which should have been the most logical answer?  (11) If it were true that the image was unloaded in Guintaguican, why did the people allow it to be transferred to Borongan?  In those days, and probably today, the transfer of an image venerated in a particular place is not an easy matter to do.[6]

 

            B. External Evidence

 

            If we now turn our inquiry to the external evidence, we encounter various questions. (1) The main problem about the historicity of the account is that, even if it were internally consistent, there is no document to corroborate it.  I have read the references to Borongan in the 55-volume work of Blair and Robertson,[7] and in the multi-volume collection of primary documents of S. Zaide, but I could not find any single reference to it. (2) Also, in an age when people considered miraculous something that is perceived to be extraordinary, the first missionaries usually wrote about almost anything that seemed beyond human control or natural explanation.  In an article I wrote on the Jesuit mission in Guiuan, I mentioned two “miraculous” events that people attributed to the Virgin of the Immaculate Conception, the patroness of Guiuan.[8]  And these were recorded.  If indeed, the story of the shipment of the image was miraculous, how come none of the Jesuit reports, or the Franciscan reports for that matter, mentioned it?  (3) Equally important, it is strange that the Church, if the story were a factual historical account, did not give importance to it, for all its popularity among Boronganons, nor, to my recollection, acknowledged its miraculous origins in document.  Does this not indicate that the Church considered it as something other than historical? 

 

     (4) In 1951, President Quirino issued Executive Order No. 486, instructing teachers of compile historical and cultural data of the towns in the country, and those in Eastern Samar complied with it.  The collection is called Historical Data Papers,[9] kept at the National Library.  For Borongan, for example, Fidel Anacta wrote that included in the compilation are “historical and cultural data of the municipality of Borongan and its barrios [that] may serve to perpetuate the social and cultural heritage of the place,”[10] but if the story of the Virgin were historical, why did Anacta and his co-teachers not include it in the historical part?  (5) In my conversation with some Boronganons, I was told that the Natividad became the patroness of the town precisely because of its miraculous journey to the pueblo.  This idea, however, runs counter to the manner in which a patron/ess is selected at the time of the Jesuit missionaries, and it was ordinarily something like this: having gathered the people, the Jesuit asked them to choose an advocate before God who would protect them from natural and supernatural calamities.  They were instructed to consider several names of saints, write them on paper, fold them, and place them into an urn.  Then, the one whose name had been drawn by lot was named their patron.[11]

 

            Thus, both internal and external facts demonstrate that there is a wide gulf between the Padul-ong account and actual historical experience.  But if they show that the story cannot be regarded as historical, how are we to treat it?  I suggest that the best way is to look at it from the point of view of literary criticism; after all, the account is clearly an oral tradition.

 

III. A LITERARY-CRITICAL VIEW OF THE PADUL-ONG “TRA-DITION”

 

            From a literary standpoint, how are we to understanding the padul-ong story?[12]   It is instructive that the brochure on the “tradition”, “Padul-ong Festival,” uses various words to describe it: myth, legend, and tale.[13]  Actually, these terms, as far as I am concerned, are legitimate.  After all, there is no agreed definition on these literary genres. Besides, the differences between these terms are so fluid that each author has almost a different way of using these terms.  But as a biblical scholar who has been engaged in the study of the literary genres of the Bible, I would like to treat the padul-ong narrative as an aetiology, though I would not cavil with someone who would consider it as a legend or myth.[14]  But for my purpose, I would prefer to place it under the rubric of aetiology, following the great literary critic, Herman Gunkel, a German scholar, whose study of legends remains influential.[15]

 

A.     The Padul-ong Story: A Cultic Aetiology

           

         What is aetiology?  Aetiology is a term used to designate a story that is designed to explain how an existing phenomenon in nature, custom or institution came into being by recounting a past event which is taken to be the effective cause of that phenomenon.  As a starting point, Gunkel asserts that aetiological stories are answers to questions—man looks at things and ask why.  Thus, he classifies these stories in terms of the kind of questions that he assumes to lie behind the answers embodied in the narrative. Gunkel gives four types: (1) ethnological aetiology, which gives reasons for relations among tribal groups; (2) etymological aetiology, which explains the names of persons and places; (3) cultic aetiology, which accounts for the origin of religious rites and customs; and (4) geological aetiology, which explains the origin of a particular locality or geological formation. [16]  In Eastern Samar history and culture, one (1) and four (4) are not common, but the second is recurrent.  The story that the town of Oras was so named when the Spanish cura gave that name after the place experienced 8 consecutive days of storm and rain is obviously an etymological aetiology.  The same may be said of the explanation that the word Guiuan comes from guibang, or that Sulat originates from suslatan or that Borongan is derived from borong[17]—these are aetiologies which are difficult to verify.  Some of these, etymologically erroneous as they are, in fact contradict older aetiologies.[18] My theory is that the Padul-ong story is a cultic aetiology that legitimizes the devotion to the Patroness.  Thus, we can make sense out of the historical inconsistencies and improbabilities of the story by utilizing an aetiological motif to interpret its various elements.

           

B. The Three Original Aetiologies in the Padul-ong Story

           

              If it is a cultic aetiology, the question may be raised: how did the story originate?  I propose that the story developed this way.  At the first stage of the tradition, there were three separate aetiologies.  Later, these aetiologies were conflated, giving rise to (a) variation(s) of the present version of the narrative.  Let me first describe the first stage.  At this stage, there were three (3) originally distinct aetiologies that answer three questions: (1) Why is Guintaguican called Punta Maria?  (2) Why does the water of Hamorawon Spring have healing powers?  (3) Why is the Natividad the Patroness of Borongan?  In the same way that the people of Oras, not knowing why the town was called by that name, told the story of the eight days of storm and darkness,[19] so the people in these parts, who were ignorant of the answers to these questions, created an aetiology or myth, if you please.  To facilitate navigation, the early Spanish sailors named a body of land that sticks out as punta (reference point), but the inhabitants of Guintaguican did not know why it was so called, so they began explaining that it was called Punta Maria because it was at this place that the image of Maria was unloaded from the Spanish galleon.[20]  The water from the spring of Hamorawon had curative powers not because a good spirit (cahoynon) lived there—which was probably the answer of the pre-Hispanic Boronganon—but because—and this is the reply of the baptized Boronganon—the Blessed Virgin frequently bathed there.  The Virgin Mary became the patroness of the town because it was to this place that the Galleon miraculously brought her image. 

 

            C. The Conflation of Aetiologies

 

       At the second stage, these aetiologies were conflated.  The Guintaguican aetiology was in time joined with the third aetiology.  Thus, we have the story as recollected, for example, by the late Conrado Balagapo, which I reproduce without comment or correction: Tradition has it that the Image of the Blessed Virgin of the Nativity first landed in Gintagikan or Punta Maria.  It seemed that weather was always foul while there; the rearly Boronganons thought that the Blessed Mother wished to be enshrined a bit to the south; so they sought for the place wrapped in mist or “borong”, since then Borongan had enshrined the image we have in its altar, as the beloved Patroness.[21]  Obviously, the common people had no longer any recollection as to how the Virgin of the Nativity was chosen as their patron.  Also, it is to be noted that the belief in the curative power of the water from Hamorawon spring is no doubt pre-Hispanic.  But a Christian explanation had supplanted the pre-Hispanic credence, and so the belief arose if the image of the Virgin at the parish church could not be found from time to time, it was because she was bathing at the Hamorawon spring.  Hence, its healing powers. 

 

      But this story was applied later to the box that was unloaded at Guintaguican.  Hence the following account—I reproduce without correction or comment—which says that the image was missing in Punta Maria, only to be found in Borongan: On the course of their trip along Ibabao (Eastern Coast of Samar) and dropped anchor at a certain shore, much to the crew’s surprise, they found it easy to unload.  The natives were happy to receive the image.  But the captain asked for the name of the nearest biggest settlement, the villagers answered: Borongan.  They built huts and placed the image in a strategic place for everybody to adore.  However, news would spread in the entire village that the image was missing.  Sometimes, it could be found in the nearest biggest settlement which is now Borongan poblacion.[22]  The conflation of these three aetiologies gave rise to a form of the current version of the Padul-ong story, like that one which I quoted at the beginning of this talk.  In this version, the image of the Virgin had to be delivered by the people of Punta Maria to the Borongan port—which I will advert to in a moment— by means of a boat. In the process of conflation, of course, various elements of the different stories were ignored, while others were at the same time added, to the effect that the resulting version became laden with historical improbabilities and inconsistencies which people overlook.

 

            D. The Historical Core of the Padul-ong Aetiologies

 

            But the question may be raised.  In regarding the stories behind the Padul-ong as aetiologies, does this mean that these stories are not true?  Obviously, as I already commented, these stories contain a number of improbabilities so that they could not be entirely considered as historical.  But as in legends and myths, some historical factors shaped these aetiologies.  I have already noted that before the Spaniards came to Borongan, the natives must have experienced some forms of healing, after having bathed in the spring of Hamorawon.  And of course, the Natividad is the patroness of Borongan, even though the Boronganons could not explain the process involved in the choice of the Virgin.  What about the unloading of the woman’s luggage?  I theorize that Boronganons have a recollection of an unloading of cargoes from a ship.  Historically, this is true, and one easily recalls here what happened in the 1600s.  It may be recalled that at this time, the Dutch and the Spaniards were enemies, and from time to time, the former would come to Manila, blockading the city and seizing the galleons and their priced cargoes. 

 

      In 1620, however, the Dutch, instead of blockading Manila, went to San Bernardino Strait near Laoang, Northern Samar, in three ships to waylay the galleons coming from Acapulco, Mexico.  That year, two galleons, San Nicolas (the flagship) and a patache (her escort), were making a voyage to the Philippines under the command of Don Fernando de Ayala.  When Ayala saw the Dutch ships, he fired the gun of the flagship and disabled one of them.  When the other two Dutch ships maneuvered for firing position, night fell and a commotion arose.  Under cover of darkness, de Ayala raced southward along the Eastern Samar coast, and landed in the port of Borongan where he discharged his precious cargo before the Dutch could get hold of them.[23] . Of course, the galleon did not land in Guintaguican, but to me, this is the historical event that helped shape the tradition of the landing of the Spanish ship that unloaded the luggage, supposedly containing the image of the Virgin. 

 

IV. CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

 

A. Conclusions

 

      The Padul-ong, or rather, the story behind it—it appears from our inquiry—can in now way be treated as history, even if there are historical events that lie behind it, though already beyond recovery.  It is, however, safe to say that the story behind the Padul-ong is an aetiology, or more precisely, are three aetiologies that were later conflated.  These aetiologies arose because of the need to satisfy questions that obtain in a community that searches for its own identity.  The answers, as in myths and legends, are shaped by historical factors and by the creativity of the people themselves who make what later on becomes tradition.  In the present tradition in question, the historical core was in the process embellished, with the addition of other details that come from the three aetiologies, winding up with a new form of the story, like the present version to which some people have given the term Padul-ong.[24] 

 

      The Padul-ong story (or any of its variations), like the aetiologies behind it, legitimates the cult of the Patroness of Borongan. This explains why people from all over the island of Samar (as well as from other places outside it) would come to Borongan, especially during fiesta, to fulfill a vow or a promise they had made to the Patroness, usually in thanksgiving for the favor they had received through her powerful intercession.[25]  Because of the image of the Patroness, the Borongan parish church has virtually become a shrine for pilgrims.  It is therefore understandable that the story focuses on the luggage of the woman that contained the image.  Indeed, every detail embellishment in the story—whether the old or the new version—is told with the intention of enhancing the miraculous character of the image.  The miraculous circumstances in the story are clearly told in the service of it.  And that, obviously, legitimizes the miraculous character of the image which people attribute to it. 

 

      As for the newest version of the story that I quoted at length at the beginning of this talk, one, of course, is not mistaken in concluding that its details were meant to justify the ritual that is being observed in the celebration during the town fiesta of Borongan—they do not appear in the earlier account of the tradition.  The ritual or the re-enactment of the story was, in other words, first conceived, and the embellishment came later on to validate it.

 

            B. Recommendations

 

       1.       Must the Padul-ong celebration go on? 

 

       Since it is not an historical but evidently an aetiological legend, though with something historical behind it, shall we cease celebrating the Padul-ong Festival?  The lack of verifiable historical notes does not, of course, invalidate the legitimacy of its celebration.  For one thing, the Padul-ong somehow answers our need for rootedness, our search for identity as Estehanons.  It contributes to the wholeness of our culture, giving a cultural support to what it means to be an Estehanon.    So, if the Padul-ong has to be of any use to the Estenanons, it should be seen along this gamut of thought.   I do believe that these aetiologies easily related to the life of the people in Borongan during the Spanish era.  The people of Guintaguican could easily appeal to the Virgin not only at the time when the sea was rough, but also during typhoons and other natural calamities.  The Hamorawon tradition must have been meaningful to the Boronganons who from time to time suffered from the cholera epidemic.[26]  And I see no reason why the aetiologies would not make sense today.  However—and this I would like to emphasize—it would be a disservice to these aetiologies or the “tradition” if today we will only look at it as nothing more than an event that we have to celebrate for tourism purposes.  It will lose its meaning and people will be alienated from it.  Its survival can be assured only if it is rooted in the culture and well-being of our people.  Commercialism will destroy it.

 

            2. Shall we limit ourselves to the Padul-ong celebration?

           

           For all its advantages, however, I see two major drawbacks in the Padul-ong celebration.  Here, I shall not mention some minor problems that I find in the way it is observed, as, for instance, in the matter of consistency. For example: if the Padul-ong is a re-enactment, why do the participants use a modern motor boat?[27]  Why do they use the 19th century Filipina dress, instead of the 17th or 18th century-attire?[28]  These are quibbles that are better addressed in performing arts rather than in history and religion.[29]  So, let me go back to my two major questions.  First, the Padul-ong is a Borongan tradition.  Definitely, the whole people of Eastern Samar do not own it.  So, the question is: is there any other tradition that all Estehanons can easily identify themselves with?  Right now, I have in mind two events.  The first is, the story of the landing of Ferdinand Magellan in Homonhon on March 16, 1521.[30]  The second is the landing of Miguel Lopez de Legaspi in Tubabao island, Oras, Eastern Samar, on February 13, 1565.[31]  This is also the date when Eastern Samar was declared a Spanish encomienda.  Both of these events can be historically verified and provide much material to the portrayal of the encounter between the native and Spanish culture.  Second, the Padul-ong reflects an animist religion. .  It does not dovetail with the Virgin in whose honor it is celebrated. In fact, Christianity is not yet there.  The theology is still pre-Hispanic.  It does not yet have the Christian value system, and all that is dear to Christianity.*

                                                                                                                                          

24 June 2002

Feast of John the Baptist

11:16 PM         



[1]A talk delivered by Rev Msgr Dr Lope C. Robredillo during the “Padul-ong Conference” at Provincial Governor’s Office (PGO) Conference Hall, Provincial Capitol, Borongan, Eastern Samar, June 23, 2002.

[2]Padul-ong is the term used only lately to describe the reenactment of the so-called conduction of the image of the Virgin from Punta Maria to the Borongan port in Rawis.  Its root word is dul-ong, which means to conduct, accompany, deliver, escort someone or something.  See V. Unruh, Speak Waray [np, nd]. 96; E. Macabenta, Binisaya-English/English-Binisaya Dictionary (Quezon City: Emansonz, 1979), 67; T. Abuyen, Diksyonaryo Waray-Waray (Visaya) (np: Tomas Abuyen, 1992), 84.  Padul-ong, a noun, literally refers to a celebration held on the occasion of receiving something that has been delivered.  It is not derived from the term padul-onga, contrary to the claims of the Philippine Information Agency, Borongan.  The oral tradition never calls the transfer of the image padul-ong.

[3]Although many would describe the cultural re-enactment of Padul-ong as tradition, its history is actually very recent.  There is no doubt, however, that the story behind it can be called a tradition, if the word is used to refer to a story that has been handed down orally, with variations, different forms, and recompositions.

[4]Anonymous, “The Legendary and Historic Borongan Tale,” Souvenir Program, 1995 Borongan Town Fiesta (Borongan: Committee on Souvenir Program [Fe Gerodias, Antonio Moralita, Alice Nicart, Merlita Sabate, Lida Pagulayan], 1995), unpaginated.   Of course, I know of other accounts, and there are discrepancies.  See, for example, Conrado Balagapo, “Short Historical Account of Borongan” (MS, typewritten, 2 pages; 1983), 1; Jose Ladera, “Borongan Vignettes,” Souvenir Program, 1989 Borongan Town Fiesta, unpaginated; and “Padul-ong Festival,” (pamphlet), Philippine Information Agency, Borongan, Eastern Samar, no author, but with acknowledgment to the masteral thesis of Pacil Ramirez.  No date.  For the present purpose, however, I chose to reprint the 1995 version because it seems to be the basis of the current presentation of the Padul-ong Festival.

[5]The treaty of Tordesillas between Spain and Portugal provided for the drawing of the line of demarcation between their respective spheres of influence, trade and conquest 170 leagues west of the Azores.  It was the claim of Portugal that the Philippines was within the Portuguese sphere of influence if this line were produced into the eastern hemisphere.  See H. de la Costa, Readings in Philippine History (Manila: Bookmark, 1967), 16.  

[6]See, for example, B. Cruickshank, “The Dapdap Incident,” Leyte-Samar Studies 9 (1975) 1, 32-58.

[7]E. Blair and J. Robertson, eds. The Philippine Islands, 55 vols. (Cleveland: Arthur H Clark, 1903-1909.

[8]L. Robredillo, “The Jesuit Mission of Guiuan: An Historical Essay on the Beginnings of the Evangelization of Guiuan, Eastern Samar.,” 400 Years of Evangelization, Quadricentennial Celebration, 1995, 2-18; see also “A History of Guiuan (Eastern Samar),” www.msgrlope.multiply.com.

[9]Philippine National Library, Historical Data Papers, Samar, 1951-1953.

[10]Fidel Anacta et al, “History and Cultural Life of the Municipality of Borongan,” Historical Data Papers, Samar, 1952-1953.

[11] See, for example, F. Alzina, Historia de las islas y indios de Bisayas… 1668, II, Bk 3, Ch. 24.

[12]For a literary study of the Sinulog of Cebu, see Quijano de Manila [Nick Joaquin], Discourses of the Devil’s Advocate and Other Controversies (Manila: Nick Joaquin, 1983), 141-152.

[13]Padul-ong Festival,” produced by the Philippine Information Agency in Borongan for the Borongan Town Fiesta Executive Committee and the Provincial Tourism Council of Eastern Samar

[14]For a general knowledge of these literary genres, see K. W. Balle, “Myth and Mythology,” The New Encyclopaedia Britannica, 24 (1991) 712-727.

 

[15]The influential work of H. Gunkel is The Legends of Genesis (New York: W. H. Carruth, 1964).

 

[16]J. Priest, “Etiology,” The Interpreter’s Dictionary of the Bible, Supplementary Volume (ed.K. Crim; Nashville: Abingdon, 1976), 293.

[17]See Souvenir Program, 1984 Oras Town Fiesta; Souvenir Program, 1961 Guiuan Town Fiesta; Souvenir Program, 1956 Borongan Town Fiesta.

[18]See F. Alzina, Historia de las islas y indios de Bisayas… 1668.  See also L Robredillo, “A Brief Church History of Sulat Under Spain, 1603-1898,” Souvenir Program, 1987 Sulat Town Fiesta; L. Robredillo, “The Jesuit Mission of Guiuan: An Historical Essay on the Beginnings of the Evangelization of Guiuan, Eastern Samar.,” 400 Years of Evangelization, Quadricentennial Celebration, 1995, 2-18. 

[19]When I was still in the grades, I happened to attend the fiesta in Dampigan, Dolores, Eastern Samar.  Curious as I was, I asked someone from the barrio why was the place known as Dampigan.  I was told that it was so called because a white bell was “pushed ashore” (the Bisayan word for this is dampig); but the people pushed it back to the river, and the bell drifted to Manila.  Which is why Manila became a big city; had the people of Dampigan or Malabon accepted the bell and placed it in their chapel, their barrio would have been the great Manila.

[20]Redolent of this aetiology is the tradition known, for example, to J. Ladera: “The place where [the image of the Blessed Virgin] was named Punta Maria which to this day still bears the name,” J. Ladera, “Borongan Vignettes,” Souvenir Program, 1989 Borongan Town Fiesta.

[21]C. Balagapo, “Short Historical Account of Borongan,” Typewritten, MS (October 1983) 1.

[22]Padul-ong Festival,” produced by the Philippine Information Agency in Borongan for the Borongan Town Fiesta Executive Committee and the Provincial Tourism Council of Eastern Samar.

[23]For the Spanish account, see F. Colin-P. Pastells, Labor evangelica: Ministerios Apostolicos de los Obreros de la Compania de Jesus, fundacion y progressos de us provincia en las Islas Filipinas 3 vols (Barcelona: Henrich, [first edition 1663] 1900-1902), 1.223 and P. Murillo Velarde, Historia de la provincia de Filipinas de la Compañia de Jesus (Manila: Imp. de Compañia de Jesus, 1749) 27.  For the English retelling, see H. de la Costa, The Jesuits in the Philippines, 1581-1768 (Cambridge: Harvard University, 1961) 340-341.  One may argue, of course, that one of the passengers of the galleon or the captain himself could have gifted the people with the image of the Virgin, but the main problem is that, there is no evidence for that.  It remains within the realm of possibility and conjecture.

[24]Kindly read note 2 above.

[25]As a former pastor of the Borongan parish, I can testify to this.  In evidence of the huge number of devotees to the Patroness are not only the coins that are dropped at the collection box near the image of the Patroness, but also the candles that are lighted during the fiesta of Borongan on September 8.  Indeed, the candles are so numerous that they pose a danger to the church building itself and the people.  On September 8, 1999, for instance, there was a commotion at the near the entrance of the church before the Pontifical Mass was celebrated because the lighting of the candles caused fire that spread near the entrance of the Hall of Saints.

[26]For the record on cholera epidemics, see Philippine National Archives (PNA), Estadistica, Samar, 1896.

 

[27]Parao is most likely the fitting vessel that should be used; see in this connection the letter of P. Klein, “The Discovery of the Palao Island,” in Blair and Robertson, The Philippines Islands, 41.40.

 

[28] On the attire, see W. H. Scott, Barangay: Sixteenth-Century Philippine Culture and Society (Quezon City: Ateneo de Manila Univesity, 1994), 28-31.

[29]However, with regard to history, I suggest that those who write the brochure should be a little bit careful with the data they publish.  Let me cite two examples. (1) In the brochure of the PIA on the Padul-ong Festival, it is asserted that the pueblo of Borongan was established on September 8, 1619 by the commandancia [sic] and the Rev Fr Superior of the Jesuit Mission.  As far as I know, even in 1620, there was no parish priest yet in Borongan, because the Jesuits worked under the cabecera-visita complex.  Comandancia is not a person, and the right person to establish a pueblo is not the Superior of the Jesuits.  (2)  Also in the history of the province, it seems to me that brochure has been dependent on Jose Ladera, without making a research, and Ladera seems to have merely read the article of Fr Cantius Kobak in the Leyte-Samar Studie


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Jun 15, '10 12:13 AM for everyone

The Succession of Pastors in the Parish of St Joachim

(Paric/Dolores) from 1864 to 2010

 

by Rev Msgr Dr Lope C. Robredillo

 

Sources:

1. Julian Manjavacas, “Notas para la continuacion del Catalogo Biografico de Padre Eusebio Gomez Platero,” MS, Archivo Franciscano Ibero-Oriental, Madrid, Spain

2. Julian Manjavacas, “Listas de los Nombres de los Parrocos Sacadas de las Tablas Capitulares,” Archivo Franciscano Ibero-Oriental, Madrid, Spain

     3. Eusebio Gomez Platero, Catalogo Biografico de los Religiosos Franciscanos de las Provincia de S. Gregorio Magno de Filipinas (Manila: Imp. de Santo Tomas, 1880)

4. Rufo Castro, “Lista de Sacerdotes Catolicos que han regentado la Parrroquia de San Joaquin, Dolores, Samar, Islas Filipinas,” 1953

5. Catholic Directory of the Philippines, 1964-2005

6. Xeroxed historical documents given by Cantius Kobak, a Franciscan scholar of Samar-Leyte History.

7. Lope C. Robredillo, Collected Historical Papers of Lope. C. Robredillo.

       

 

            Vacat                                                                                              1864-1877

            Rev. Fr. Gil Martinez , OFM, Parish Administrator                1877-1879

            Rev. Fr. Jose del Olmo, OFM, Parish Priest                            1879-1882

                        (The first appointed parish priest of San Joaquin Parish)

            Rev. Fr. Ramon Amoros, OFM, Parish Priest                          1882-1883

            Rev. Fr. Victoriano Padro, OFM, Parish Priest                        1883-1886

            Rev. Fr. Juan Vicente Carmona, OFM, Parish Priest               1886-1897

(The first parish priest to serve in the new poblacion of Dolores on Bacod river which replaced the old poblacion of Paric on Ulot river in 1887)

            Rev. Fr. Isidro Calonge, OFM, Parish Priest                            1897-1898

            Rev Fr Felix Minaya, OFM, Parish Administrator                   1903-1906

            Rev Fr Paulino Gamba, OFM, Parish Administrator               1906-1906

            Rev Fr Manuel Velasco, OFM, Parish Administrator             1906-1908

            Rev. Fr. Fructuoso de Santiago, OFM, Parish Priest               1910-1917

                        (He actually served from 1907 to 1916)

            Rev. Fr. Aquilino Majuelo, OFM, Parish Priest                       1917-1923

                        (He began serving in 1916)

            Rev Fr Antonio Rodriguez, OFM Parish Administrator          1920-1921

            Rev Fr Angel Munclus, OFM, Parish Administrator               1923-1923

            Rev. Fr. Juan Pascula Ruiz, OFM, Parish Priest                       1923-1929

                        (He served only until 1928)

            Rev. Fr. Gregorio Garcia Pintado, OFM, Parish Priest           1929-1932

                        (He actually served from 1928 to 1930)

            Rev. Fr. Antonio Sarabia Canizares, OFM, Parish Priest         1932-1935

                        (He actually served from 1930 to 1934)

            Rev. Fr. Guillermo Ibeas, OFM, Parish Priest                          1935-1937

                        (He actually served from 1934 to 1938)

            Rev. Fr. Candido Moreno, OFM,  Parish Priest                       1937-1939

                        (He actually served from 1938 to 1940)                     

    Rev. Fr. Felix Taña, Parish Priest                                               1939-1944

      (The first Filipino pastor of San Joaquin Parish, he began serving in 1940)

            Rev. Fr. Froilan Monsanto, Parish Priest                                  1944-1945

            Rev. Fr. Gerardo Barandino, Parish Priest                                1945-1952

            Rev. Fr. Rufo Castro, Parish Priest                                           1952-1954

            Rev. Fr. Emilio Bernardo, Parish Priest                                    1954-1955

            Rev. Fr. Francisco Tizon, Parish Priest                                     1955-1975

                        (Credited for building the present parish church and rectory)

            Rev. Fr. Santos Paco, Parish Priest                                          1975-1978 

                 Rev. Fr. Montecarlo Viloria, Asst Pastor (1975-1978) with mission to prepare for the creation of the parish of Hinolaso

            Rev. Fr. Conrado Balagapo, Parish Priest                                 1978-1982

    Rev Fr Montecarlo Viloria, Asst Pastor (1978-1979)

                   Rev. Fr. Francisco Corado, Asst.Pastor  (1981-1982)

            Rev. Fr. Nilo Apura, Parish Administrator                               1982-1983

                   Rev. Fr. Francisco Corado, Asst.Pastor  (1982-1983)

                   Rev Fr Amabe Moslares, Asst., but in charge of Maslog (1982-1987)

            Rev. Fr. Alfredo Amistoso, Parish Priest                                 1983-1985

                    Rev. Fr. Francisco Corado, Asst. Pastor. (1983-1985)

            Rev. Fr. Anacleto Asebias, Jr, Parish Priest                             1985-1988

                    Rev Fr Francisco Corado, Asst Pastor (1985-1986)

                    Rev. Fr. John Alcantara, Parochial Vicar (1987-1988)

                    Rev. Fr. Edwin Juaban, Parochial Vicar (1988-1988)

            Rev. Fr. Bernardo Baxal, Parish Priest                                      1988-1993

                     Rev Fr Edwin Juaban, Parochial Vicar (1988-1989)

                     Rev. Fr. Deogracias Gayo, Parochial Vicar  (1988-1990)

            Rev. Fr. Jose Lugay, Parish Priest                                             1993-1996

                      Rev. Fr. Jose Tentativa, Jr, Parochial Vicar (1993-1993)

                      Rev. Fr. Dan Gañas, Parochial Vicar (1994-1996)

            Rev. Msgr. Crescente Japzon, Parish Priest                             1996-2001

                      Rev Fr Jovito Carunggay, Parochial Vicar (1996-1997)

                      Rev Fr John Alcantara, Parochial Vicar (1997-1998)

         Rev Fr Romeo Solidon, Parish Priest                                                2001-2009

                      Rev Fr Honorio Anano, Parochial Vicar (2001-2001)

                      Rev Fr Michael Dado, Parochial Vicar (2002-2003)

                      Rev Fr Pedro Aquino, In Residence (2002-2009)

                      Rev Fr Joaquin Bertos, Parochial Vicar (2003-2004)

                      Rev Fr Priscillano Elardo, Parochial Vicar (2004-2005)

                      Rev Fr Joseph Nicolas, Jr, Parochial Vicar (2005)

                      Rev Fr Philip Campomanes, Parochial Vicar (2005-2009)

            Rev Juan Adamson Albert, Moderator, Team Ministry         2009-to date

                      Rev Fr Arturo Gonzales, Member, Team Ministry (2009-to date)

                  Rev Fr Serafin Tybaco, Member, Team Ministry (2009-to date)

 

 

Updated, June 15, 2010, Bishop’s Residence, Borongan, Eastern Samar


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Nov 7, '09 8:15 AM for everyone

 by Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD

IN THEORY, it is taught that in governance, all power derives from the people and the goal of politics is the common good.  Because, by themselves, individuals, families and groups, cannot achieve full development in order to live a truly human life, it is the task of politics to make available to them the necessary material, cultural, moral and spiritual goods.  Consequently, office holders are placed in power by the people not only to reconcile the particular goods of groups and individuals, but also to interpret common goods according to the guidelines of the majority and the effective good of all people.  In view of the enormity of this responsibility, one cannot but admire politicians—those who choose to undertake the heavy burden of this task. 

Politics: A Struggle for Power among the Elite

            But if the Philippine experience has anything to tell us, it is that politics is essentially a power game, played by a few elite, that hardly makes any marked improvement in the lives of the poor, since the common good is scarcely its goal.  Of course, one can object that this is a generalization, and to generalize is to falsify, but still, it provides us a pattern, a framework, and a certain viewpoint to understand its workings.  It does not, it is to be admitted, offer the whole truth— which is beyond the capacity of an essay as short as this—but it has something truthful to say.

            Who play the game?  Philippine politics, especially in the national scene, is almost exclusive of the few who are rich, or their agents.  Historically, the landowning class dominated politics before World War II, but partly because of the development of commerce and industry, the class of big businessmen and industrialists replaced it after the war.  When Ferdinand Marcos ran the country through martial law, he replaced the post-war wealthy class with his own, but after EDSA I, the post-war elite repositioned themselves within the ruling class.

            Philippine politics is thus a game of the elite.  But it is elitist both because those who play it are the few who are rich, and also because it has historically denied the active participation by the poor in the highest decision-making bodies.   Probably not a single person who occupied a chair in the senate or in the house has been known to be poor, even if political aspirants tended to identify themselves with the poor.  Diosdado Macapagal, I recall, was known as “the poor boy from Lubao.”  Joseph Estrada was perceived to be poor, and made “Erap para sa mahirap” his campaign slogan. 

            Of course, one might today point to the existence of the party-list system that the post-Marcos constitution instituted, but as the Inquirer editorial (Apr 2, 2007) noted, the mechanism remains imperfect, even though it is impressive: “impressive because it seeks to imbed representatives of the poor and the marginalized in Congress, which remains a bastion of the rich and privileged; imperfect, because party-list nominees sometimes turn out to be as privileged and well-connected as any traditional politician.”  Indeed, some of these party-list representatives are connected with the entrenched oligarchy.

            A case in point is the first three nominees of the Ahon Pinoy, a party-list group newly accredited by the Comelec, which seeks to represent overseas Filipino workers most of whom are really poor and marginalized.  These nominees, according to the editorial, “are not OFWs, and cannot by any stretch of imagination be considered underprivileged”: Ernesto Herrera III is a son of a labor leader and former senator, Bernardo Ople is a brother of a late labor secretary, senator and foreign secretary, and Dante Francis Ang is a son of a publisher and close Arroyo ally.  Thus, even what is intended for the underprivileged could be circumvented and used to place the elite in power. 

            In this game, it is the elite that vie for power among themselves.  In a way, our politics could be described as a struggle for power among the rich and privileged who are more concerned with their own advantage and that of their own class than with the advantage of the majority who are poor.  If it is not self-interest of the elite that guides politics, history and the present experience do not bear it out.  As Juan Sumulong is quoted to have said, the “majority and minority parties represent almost exclusively the intelligentsia and what we call the Philippine plutocracy, and that the needy classes have no representation in these parties and for this reason have no voice nor vote, even only as minorities, in the formulation of government policies.”

Power, Aggrandizement and the Beneficiaries

            Why this vying for political power?  Probably no one might say it explicitly, but it appears that political power gives the elite opportunities to increase their wealth.  Indeed, to capture political power is to self-aggrandize.  As Claro M. Recto observed as early as 1958, “ours is essentially a pragmatic and a very simple [political education]. It boils down to opportunism through public office…  All the political offices [that is, from president to municipal mayor, from senator to municipal councilor, etc.] are the open sesame to wealth and influence… It is because of this political education that we have… the elite of officials who, after several years of holding public office… have been able to build from nothing handsome fortunes of varying magnitude on the opportunities afforded by the offices they held.”

           

            Political power, in other words, is convertible to economic power.  As President Diosdado Macapagal once noted, the president and the members of congress have powers that are “so vast and potent that economic interests enter into a mutually protective alliance with them which results in a concentration of economic benefits in their combined hands.”

            But after having built a handsome fortune by occupying the seat of power, it would be almost impossible for the elite to part with it.  On the contrary, they are there to protect their own interest.  This partly explains why equitable distribution of wealth is almost impossible under a politics of power.  A case in point is land reform.  Since the Commonwealth, there have been various government efforts to address the problem of unrest through land reform legislation—Government Acts Nos. 538 and 539 in 1940, Republic Act Nos. 1267 and 1400 in 1954 and 1955, and R.A. No. 3844 in 1963, R.A. Nos. 6380 and  6389 and Pres. Decree 27 under Marcos, and R.A. 6657 in 1988 under Aquino.  But as Pedro Salgado observes, “all these laws never solved landlessness, for they were never intended to solve the problem in the first place.  Congress is peopled by landlords.  The legislature thus saw to it that there would be loopholes in the law in order that they and their fellow landlords can escape the law’s provisions.”

           

            The land reform code of 1963 under Macapagal provides a good sample.  The legal loopholes favorable to landlords include the exemption of lands producing for export which of course were the big plantations, exemption of fishponds, saltbeds and lands planted to citrus, cacao and other permanent trees, and exemption of landholdings converted to residential, commercial, industrial and other non-agricultural purposes,  Though the program was estimated to cost about P200 M within a year of its enactment and P300 M in the next three years to be successful, Congress allotted only about P1 M for its implementation.  The lesson is: democratization of wealth, which was one of the centerpieces of Marcos’ New Society, is hardly possible under an elitist politics.

            Politics, viewed from our historical experience, appears not to be intended for the benefit of the majority who are poor.  Indalecio Soliongco, in one of his columns in the Manila Chronicle, is not far removed from the reality when he compares politics to the IUD (intra-uterine device): “Politics in the Philippines is as involuted as an intra-uterine device, and its purpose, as the experience of the years has shown, is to prevent the conception of ideas or the realization of projects that will benefit the masses.  This is why, again, like the operation of the intra-uterine device, Philippine politics works in a secret but rather effective way of accomplishing what it is intended for it to accomplish.”

            It would seem, then, that if the elite that control the government do something that benefits the poor, it is, one can make an educated guess, because it coincides with their own interest.  Nevertheless, all that is done does not go deeply enough to the fundamental problems of poverty.  The benefits seem to be superficial.  Probably, among the candidates in our political history, no one has ever stirred hope among the poor more deeply than Joseph Estrada, not only because the hoi polloi perceived him to be one with them, but also because his slogan was pro-poor: Erap para sa mahirap.  He really enjoyed the support of the masses.  But as Arsenio Balisacan, in his article, “Did the Estrada Administration Benefit the Poor?” in Doronila’s Between Fires, his term ended with a year that witnessed a deterioration of conditions for many of the poor.

            How power brings opportunities to wealth is probably a given in our politics.  One who was glued to the TV during the impeachment trial of Estrada would recall that the prosecution presented witnesses and evidence on the former president’s involvement in illegal gambling and his maintenance of secret bank accounts, although his defense panel denied these allegations.  It was also reported that when Marcos fled the country, the US Customs agents found suitcases of gold bricks and diamond jewelry.  It is also alleged that they had certificates for gold bullion valued at billions of dollars.  Imelda, of course, pointed out that his husband was already rich even before he became president, because he was already engaged in gold bars business.

            The use of public office for self-aggrandizement brings with it graft and corruption.  Says David Timberman in his book, A Changeless Land: “The use of public office for personal or highly particularistic purposes causes recurring cycles of scandal or alleged scandal at every level of government.  The political ‘outs’ charge the ‘ins’ with corruption and abuse of power, only to have the same charges leveled at them if and when they take office.  Indeed, it is a paradox of Philippine politics that corruption is assumed to be endemic to politics and government, but at the same time ‘exposing’ corruption is a time-tested political tactic and guaranteed vote-getter.  The prevalence of corruption is a serious problem, but perhaps eve more serious is the widespread presumption that corruption is unavoidable.  This perpetuates the problem, reduces the credibility of political leaders and most importantly undermines the legitimacy of political institutions.”

            In her book, Christianity Versus Corruption, Miriam Defensor Santiago presents a corruption case study in our country, and goes over various corruption scandals: P35.7 B laundered money scandal, P200 B national debt scandal, P60 B oil firms tax credit scam, P25 B IMPSA power contract scandal, P20 B IMPSA power contract midnight deal, P9.2 B centennial exposition public works scandal, P7.5 B congressional initiative allocation scandal, to mention a few in her enumeration.  And yet, one wonders whether, in our history since pre-war politics, there has been a single high official from senator to president convicted of graft and corruption.  That these seem to cease to scandalize, still less ignite public outrage simply indicates that people expect leaders to be corrupt.  Indeed, although politicians are wont to level charges of corruption against their opponents come election period, yet there has hardly been any record of taking their accusation seriously to the point of bringing them court, most likely because it would undermine the oligarchic class, affecting many people, and because the issue would be divisive.

            What about plunder?  Plunder is simply a logical consequence of power politics for self-aggrandizement and power perpetuation. One is tempted to think that some of the elite assume the idea, like the kings of the old Europe did, that everything in their kingdom in a way belongs to them.  It seems difficult to really distinguish what belongs to the government and what belongs to the ruling elite; otherwise, plunder would not be possible.  In our political history, two presidents have been accused of plunder: Marcos and Estrada.  According to Amando Doronila, in his book, The Fall of Joseph Estrada, “as indicated by the evidence introduced during the impeachment trial and that collected by the successor president to back criminal charges of corruption and plunder, the deposed president allegedly amassed at least P10 billion in cash and other assets within two and a half years.  If these charges were true, Estrada would rival the scale of Marcos’ own plunder.  At the time of his flight to Hawaii in 1986, Marcos’ assets were estimated at US$10 billion.”

Elections as Tool to Gain and Preserve Power

            If politics is viewed as politics of power, elections must be seen not just as a political exercise in which people choose those who will hold public office.  Rather, they constitute a struggle among the elite to capture the power of the state.  Elections, in other words, are a form of war in which opposing wealthy individuals seek to place themselves in a political advantage.  Elections thus resolve the question as to who among the elite should have control over the country’s wealth and resources.

            Today’s conduct of elections has reinforced the elite’s control of the wealth and resources because it costs a fortune to be elected to government positions.  Since only the moneyed can afford to buy votes, give substantial donations, provide entertainment, engage in nationwide campaign, bribe officials, and use other means, fair or foul, it is logical why only the elite can run for public office.  Many towns suffer a dearth of candidates, not because no one is intellectually qualified, but because few have the capacity to finance their candidacy.  So, even at the local level, governance is becoming dominated by the local elite.   Elections are therefore not opportunities for people to choose the best who can govern them, but not infrequently to choose who among the elite will have access to power.  The result is that, elections have become an instrument for the continued dominance of the elite.

            Equally important, elections also function as a legitimization of that dominance, even if it is less than just.  To lend credibility to his martial law regime that has been under attack from foreign observers and to appease restive citizens, Marcos allowed elections to be held in 1978.  The result, which was condemned by the opposition as fraudulent, legitimized the Marcosian dominance, since his party, Kilusang Bagong Lipunan (KBL), won 151 out of 161 seats.  To legitimize his long tenure in office as president, Marcos called for presidential elections in 1981, in which he won by a margin of over 16 M votes or 91.4% against Alejo Santos of the Nationalista Party who got 8.6% only.  Of course, the largest opposition party at that time, Ninoy Aquino’s Laban, seeing through the farce, did not field any candidate.

            At the same time, it is needless to say that the conduct of elections practically disenfranchises the poor.  While it is true that theoretically, a poor man can run for president or senator, in practice, only the rich have the capacity to do so, for reasons we have noted above.

            Political parties have a somewhat parallel function.  Because the primary intent is to gain power, it is not surprising that political parties in the Philippines are merely nominal.  In theory, political parties are organized in order to direct the policies of the government; therefore, they should have a coherent ideology and programs that concretize it.  In the country, however, these parties do not have distinctive ideologies and programs, for they serve as vehicles of factional and personal ambition—to capture power.  They have no coherent philosophy.  It is difficult to see how the Partido Nationalista ng Pilipinas of Blas Ople is ideologically different from the Kilusang Bagong Lipunan that Nicano Iñiguez tried to reorganize.  Consequently, once one is not nominated in the party he is affiliated with, it can happen that he will organize his own.

            One’s party affiliation hardly indicates the ideology and principles that he believes in.  No wonder, a politician easily changes his political allegiance on the pragmatic basis of whether or not his party can help him achieve his ambition or not.  Though Marcos was a member of the Liberal Party for a long time, he joined the Nationalista Party when his original party nominated the incumbent president Diosdado Macapagal for re-election.  If the phenomenon of allegiance switching remains a political practice to date, it is also partly because people generally never give damn about it.  What is of prime importance to them is not whether a particular candidate makes important stand on issue of concern to the nation, but whether he can provide gifts, employment, funds and other benefits.

            Because our political parties lacked substance, no wonder politics degenerated into a politics of personalities.  “This is a system,” goes the CBCP Catechism on the Church and Politics, “where popularity of political candidates rather than issues count more than knowledge and competence.  The popularity of personalities, and the ‘connection’ of personalities to the powers that be are more often than not the main criteria for judging who should be elected.  Thus, candidates for public office who are popular in movies, sports or are connected to powerful political families have significant headstart in elections.” 

 

            Once ensconced in the seat of power, one expects that politicians would begin not only to recover the expenses incurred during the elections but also to accumulate more wealth.  Understandably enough, it would be too much to expect that congressmen, for instance, would take position on the basis of party principles.  Politics becomes one of pay-offs.   In 2000, Luis Chavit Singzon, governor of Ilocos Sur, alleged that he had personally given Joseph Estrada P400 M as pay-off from illegal gambling profits, and P180 M from the government price subsidy for the tobacco farmers’ marketing cooperative.  According to Jovito Salonga, author of Presidential Plunder: the Quest for the Marcos Ill-Gotten Wealth, and Belinda Aquino, author of The Politics of Plunder,  Marcos created monopolies and placed them under the control of his cronies, his families becoming owners of big corporations,  laundered money, and extracted kickbacks, among others.  Not so long ago, the Swiss government returned US$684 M in allegedly ill-gotten Marcos wealth.

Instrument of Elite Dominance and Power Perpetuation

            If monopolies are distributed among cronies, it is because, in order to survive and perpetuate themselves in power, the elite must share the benefits of power with their own trusted men. Which is why, ours has been described as politics of patronage.  Says the CBCP Catechism: “Derived from the feudal system of master and servant, the politics of patronage considers the relationship between public servant and ordinary citizen as that of patron (master) and client (servant).  Rewards or benefits are distributed according to the loyalty of clients to their patrons.  Clients or voters depend on their patron or public officials for every development project or assistance, and solutions to community problems.  Rewards or development projects are distributed, then, on the basis not of justice due to people but on the basis of the government official’s ‘kindness’ and the loyalty of the people to the public official.  Thus political leaders and followers who show support are rewarded with projects, money or jobs.  Dependence and subservience, passivity and inaction on the part of citizens is characteristic of such a system.  This accounts for the lack of viable organizations among the poor on the one hand, and the concentration of wealth on the other.”

            Patronage politics helps the well-entrenched elite perpetuate themselves in office in three ways.  First, people are so placed in debt that they have to pay in votes come election time.  Second, a network of political relations is built and expanded within their political turf and becomes a machinery to assure victory.  Third, it divides people into those who are loyal and those who are not, the better for the politicians to forestall any move by the clients to independently organize themselves into a powerful body.

            Pork Barrel, which is part of patronage politics, is one of the instruments of power perpetuation, though, admittedly, it has other uses.  In the Philippines, probably because of its not so edifying connotations, it came under different brands—Countrywide Development Fund (CDF) and Priority Development Assistance Fund (PDAF).  At present, each senator gets P200 M in pork barrel allocations, while each congressman receives P65 M.  Those who benefit from it naturally continue to be indebted to the politician, and therefore could be counted upon for votes in the next elections.  It thus serves as an instrument to secure support from the constituents and their loyalty to him.  During martial law, Marcos was generous with the pork barrel allotment to the assemblymen to shore up his regime.

            Having stayed long in office, some politicians seem to have developed a stance that treats public office as a family title that could be passed on from one generation to the next, That is to say, political power is perpetuated through family dynasty.   One is led to conclude that the office practically becomes a family asset that protects its own business and other interests and shields it from political jeopardy.  This probably explains why through generations we are familiar with surnames associated with politics, because they come up in almost every election period.  Some of these well-known names may be mentioned: Aquinos—Benigno, Sr, Benigno Jr, Noynoy, Tessie, and Herminio.  Osmeñas—Sergio Sr, Sergio Jr, Lito, Sergio III.  Estradas-—Joseph, Loi, Jinggoy, JV, Emilio Ramon.  Marcoses—Ferdinand, Imelda, Ferdinand Jr, Imee.  Not so long ago, Francisco Tatad resigned from the opposition because of principles associated with the phenomenon of political dynasty.  Of course, Tatad’s arguments based, among others, on the spirit of the Constitution were sound, but the elite would hear none of it.  Anyway, what happens is that the longer the politicians stay, the more entrenched they become, and the more difficult they are to remove.   

Disenfranchisement of the Poor

            Because politics is meant for the continued dominance of the elite, the wealthy never really work for what could fundamentally better the lot of the poor.  For one thing, they seem to think that what is good for them is also good for the constituents.  If one may not admit that the ruling elite are deliberately blind to the needs of the poor, one has to say that they have a narrow worldview.  As Miriam Defensor Santiago puts it, “the biggest problem in our culture is that many among the Metro Manila rich identify their selfish private interests with the general interests of the public; and their narrow social values, with national values.  The rich think that what is good for them is necessarily good for the country.  This is the root cause of massive poverty in the Third World.  Over the decades, the rich have succeeded in identifying their own social organization with the peace and order of society in general.  Because of this worldview, the rich consider themselves the apostles of law and order.  They support reform, but never a meaningful, even if peaceful, revolution.  They will support reform as long as they remain rich, and the poor remain where they are.  Their kind of reform is not only incremental, but also self-interested.  Their obsession with peace is tied to their privileges under the status quo.  This is why the rich must assume responsibility for widespread poverty.”

            Indeed, as we have already seen, the poor are removed from the center of power.  In fact, those whose interest lies outside what the elite consider as the true good of the state are removed from it.  One easily recalls  the plebiscite of 1947.  To give parity rights to the Americans to the exploitation and development of our natural resources, the Constitution had to be amended.  But with the presence in Congress of Luis Taruc and other congressmen who ran and won in the 1946 elections under the Democratic Alliance, and who opposed the proposal on nationalist grounds, it was feared that the parity rights bill might not get the required 2/3 votes.  Congress passed a resolution to remove them from the legislature on the ground of election frauds and terrorism!

            Indeed, even party-list mechanism, which was crafted into the 1987 Constitution with good intentions, could be used to advance the cause of the dominant power.  Though the principle behind the system is lofty, “it has been used, often enough,” says a PDI editorial (Apr 3, 07), “to smuggle political players into Congress, through the party-list backdoor.  If Akbayan party-list Rep. Etta Rosales is correct, the Arroyo administration is now in the middle of an attempt to smuggle in its own party-list representative through that same door.  Last week, she charged that the Comelec had accredited at least 11 suspect party-list groups, with varying degrees of connection to Malacañang or Palace officials…. The object is clear: The administration has seen the potent role played by a bloc of like-minded party-list representatives in both attempts to impeach the President.  Now, it wants to fill the party-list seats with friendly bodies.”

            In such a politics where the disenfranchised do not participate in the major decisions of the government, is it any wonder that we have insurgency problem?  As Jose Almonte says in his article, “Political Turmoil in the Philippines,” “dissident groups have no resort other than force in their effort to bridge the social cleavages in national society.  Hence, the Philippines has the distinction of hosting East Asia’s longest-running communist insurgency—as well as separatist movements among our Muslim communities, and, more recently, a series of mutinies by the middle ranks of the officer corps.”  Viewed in this context, it would a fortiori not be enough to solve insurgency by merely fighting against it through arms.

Politics in the Philippines: A History of Power Transfer

            It appears that Philippine politics is by and large a history of transfer of political power from one set of elite families to another, or within the same class.  From 1946 to 1968, political powers changed hands largely between the two parties—the Liberals and the Nationalistas, which were both peopled by wealthy individuals.  Neither of the two parties made any fundamental changes in the system, even though the party in power was always accused by the other of not giving the people a better deal.  In the 1970s, Marcos declared martial law to destroy the oligarchic structure of society, but he ended up with “crony capitalism” by distributing monopolies to his own cronies.  When Marcos fell from power in 1986, the elite that were removed from the center of power and privilege were restored and repositioned and continued the same elite politics. 

            Now, in the 2007 elections, we principally have Genuine Opposition vs. Team Unity, but from the point of view of principles and outlook, one has difficulty in finding their marked differences, except in terms of personalities.  It is simply a power struggle between two elite groups vying for power, pro-GMA and anti-GMA, but their agenda do not bear fundamental differences.  Of course, seasons, personalities and names in our political history change, but the system that the elite ruling class had installed before the war remains the same.   The majority, on the other hand, remains mired in poverty and alienated from the center of power and domination.   “The thing that hath been, it is that which shall be; and that which is done is that which shall be done; and there is no new thing under the sun” (Ecc 1:8).  [February 18, 2008]

           


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Nov 7, '09 7:23 AM for everyone

by Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD

 

UNDER THE PROPOSED budget for 2006 that Malacañang submitted to the House of Representatives on August 24, 2005, the government will set aside P931 million daily in interest payment.  The total budget is P1.05 trillion, and one-third of it, which is P340 billion, is earmarked for servicing the country’s debt. 

 

However, Rep Rolando Andaya, chair of the House appropriation committee, is quoted by the Philippine Daily Inquirer (PDI) to have bared that the real debt service allocation would jump to P721.7 billion, which is P8,306 a year for every Filipino, if the proposed budget for principal amortization of P381 billion was included in the General Appropriation Act.  Putting the figures in a different perspective, Cielito Habito said that next year the government will spend an average of P1.98 billion daily, which is enough to build 7,920 classrooms or 250 kilometers of road or P23 per Filipino per day!

 

If 1/3 of the 2006 national budget goes to interest payments on the debt of the Philippine government, it is because the country owes a lot of money from creditors.  As of January 2005, the total debt stood at P4.01 trillion, of which P2.04 trillion came from domestic sources, while the remaining P1.97 trillion was secured from abroad.  The debt increases every second, of course.  By the end of February, the total debt has reached P4.08 trillion!

       

       The figure alone boggles the mind!  How does the government service its debt?  Since it is part of the 2006 budget, funding for the debt service would come from the expected revenues of P968.6 billion and, since there is a revenue gap of P124.9 billion, from foreign loans.  In other words, the government cannot avoid borrowing to pay its debt.  And this has been the practice for many years.  To keep the government afloat and service its debt, it resorts to borrowing from foreign and local creditors.  No wonder, we continue to sink deeper in debt!

 

Brief History

 

            But, how come we incurred such a humongous amount, in the first place?   The story behind it is too complex to present in a short space such as this, but at the risk of oversimplification, one can say that in 1961, departing from the nationalist policies of predecessor Carlos Garcia, Diosdado Macapagal embraced the virtues of free enterprise, and opened the door to foreign investment, gearing up the economy for global competition. In return, the United States, the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the World Bank (WB) offered the government huge loans..  It was thought that foreign capital could be a catalyst of development.  That embrace, however, was probably our entry into the debt trap.  The pressure of the IMF and the WB was already being felt. When he became president in 1965, Ferdinand Marcos continued Macapagal’s economic liberalization policies.  The outcome was that the total external debt rose from $277.7 million at the beginning of Macapagal’s presidency in 1961 to $840.2 million at the end of Marcos’ first term in 1969.

 

            When Marcos imposed martial law, the trend toward economic liberalization accelerated in the absence of opposition from nationalists, like Tañada, Recto, Garcia, and Diokno, and he borrowed from outside to finance deficit.  This resulted in the increase of external debt from a little over $1 billion in 1972 to $28 billion in 1986, when he was forcibly removed from power.   But it would be wrong to blame Marcos for all our staggering debt.  His successors, from Cory Aquino to Gloria Arroyo, were not able to rescue the country from the debt trap.  When Aquino ended her term, the foreign debt stood at $30 billion.  Fidel Ramos increased it by $15 billion in six years, Joseph Estrada by $7 billion in 1 ½ years.  Almost twenty years after the end of the Marcos regime, the foreign debt has nearly tripled—from $28 billion to $69 billion.  According to Sen. Joker Arroyo, “the borrowings of the three-year old [Gloria-Macapagal] Arroyo administration are bigger than the combined borrowings of the [Fidel] Ramos and Erap [Joseph Estrada] administration for eight years.”

 

Various Approaches

 

            As the figures indicate, the debt continues to snowball.  There is no evidence that it will ever significantly decrease in the near future.  The proof of the pudding is that the money saved for debt service balloons every year.  The proposed interest payment next year, for instance, is P38.3 billion bigger than this year’s P301.7 billion.  Correspondingly, the allotment of the country’s debt service in the national government expenditure keeps on rising—from 46% in 2002 to 81% in 2004.  For 2006, it would probably be the same, though some would expect it to be at 85%. 

 

Quite apart from the ever increasing debt service and percentage in government expenditure, the country’s debt affects the life and death of every Filipino.  The quagmire we are caught in is its best evidence.  On the other hand, each Filipino taxpayer coughs up for the financing of debt service.  The deterioration of the quality and quantity of service that the government delivers to the people is not without relation to the amount it apportions for debt service.  One, then, finds it strange that such an important issue is removed from the agenda of public debate.  It is not even mentioned in the major rallies by national candidates during the election period.  Worst, in a country that parades itself to be democratic, the issue is not even known by most.

 

Various approaches to the debt problem have been adopted. Understandably, the government line is to honor the debt to preserve creditworthiness, even if economy is throttled.  As Press Secretary Ignacio Bunye explained, the past and present obligations must be paid, if the country is not to face sanctions that would ruin the economy.  To recall, Ferdinand Marcos issued Presidential Decree 1177 that automatically appropriates fund for debt servicing.  Part of the reason why President Arroyo pushed for the passage of the value-added tax (VAT) reforms was to generate P60 billion to wipe out the budget deficit and solve its debt woes.  In The Manila Times [March 12, 2005] report, World Bank country director, Joachim von Amsberg and Gabriel Singson, former Bangko Sentral governor, urged the government to hasten the enforcement of fiscal reforms, such as passage of value-added tax laws and step-up of tax collection efforts.

 

Others hold the exactly opposite view—Philippines must repudiate the international debt, considering that full compliance with the debt obligations pulls the country deeper into the quagmire of destitution..  The PAJCAD Visayas-Mindanao Jubilee Conference, for instance, urged the Philippine government “to repeal PD 1177 that provides for automatic appropriation for debt service,” pressed “for the immediate repudiation of all loans incurred by the Marcos dictatorship,” and demanded “the recall of the Philippine Ombudsman’s decisions exonerating Marcos and cronies on behest loans and economic crimes.”  More recently, two Catholic bishops in the Philippines, according to Belinda Cunanan (“Political Tidbits,” PDI, May 5, 2005) “called on the administration to repudiate those policies [of liberalization, deregulation, and privatization], especially our foreign debts.”

       

     Between these two extreme lie other options.  Prof. Walden Bello, for instance, is quoted by The Manila Times (March 12, 2005) as urging the government “to consider freezing payments to the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund, freezing payments for illegitimate debts and negotiating to devalue the country’s debts like Argentina did,” in order to help “free up money that can be used by the government for capital expenditure to boost the country’s economic growth.”  But as in the position of PAJCAD Visayas-Mindanao Jubilee Conference, he asked the government to “consider repealing the automatic appropriation mechanism for debt service under the General Appropriate Act.” which immunizes the appropriation from any debate in Congress.   As is well known, Solita Monsod, former director of the National Economic and Development Authority (NEDA), wanted to limit service payment, since it was futile to follow the recovery program dictated by creditors, but her option was not accepted during the Aquino regime.

 

Another view advocates renegotiation.  Typical of this position is that of the PDI editorial (Oct 24, 2004, “Debt Relief”), urging the government “to renegotiate—not merely to arrange longer payment periods or lower interest rates, buy to reduce—the national government’s overall debt stock.”   Far from the government unilaterally announcing it would launch an aggressive renegotiation, the editorial had this suggestion: “If the country’s business leaders spearhead the campaign to raise the possibility of debt renegotiation, they bring their international credibility, their business reputation, to bear on the matter.  They will be in a better position than government ministers to make the case for the Philippines.”

 

A Christian Once-Over at the Debt

 

But how is a Christian to look at the crisis of debt?  Of course, the problem is quite complicated.  A layman finds it difficult to grasp.  As Edgardo Espiritu showed in his Manila Times (March 3, 2004) article, “Some facts about our foreign debt,” the size of the debt does not tell the whole story; it has to be understood in the light of what happens in the entire economy, and viewed in relation to the trends in global economy and financial system.  Even so, our enormous debt is not independent of our human existence; it so much intertwined with the life and death of every Filipino that it cannot be looked at simply in terms of economics.  So pervasive are its effects on the daily life of Filipinos that it cannot be left alone to economists or technocrats!  All voices must be heard.  It has to be examined from all angles.  And a Christian looks at it in the light of his community tradition that is determinative of his existence and that of his community.

 

But what has Christian tradition to say of indebtedness that instead of helping the country prevents it from realizing its potential, in the end weakens and enslaves its economy?   First of all, the Bible provides some basic orientation that can guide him in his reflection and attitude toward the gargantuan debt.  It appears that in the Old Testament period, many people had little economic security.  Even when families owned land, a drought, war or locust could interfere with harvest, and send people to lenders who could demand high interest rate.  When they could not pay their debts, they sold their land or, worst, became slaves.  This resulting social disarrangement, however, had to be corrected, because “there must be no poor among you” (Deut 15:4). 

 

In order to forestall the establishment of slavery on account of indebtedness and poverty, God instituted the Jubilee, in which all lands went back to their original owners, and all Israelite slaves were freed.  Monopoly of land by a few was contrary to the will of God.  Debts were all cancelled.  “The purpose of the Jubilee laws,” says biblicist Kathleen O’Connor (“Jubilee,” The Collegeville Pastoral Dictionary of Biblical Theology) “was to ensure justice in the community.  Compliance with the Law would prevent the development of a landless class.  By redistributing the land, the community would share it equitably, and theoretically at least, no one would be deprived of home and/or livelihood.”   In the gospel of Luke (4:16-30), Jesus is portrayed as proclaiming the Jubilee Year!  Biblical scholar Sharon Ringe, in her book Jesus, Liberation and the Biblical Jubilee, even goes to show that Jesus clothed his proclamation and ministry in terms of Jubilee Year implementation.

       

     It is interesting to note that lending without interest is the Old Testament ideal.  A few examples: “If you lend money to any of my people with you who is poor, you shall not be to him as a creditor, and you shall not exact interest from him” (Exod 22:25); “To your brother you shall not lend upon interest, that the Lord God may bless you in all that you undertake” (Deut 23:20); the righteous person is one who “does not lend at interest or take any increase” (Ezek 18:8).  Of course, under the present economic structure, these cannot be cited as ground for a universal prohibition or interest, but the ground remains valid: the care—commented Bruce Chilton—for the community that God had liberated from slavery.

 

John Paul II’s Exhortations

 

            In recent years, John Paul II adverted to the biblical theme of Jubilee in connection with the international debt.  In preparation for the Jubilee Year 2000, he said, in his apostolic letter, Tertio Millennio Adveniente (no. 51), that “a commitment to justice and peace in a world like ours, marked by so many conflicts and intolerable social and economic inequalities, is a necessary condition for the preparation and celebration of the Jubilee.  Thus, in the spirit of the Book of Leviticus (25:8-12), Christians will have to raise their voice on behalf of all the poor in the world, proposing the Jubilee as an appropriate time to give thought, among other things, to reducing substantially, if not cancelling outright, the international debt which seriously threaten the future of many nations(underscoring mine).”

 

            In his apostolic exhortation, Ecclesia in Asia, he repeated the same theme: “The approach of the Great Jubilee of the Year 2000 is an opportune time for the Episcopal Conferences of the world, especially of the wealthier nations, to encourage international monetary agencies and banks to explore ways of easing the international debt situation.  Among the more obvious are the renegotiation of debts, with either substantial reduction or outright cancellation, as also business ventures and investments to assist the economies of the poorer countries (underscoring mine).”   In these and other documents, the late Pope did not address the debtor nations to make unilateral declaration of debt cancellation or to espouse the policy to faithfully honoring the debts. 

 

Rather, he addressed the rich nations and world organizations to consider substantial reduction, if not outright cancellation of international debts.  The reason for this is quite obvious.  The poor nations are not in a position to do so.  On the contrary, they are even scared to mention the words “substantial reduction” or “outright cancellation” lest they court the anger of the rich nations, the IMF and the WB.  “The lion has roared, who will not fear?” (Amos 3:8a).  Understandably, when the late Fernando Poe, Jr uttered the word “restructuring”, his critics called him reckless, equating it with unilateral repudiation.         

 

Morality

 

        But why did John Paul II keep harping on the theme of forgiveness of debts?  In Ecclesia in Asia, he said: “in many cases, these countries are forced to cut down spending on the necessities of life such as food, health, housing and education, in order to service their debts to international monetary agencies and banks” (no. 40).  The proposed budget for 2006 clearly illustrates this.  Rep Andaya said, for example, that the total debt payment of P721.7 billion was 80% of what the government plans to spend; on the other hand, education has an allocation of only P134.88 billion, health 10.6, environment and natural resources 6.3, and justice 5.3, to mention a few.  Does anyone wonder that he is not offered cotton or syringe for free in government hospitals?  

 

Sen. Miriam Defensor Santiago hit the nail on the head, when she observed, “the Philippines is caught in a debt trap.  Last January, when we were deliberating over the 2005 budget, interest payments forced the Senate to divert most of the meager Philippine funds that should have been allocated to health, education and food security.”  No wonder, she could say that the main source of poverty among poor countries, including the Philippines, is debt servicing. According to the Holy Father, “many people are trapped in living conditions which are an affront to human dignity” because of debt servicing.

 

The debt morass that traps the Philippines is immoral because it condemns people to hopeless poverty and misery.  In making debt servicing the top priority of the budget, the government practically ignores the welfare of the people.  If it is not moral to demand payment from a person who cannot pay without harming his life, neither is it morally correct to service a country’s debt by compromising the vital needs and the welfare of its people.  Asserted Jean Somers, Coordinator, Debt and Development Coalition Ireland, in “Cancelling the Third World Debts,” Irish Times (Aug 3, 2002): “It cannot be right, nor does it make any sense, to demand debt repayments from countries such as those in southern Africa facing severe famine… The debt crisis has been draining desperately needed resources from African countries over two decades, weakening their economic and social infrastructure and therefore their ability to respond to crises such as HIV/AIDS, draught and famine.  It is time these debts were cancelled.”

       

     The problem with international debt is that, instead of making the debtor countries economically self-reliant, they wind up more dependent on the rich nations, because the loans are usually intended for projects that make them buy more goods and contract more debts.  Pedro Salgado, OP, in his commentary on Centesimus annus, argued that the Philippine request of loan for the construction of an integrated steel factory was never approved, for with it Filipinos would not be importing steel from the wealthy nations.  It is easier for them to give loans for roads and irrigation projects, for roads would insure the sale of their cars and trucks, at the same time facilitating the entry and sale of foreign goods into what were, before the roads were constructed, hinterlands.  With irrigation, on the other hand, they could sell their tractors, fertilizers, pesticides, driers and mills.

 

            Last March 2005, some senators and congressmen denounced the World Bank’s warning that international agencies would not increase their aid to the country unless the government speeded up the passage of fiscal reform measures, like the value-added tax (VAT) bill.  According to the Manila Times report, Juan Ponce Enrile said that they cannot tell the lawmakers how they would pass the law, for they would do so according to their judgment of what the law should be.  That might be well, but the truth is, ever since the foreign debt increased in the 1970s, Marcos and the technocrats had to agree to the IMF and the WB guidelines for restructuring the various aspects of Philippine economy.

 

            Wrote David Wurfel in his book, Filipino Politics: Development and Decay: “Bank influence has always pushed policy in the direction of ‘freeing the market of controls’ and ‘removing barriers to free trade.’  IMF pressure imposed devaluation on Marcos in 1970, a severe blow to Filipino manufacturers for the domestic market who mainly imported foreign components.  In 1976, the Marcos regime committed itself to three years of ‘close economic supervision’ by the IMF in exchange for a $280 million loan.  A 1979 loan of $190 million to cover a balance-of-payments shortfall had similar restrictions.  The Philippines was required to abolish price controls, tighten credit, and sharply reduce tariffs, which helped cause unemployment.  Similar conditions were attached to loans in the 1980s.”

 

            But what is wrong with international debt does not only come from its heavy and deleterious consequences.  In some cases, debt itself is odious.  The term “odious debt” comes from Alexander Sack, world’s pre-eminent legal scholar, who gave shape to its legal doctrine.  According to him, “If a despotic power incurs a debt not for the needs or in the interest of the State, but to strengthen its despotic regime, to repress the population that fights against it, etc., this debt is odious for the population of all the State.”  The odious debt is not an obligation of the people; it is the regime’s debt.  It was incurred without the people’s consent, it did not benefit them, and the lenders must have been aware of those two conditions.  The United States used this doctrine to repudiate Cuba’s debt to Spain.

 

            Some have suggested that some portions of our foreign debt are odious, and therefore they should be cancelled.  In an article, “Fiscal Crisis Takes a ‘Creative’ Turn in the Philippines,” by Lisa Peryman (Odious Debts Online, March 4), Manuel Villar seemed inclined to make such classification under his proposed debt relief act.  Wrote Peryman: “The Philippines’ staggering debt load is largely attributed to economic policy under the corrupt administration of former President Ferdinand Marcos.  According to the PDI, foreign loans were a ‘rich source of funds’ for Marcos and his cronies who used monies generated in loans to line their own pockets.”  Indeed, a significant part of this debt is known as behest loans which Marcos granted to his cronies, and which later on were assumed by the government.

 

            Moreover, some of these loans are immoral because of their inherent deceit and corruption.  They are illegitimate.  The classic example is the Bataan Nuclear Power Plant, which accounts for 5% of the total debt of the country.  It was constructed in 1975 and completed in the mid-1980s.  However, in 1986, a team of international inspectors declared it unsafe and inoperable.  Without producing a single watt of electricity, it costs $2.3 billion, which is three times the price of a comparable plant in South Korea.  Marcos is accused of making $80 million in kickbacks, according to Jojo Robles, in his article, “Debt, Power and Imee Marcos,” Manila Standard Today (Aug 26, 1965).

 

            Robles quoted a respected British publication that cites the plant as an example of a debt that should not be repaid: “First, it was a grand scheme of the late dictator that never benefited the people and is thus an ‘odious debt’ under international law.  Second, the children of the Philippines are being asked to pay for bribes to Marcos and excess profits of the contractor.  Third, the company should take the responsibility for building a nuclear power plant station just 60 miles from the sprawling capital Manila, near several earthquake fault lines and at the foot of a dormant volcano.”  Understandably, Supreme Court Associate Justice Reynato Puno, speaking on April 19, 2005 at the 10th national convention of the Integrated Bar of the Philippines, urged the government to consider stopping payments for loans that Marcos barrowed to build it.

 

Theology

 

            Quite aside from the moral point of view, our debt has to be seen also from a theological vantage point.  For one thing, wealthy nations and those who hold international bodies could consider them as an opportunity and a challenge, in the words of John Paul II in his Ecclesia in Asia, “to value the human person and the lives of millions of human beings more highly than financial or material gain (n 41).”  The 1998 CBCP Pastoral Exhortation on Philippine Economy singled out the principle on the primacy of the human person in economic development (nn. 40-41), on the basis of which one can ask for the cancellation of debts because its servicing violates the right of millions of human beings to be more (cf John Paul II, Centisimus annus, n 44).  Profits over the broken bones of humanity are simply immoral!

 

            In this connection, one may quote the US Catholic Bishops in their pastoral letter, Economic Justice for All.  “The [debt] crisis, however, goes beyond the system; it affects people.  It afflicts and oppresses large numbers of people who are already severely disadvantaged.  That is the scandal: it is the poorest people who suffer most from the austerity measures required when a country seeks the IMF ‘seal of approval’ which establishes its creditworthiness for a commercial loan (or perhaps an external aid program).  It is these same people who suffer most when commodity prices fall, when food cannot be imported or they cannot buy it, and when natural disasters occur.  Our commitment to the preferential option for the poor does not permit us to remain silent in these circumstances.  Ways must be found to meet the immediate emergency—moratorium on payments, conversion of some dollar-dominated debt into local-currency debt, creditors’ accepting a share of the burden by partially writing-down selected loans, capitalizing interest, or perhaps outright cancellation [n 274].”

 

The underlying principle involved is the solidarity of all peoples.  In his encyclical letter, Solicitudo rei socialis (n 26), John Paul II noted: “Today perhaps more than ever in the past, people are realizing that they are linked together by a common destiny, which is to be constructed together, if catastrophe for all is to be avoided.  From the depth of anguish… the idea is slowly emerging that the good to which we are all called and the happiness to which we aspire cannot be obtained without an effort and commitment on the part of all, nobody excluded, and the consequent renouncing of personal selfishness.”   The world is the big family of God, and we are all our brothers’ keepers.  It would be immoral for rich nations to enjoy the blessings of the world while poor countries wallow in misery. 

 

That is why, John Paul II declared in his encyclical letter, Centesimus annus ( n 35): “The principle that debts must be paid is certainly just.  However, it is not right to demand or expect payment when the effect would be the imposition of political choices leading to hunger and despair for entire peoples.  It cannot be expected that the debts which have been contracted should be paid at the price of unbearable sacrifices; in such cases it is necessary to find—as in fact is partly happening—ways to lighten, defer or even cancel the debt, compatible with the fundamental right of peoples to subsistence and progress.”

 

On the other hand, in cancelling a huge amount of debt, one imitates God who generously forgives.  In the Matthean parable of an Oriental sultan who audited the operation of his governors, one was found to have defrauded him P50 billion.  It was expected that as a despot he would inflict the most degrading punishment—imprison him and sell his family into slavery.  When the defrauder offered a proposal for restitution, he got the surprise of his life—his debt was generously forgiven!  As Douglas Hare in his book, Matthew, has correctly commented, the theological center of the story is the astounding magnanimity of the king.  “So it is with the kingdom of heaven.  Those who wish to be part of that kingdom must imitate the incalculable patience and generosity of its sovereign.”   If God is rich in mercy, so must the rich countries and international institutions toward the poor humanity.

 

Hope

 

            Looking at the history and nature of our international debt in the light of his tradition, a Christian cannot but hope that all our debt is forgiven.  But is cancellation of billions of dollars that the Philippines owes to wealthy nations, the IMF and the WB impossible?  It is interesting to note that last June 2005, the world’s leading industrial nations—Britain, United States, Canada, France, Germany, Russia, Japan and Italy—agreed to write off the multilateral debts that the world’s poorest nations, mostly African, owed to the tune of $40 billion.  In the next 18 months, 11 more countries will be included in the list of beneficiaries to bring the total debt forgiveness to $55 billion.  Some leaders have, of course, reservations about the debt relief, knowing too well the possibility that the program could be subject to some conditions that would undermine the sovereignty of the debtor-nations.

 

            Still, this augurs well for poor nations like the Philippines, even if the sum is paltry.  At least, one is beginning to wonder if indeed creditors have a human heart, after all.  “It may be too much,” says the PDI editorial (June 16, 2005, “Debt relief”), “to expect the country’s creditors to write off all its debts. If the rich nations were to extend this privilege to every debtor nation, the IMF, the World Bank and other international financial institutions would probably have to shut down.  But now that they have seen the urgency of extending debt relief to the poorest nations, they should consider a similar program for other heavily indebted nations. It doesn’t have to be a complete write-off.  In the Philippines, for instance, a good start would be the condonation of loans tainted with fraud, like the financing for the construction of the Bataan Nuclear Power Plant that has never been used.”  

 

And yet, who knows, such a small beginning could wind up with total cancellation of debts?  Who knows, representatives of the First World and the leaders of IMF and WB will finally sit down with the Vatican and heed the Pope’s call, in his Ecclesia in America (n 59), to “seek ways of resolving the problem of foreign debt and produce guidelines that would prevent similar situations from recurring on the occasion of future loans?” Who knows, guided by the Christian tradition and reflection on debts—not by pragmatic and selfish interest—the wealthy nations and financial institutions will eventually correct what is wrong with the international economic order and set up a system and mechanisms capable of ensuring an integral development of the poor countries?  Then, the Philippines can really start a new economic policy, no longer import dependent and export oriented, no longer tied to foreign interest and to the unjust economic order!*


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Nov 3, '09 5:10 PM for everyone

(or, The Relevance of the Catholic Social Doctrine)

By Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD

WHEN THE PHILIPPINE Ambassador to the Vatican presented her credentials to the Pope not so long ago, the Holy Father pointed out that “the struggle against poverty in the Philippines calls for honesty, integrity and unwavering fidelity to the principles of justice, especially on the part of those entrusted with positions of governance and public administration.”  Although the presidential spokesman opined that this was addressed to those who aspire for leadership in the coming elections, commentators took this as an indictment against the Arroyo administration for its failure to solve poverty, owing to the dearth of moral underpinnings in the exercise of governance.  However this is interpreted, there is no doubt that, if the Philippine society is really to be liberated from the shackles of misery, those in position of governance have to adhere to moral standards and principles.

            For how explain our transmogrification from the most progressive country in southeast Asia to almost the most sluggish one, our dubious honor of being the most corrupt nation in Asia, our inability to pay the ever burgeoning national debt of P4.221 trillion in 2008, our being the sick man in Asia, our being a nation of maids?  Of course, some observe that the causes of our misery are greed, corruption, poverty, profligacy, thievery, lack of job opportunities, wanton extravagance, insensitivity to the needs of the poor, etc.  Others would argue that western imperialism, bureaucrat capitalism and semi-feudalism have brought us to this quagmire.  But all this takes the symptom for the disease.  For the root of our misery lies in a higher plane; it consists in the dearth of ethical foundation and vision in those who exercise governance.  One cannot therefore overemphasize the need for leaders who adhere to foundational principles that guide their policies and actions.

Four Fundamental Principles

            Which principles?  For a Christian leader, of course, the primordial principle is Jesus himself, his life and teachings. Since, however, the world today is far removed from the New Testament times, and the problems raised are obviously far different from those that Jesus faced, one must make an effort to relate the Gospel of Jesus to the problems and the situation in our time.  And the Church has done (and is doing) just that.  In our era, for instance, the Popes, in trying to apply the Gospel to the pressing issues of the day, issued various encyclicals that analyze the problems, determine the causes and suggest solutions.  Best known of these papal writings are Leo XIII’s Rerum novarum, Pius XI’s Quadragesimo anno, John XXIII’s Mater et Magistra and Pacem in terris, Paul VI’s Populorum progressio, and John Paul II’s Laborem exercens, Solicitudo rei socialis, and Centesimus annus.

            As one runs through these documents, one notices not only that there is a growth and development in the understanding of problems, their causes and their solutions, but also that there is an increase in the number of principles that have to be taken into account, reflecting, no doubt, the ever increasing complexity of world realities.  Considering that one does not have the time to read through all of them, and the enormity of the principles enunciated there, the question may be asked: are there any fundamental principles from which the many other principles one encounters in the encyclicals ramify?  It may be recalled that when Jesus was asked about the great commandment that incorporates all the 615 commandments in the law of Moses, he adverted to the injunction on loving God and loving one’s neighbor.  The same may be observed in the case of principles on societal realities.  Though various have been the attempts to spell out the fundamental moral principles in social doctrine, the newly published Compendium of the Social Doctrine of the Church lists only four:  (1) primacy and dignity of the human person; (2) common good; (3) solidarity, and (4) subsidiarity.

            In what follows, I would like to relate these principles to the Philippine society in order to help the Christian leader engaged in the present issues toward its transformation.  This is not, of course, to say that these are valid only for Christian leaders.  Quite the contrary, they are not only permanent and universal; they are also primary and fundamental parameters of reference to interpret and evaluate social realities.  Even unbelievers can apply them, because they speak to all people and to all nations.  And their implications, it will be noted, are far-reaching.  What is important is that, one really seeks the truth about man and society, and it will be seen that the four are interconnected and complement each other. He cannot use any of them disjoined to the rest, unless he, to be sure, does it with a bad conscience.

The Primacy and Dignity of the Human Person

            If the Philippine society is really to be orderly and humanely developed, it must be founded on a correct understanding of the human being. According to the Compendium, “the human person must always be understood in his unrepeatable and inviolable uniqueness” (131).  A center of consciousness and freedom, he is open to the infinite and to other created beings.  Unique though he is, with a dignity higher than any other creature, the human being is not sufficient unto himself.  He not only needs God on whom his life depends; he also needs others in order to realize himself.  As Vatican II, Gaudium et spes, stresses, “the beginning, the subject and the goal of all social institutions is and must be the human person, which for its part and by its very nature stands completely in need of social life” (25).

            There are several points to be noted.  First off, because of his transcendental dignity, the human person cannot be subordinated to wealth, progress, means of production, institutions, and minerals.  He cannot be used to advance any of these.  Quite the contrary, all of them are ordained to his perfection.  Hence, it is morally objectionable, for example, to encourage prostitutes to promote tourism, to suppress the right of workers for business to earn more, to allow people to work in subhuman conditions in mining to increase profits.  Since they exist in order for the human person to realize himself, rights and duties directly and simultaneously flow from his very nature, rights which are universal, inviolable and inalienable.  The logic is simple.  If man is destined to perfection, he should have all the rights that are necessary to achieve that perfection.  This is the reason for being of the Declaration of the Rights of Man of the United Nations and the list of human rights in John XXIII’s Pacem in Terris.

            Against this background, it would be hard, therefore, to imagine a Philippine leader training his sight on development, but at the same time trampling on the rights of his constituents, or depriving them of their rights.  How can one claim strong leadership without addressing the people’s right to life, bodily integrity and the means necessary and suitable for the proper development of life?  Just look at the quality of the ordinary people’s access to food, shelter, medical care, social services, security in sickness and old age, care for the handicapped and mentally ill and unemployment!  Can it really be called human?  Extrajudicial killings, arbitrary arrests, disappearance cannot be justified in the name of state security.  The use of vote-buying, dagdag-bawas, fraud and violence is flagrant denial of the people’s free will in electoral process.

            In addition, since each man has a human dignity, which should be respected, all persons are fundamentally equal before God and before humanity, irrespective of their race and color, nationality, economic status, sexual orientation, or achievement in life.  The President of the Philippines does not have more human dignity that the pedicab driver in Isla Puting Bato.  Human dignity does not reside in the economic power, political position, gender, social status of the individual.  No one is superior to his fellow men.  That dignity lies in his being an image of God, in his being a child of God, and in his eternal destiny.  What people acquire, amass or achieve in life has nothing to do with it.  True development cannot therefore allow a compartmentalized form of justice—one for the rich and the powerful and another for the poor.

            However, it should be emphasized that the primacy of the human person must not be seen as a promotion of individualism, for inherent in the concept of the human person is the notion of social relationship.  Man is a social being, who “recognizes the necessity of integrating himself in cooperation with his fellow human beings, and who is capable of communion with them on the level of knowledge and love” (Compendium, 149). Lest this be interpreted as an affirmation of collectivism, the Compendium equally emphasizes that the human person cannot “be thought of as a mere cell of an organism that is inclined at most to grant it recognition in its functional role within the overall system” (125).  “By the very force of their nature and by their internal destiny,” individuals are united into an “organic, harmonious mutual relationship” (125).

            This relational dimension of the human person, however, has to be understood as a corrective to the overemphasis on the primacy of the individual.  The realization of man’s human dignity is always in the context of the community. “Together with equality in the recognition of the dignity of each person and of every people there must also be an awareness that it will be possible to safeguard and promote human dignity only if this is done as a community, by the whole humanity” (145).  One cannot therefore merely regard the human person as an independent being, separate from others.  Consequently, if a leader wishes to promote human dignity among Filipinos, it cannot therefore be just the work of a few; it would take the collective effort of both rich and poor, a work that would entail the elimination of the gross disparity and inequality between them.

The Common Good

            Which brings us to the second principle—the common good.  For, if individual human persons have to group themselves, its reason for being is the achievement of their collective welfare.  As individuals, they lack what is necessary for the enjoyment of social life; common good is needed to advance their human dignity.  Gaudium et spes defines it as “the sum of those conditions of social life which allow social groups and their individual members relatively thorough and ready access to their own fulfillment” (n 26).  Those conditions ran the gamut from goods and services to values that are actualized in the members of the community, enabling them to perfect their lives.  Thus, in placing itself at the service of each human person, society has no other purpose than the common good.

            The achievement of the common good is not only the work of the individual members.  Since it is the reason for its existence, the state has the responsibility of attaining it; it must make available to persons the material, cultural, moral and spiritual goods in order for them to live a truly human life.  Because each one has a right to enjoy the conditions of social life brought about by the quest for the common good, the challenge for a Filipino leader who seeks to transform Philippine society is gargantuan.  A formidable obstacle to the attainment of the common good is the huge disparity between the oligarchs who are few and the proletariat members who belong to the great majority.  Naturally, the rich control the state apparatus, the economy, the mass media and the exercise of politics.  In such a society, it is difficult to speak of common good, for there is no equality, and the comfortable social conditions in which the rich live are not shared by the many that are deprived of the basic necessities.   One may not be mistaken to say that the privileged do not care for the common good—except the good that coincides with theirs; for the most part, all they are interested in are power and the privileges that go with it, even if these hurt the poor.

          It is also in the light of the common good that leaders must re-examine our international debt.  As John Paul points out in his Centesimus annus, “the principle that debts must be paid is certainly just.  However, it is not right to demand or expect payment when the effect would be the imposition of political choices leading to hunger and despair for entire peoples.  It cannot be expected that the debts which have been contracted should be paid at the price of unbearable sacrifices.  In such cases, it is necessary to find—as in fact is partly happening—ways to lighten, defer or even cancel the debt, compatible with the fundamental right of peoples to subsistence and progress” (39).  In the Philippines , for instance, not enough money is poured to health, education, and other basic necessities because what is intended for them are coughed up for debt repayment.  Indeed, the nature of this debt is such that the borrower becomes all the poorer rather than richer, linked as it is with oppressive conditions, not to mention the fact that a portion of it gets to the pockets of the elite.  One might as well ask Monsod if Shylock should get his pound of flesh!

Universal Destination of Goods

          This makes a mockery of the principle that naturally flows from the principle of common good—the universal destination of goods.  According to this principle, “God intended the earth and all that it contains for the use of every human being and people.  Thus, as all men follow justice and unite in charity, created goods should abound for them on a reasonable basis” (GS 69).  What we see in the Philippines is a pathetic distribution of goods.  Some provinces, for instance, have the best infrastructures, but others, especially those removed from the political center, wallow in the primitive. Mining has not enriched the Samar provinces and the poor; the profits went elsewhere. Globalization is embraced by those who control the economy, but has not improved the lives of the dispossessed.  Laws on land reform are enacted, but they are not really catered to the benefit of tenants and farmers.

          Indeed, despite all the press releases and fanfare attendant upon poverty alleviation program, the properties of the propertied remain intact.  That nothing is new under the sun as regards efforts to close the gap between the rich and poor finds its telling evidence in the slum problems in Metro Manila and other cities.  One can always ask what is being done by our leaders to correct the lopsided relationship in an  economic structure that more often than not favors the moneyed. This has to be asked because “the universal destination of goods entails obligations on how goods are to be used by their legitimate owners. Individual persons may not use their resources without considering the effects that this use will have; rather they must act in a way that benefits not only themselves and their families, but also the common good” (Compendium, 178).

          Clearly, then, the right to private property is not absolute.  Indeed, Christian tradition has never recognized that right as untouchable.  According to John Paul II, in Laborem excercens, this tradition has “always understood the right within the broader context of the right common to all to use the goods of the whole creation; the right to private property is subordinated to the right to common use, to the fact that goods are meant for everyone” (84).  But will the rich part with their riches?  One might be asking for the moon.  But it is well to remind them of the words of St Ambrose in De Nabuthe that Paul VI quotes in Populorum progressio: “You are not making a gift of your possessions to the poor person.  You are handing over to him what is his.  For what has been given in common for the use of all, you have arrogated to yourself.  The world is given to all, and not only to the rich.”

          In view of this, one wonders whether those in governance would be willing to extirpate greed and sever themselves from their wealth, instead of trying to accumulate more of it.   Truth is, even public office is treated as private property—politicians perpetuate themselves in office through dynasty, as if they had the exclusive claim to it.  Today, it is often told that the country needs leaders who can be trusted.  Of course, that is correct.  Filipinos hardly need a leader who is a liar, profligate, wanton, greedy, violator of human rights, self-serving, ambitious, tyrannical, and overweening.  The nation looks for a leader who could talk about “an economic vision inspired by moral values that permit people not to lose sight of the origin or purpose of goods so as to bring about a world of fairness and solidarity (Compendium, 174).”  And of course he can walk the talk.  Since he himself is part of the oligarchy, he should be able to make his own life a showcase of how a politician can contribute to the common good.  He can do this not by siding with the landed gentry and the aristocracy, but by opting for the poor and the oppressed

Preferential Option for the Poor

          The reason for this is that the principle of preferential option for the poor logically flows from the principle of the universal destination of goods. In the words of the Compendium, “The principle of the universal distribution of goods requires that the poor, the marginalized and in all cases those whose living conditions interfere with their proper growth should be the focus of particular concern.  To this end, the preferential option for the poor should be reaffirmed in all its force (192).”   For John Paul II, in his Sollicitudo rei socialis, this option is a “special form of primacy in the exercise of Christian charity… It affects the life of each Christian inasmuch as he or she seek to imitate the life of Christ, but it applies equally to our social responsibilities and hence to our manner of living, and to the logical decisions to be made concerning the ownership and use of goods” (42).

          In this country where the majority wallow in misery and only a few enjoy so much wealth, common sense dictates that in the distribution of goods, the needy, the hungry, the homeless, those without medical care, the aged, the neglected and the hopeless should have preference, if all are created equal.  Yet, is there any aspiring national leader whose platform will make this principle real in everyday life?  Someone, of course, ran on the program for the mahirap, but when he abruptly ended his term, the poor were more numerous than ever.  The promise that relatives and friends would have no place in his dispensation was just that—a promise, for his bank accounts never showed that the hopeless were his beneficiaries.

          Truth is, the principle of the universal destination of common good and that of the preferential option for the poor can be translated into realities only if they are matched by a recognition of the participation of all at the level of political decision.  As things stand, it remains a figment of the imagination, for who makes political decisions?  The challenge of future leaders could be daunting.  Is there any presidentiable who is capable of betraying the interest of his social class?  The executive and legislative branches of the government are occupied largely by the rich and by those who in politics became rich, and one wonders whether they are prepared to give up their privileges.  If the history of land reform law has anything to tell us, it is that the privileged class is not yet ready to give up its advantages to really lift the poor from wretchedness. Indeed, there is no evidence that the lot of the poor has improved since the birth of the Philippine republic.  Since those elected eventually become part of the privileged class, one hardly expects that what will be distributed to the poor really go beyond noodles, can goods, rice and PhilHealth cards.

Stewardship

           Yet, come to think of it—if the common good has a universal destiny, it is because no man can ever claim to own anything as his own; humans are only stewards of creation.  The principle of stewardship derives from the understanding that God is the source of all creation, and whatever man has is simply God’s gift not for himself but for the benefit of all.  In his World Day of Peace Message in 1990, John Paul II asserts that “the earth is ultimately a common heritage, the fruit of which are for the benefit of all.  In the words of the Second Vatican Council, ’God destined the earth and all it contains for the use of every individual and all peoples’ (GS 69).  This has direct consequences for the problem at hand.  It is manifestly unjust that a privileged few should continue to accumulate excess goods, squandering available resources, while masses of people are living in conditions of misery at the very lowest level of subsistence.  Today, the dramatic threat of ecological breakdown is teaching us the extent to which greed and selfishness—both individual and collective—are contrary to the order of creation, an order which is characterized by mutual interdependence.”

          Can a political leader curb the greed and selfishness of the privileged class?  Greed and craving for huge profit left in their wake the destruction of natural resources—forest denudation, floods, destruction of crops and aquatic animals, plunder of mines and death of rivers, obliteration of corals and mangroves, to mention a few of their evil effects.  Today, people are reaping the whirlwind, but although the problem has affected almost every one, especially now that climate has changed a lot, the victims remain those who are in the underside of history.  But one cannot take up the cause of the poor without antagonizing those who make fantastic profits in the destruction of environment. One wonders whether a leader could still pursue a program of total development, given the oppositions he has to hurdle.

Solidarity

          There is no formula for a political will that does not antagonize the beneficiaries of a lopsided system of distribution of goods, but any attempt would have to presuppose a change of vision of humanity.  Such a vision would certain include the principle of solidarity, because this stands in opposition to all that greed and selfishness imply.  If social evil arises because a good number are lusting for power and greedy for wealth, and love to work only for their selfish ends, solidarity signifies the contrary—the offering of one’s self for the common good.  Solidarity, in the words of John Paul II in Sollicitudo rei socialis, is “not a feeling of vague compassion or shallow distress at the misfortune of so many people, both near and far.  On the contrary, it is a firm and persevering determination to commit oneself to the common good, that is to say, to the good of all and each individual, because we are all really responsible for all” (38).

          The principle of solidarity highlights interdependence as intrinsic to the social nature of man. “It is above all a question of interdependence sensed as a system determining relationships in the contemporary world, in its economic, cultural, political and religious elements, and accepted as a moral category.  When interdependence becomes recognized in this way, the correlative response as a moral and social attitude, as a virtue, is solidarity” (SRS 38).  Solidarity then obliges those who are well-off to share their goods and services with the unfortunate.  At the same time, it urges them to correct injustices done to the poor, especially those that arise from the consuming desire for profit and thirst for power, like extending one’s tenure of office by advocating charter change.  It this way, they are able to lose part of their possessions and become committed to the common good.

          But the poor cannot just wait for the rich to be committed to their obligation under the principle of interdependence; it is important that the victims of history express their solidarity with one another, if society is to be transformed.  As John Paul II asserts in Laborens exercens, “in order to achieve social justice…, there is a need for ever new movements of solidarity of the workers and with the workers.  This solidarity must be present whenever it is called by the social degradation of the subject of work, by exploitation of workers, and by the growing areas of poverty and hunger.  The Church is firmly committed to the cause, for she considers it her mission, her service, a proof of her fidelity to Christ so that she can truly be the Church of the poor” (37). 

To uplift the poor from misery, a Filipino leader cannot just therefore express interdependence through distribution of rice and noodles in times of calamities.  More has to be done, including setting up draconian measures to correct the continuing degradation of the poor.  Far from depending merely on the oligarchy to dispense crumbs, he must encourage small communities, organizations, employees and workers to unite themselves.  Considering the opposition that this step might create, since he would be making enemies of those well-placed in position of power and privilege, he would need the help of other institutions, like the Church.  If the Church in the Philippines is really a church of the poor, it would have to opt in favor of workers, peasants, fisher folk and the marginalized, in their effort to liberate themselves from injustices.

Subsidiarity

That small groups should make initiatives that could help them achieve their own perfection brings us to the last fundamental principle of Catholic Social Doctrine—subsidiarity.  This principle stipulates that the society, the government, and other bigger institutions, rather than take advantage of, or oppress the smaller ones, should be helpful to them, especially the ultimate members: the individual.  Far from absorbing them or colonizing them, they should enhance their proper activity.  Pius XI, in his Quadragesimo anno, expresses the principle as follows: “Just as it is wrong to withdraw from the individual and commit to the community at large what private initiative and endeavor can accomplish, so it is likewise an injustice, a serious harm, and a disturbance of proper order to turn over to a greater society, of higher rank, functions and services which can be performed by smaller communities on a lower plane” (79).  If the principle of solidarity is opposed to all forms of political or social individualism, that of subsidiarity stands in opposition against all forms of collectivism.

Like the previous principles, this one is based on the dignity of the individual.  All forms of society, whether big or small, are meant to help him.  And because man is a social being, smaller societies, like the family, local association, small groups and the like, are the locus in which the individual human person exercises that social dimension of his existence and relate him to the bigger society.  This bigger society has the obligation to create conditions in which the individual can grow and develop his potentials, and reach perfection.  Consequently, what can be done at the level of the small group should remain there, and not absorbed or taken over by the larger one.  Its competence is to be respected. 

The larger community can take over its role only if it cannot be realized at the local level; but if it can be done, the State, for instance, cannot substitute itself in its stead in terms of responsibility and initiative.  In other words, the performance of an action is best done at the lowest possible level.  The same may be said of its responses to local problems.  Problems in smaller groups are to be met at that level, and the government can intervene only when the solutions are beyond the capacity of that level.  There is, thus, no justification for the government to dictate families as to how many children they should have; that is the sphere of husband and wife.  Nor can it prescribe what forms of contraception couples should accept, for that is the competence of married people who decide in the light of their religious belief.

The implication here is that individuals and smaller communities are empowered to get involved in the realization of their life and mission.  They take the reign of their own history.  According to the Compendium, participation is expressed in activities through which the citizen contributes to the cultural, social, economic and political life of the community to which he belongs; it is a duty to be fulfilled by all, with responsibility and with a view to the common good (189).  By participating, the individual becomes active in ordering his life, and is also able to help other individuals in the community, especially those in dire need.  The obligation to be at the service of others is concretized by this principle.  

In terms of governance, the principle of subsidiary obviously implies political reforms whereby the influence of the national government is reduced in order to promote local autonomy.  The Constitution of 1987 has already provided some form of autonomy to the Muslims and to the indigenous peoples.  In 1991, the local government code enacted reforms for greater accountability and transparency.  But one wonders whether these are enough.  On the other hand, how would the people be protected from local governance where people are colonized by their own local officials?  The individuals at the local level still do not participate, and because those in governance somehow substituted only the role of those at the national level, social conditions are never created in which individuals grow and realize their potential.

But an even greater challenge is to transform the political system into such that the local government becomes self-sufficient and not merely depends on the internal revenue allotment for its survival.  But this problem is rooted in the feudal system that characterizes the relationship between the national and the local levels.  Under this system, the master-servant relationship where loyalty, subservience and dependency appear as virtues, is itself paralleled in the local level, in terms of the relationship between local politicians and clients, exacerbating the concentration of wealth in the hands of a few and the pauperization of the disenfranchised.   Of no less importance, a structural reform has to be instituted in such a way that the poor can have a share in the powers of the government, if their participation in governance is not to remain in theory; that way, they can participate, for instance, in the decisions on the allocation of funds.  With their participation, they can see to it that money really goes to where it is needed, not ending up in the pockets of the elite that now control the set-up.

Final Word

TAKING ALL THESE principles into account, one gets the impression that the nation has still a long way to go, if it is really to achieve integral liberation and development.  Those entrusted with governance have to understand that these principles are sine qua non for real development, and they have to be taken as principles for reflection, criteria for judgment and directives for action, if they are really intent on uplifting the majority of the people from misery.  But then, it would take much sacrifice for them and for those holding power and enjoying privilege.  Political will would not be enough; leaders would have to be willing and ready to lose power and privilege for the sake of the many in the process of transforming the Philippine society.  Still, the question remains: will they be ready to lose them?  If our history of politics has anything to tell us, it is that politicians scarcely care for any of these principles, for their objective is not much more than the capture of power and the enjoyment of its privileges, no matter if these harm the deprived.  The challenge for leaders today and tomorrow is to break with that history.*


Posted by Msgr Lope C on Oct 3, '09 6:48 AM for everyone

 

Why Did the White Russians Settle in Tubabao Is., Guiuan?

 

By Lope Coles Robredillo, SThD

 

The evacuation of more than 5,800 emigres to the island of Tubabao, Guiuan, Eastern Samar in 1949-1951 sprang from the relentless efforts of the White Russians in Communist China to flesh out their aspiration to live as a free people.

 

            It should be recalled that during and after the 1917 Bolshevic revolution in Russia under Vladimir Lenin against the Tsar and the Russian civil war that ensued, the White Russians, who were opposed to the Communist regime, fled the country.   Emigres from Southern Russia and Ukraine, for instance, went to eastern Europe.  But those in Siberia and in the Russian Far East settled in Harbin, Hankow and Shanghai, among other cities in China , where they felt safe from the clutches of Communism.

 

            Their stay in these Chinese cities was not for long, however.  After World War II, when China was freed from the Japanese, the Chinese civil war between the Communists under Mao-Tse Tung and the Nationalists under Chiang Kai Shek resumed.  By 1948, the Communists, who were supported by Russia, took control of northern China, forcing hundreds of Russian émigrés in Peking, Hankow, Tiensin and nearby cities to transfer to Shanghai.  But it was clear to them that Mao’s army would eventually overrun the whole of China and place it under a Communist rule. 

 

Meanwhile, it came also to their knowledge that, as a result of the Yalta Conference, the White Russians in Europe were being repatriated by force to Russia.  It was claimed, for instance, that in Austria, around 40,000 Cossacks were deported to Russian labor camps.  In Harbin itself, the Russian Army and the Secret Police (KGB) were already arresting and deporting Russian emigrants to forced labor camps.  Indeed, all White Russians living in China were advised to leave.

 

Alarmed by these developments, Gregory Bologoff, a Cossack, formerly a colonel in the Russian Imperial Army (which opposed Communism), became involved in organizing the White Russians in China into the Russian Emigrants’ Association.  As President, he rallied the Russian émigrés to organize the evacuation of their fellow White Russians to a safe and secure place.

 

Thousands supported him, declaring their irreconcilability with Communism.  Rather than having themselves subjected to a communist dictatorship either in Russia or in China, they decided to leave Shanghai.  Col. Bologoff appealed to the United Nations, to the International Refugees Organization (IRO) and to all countries in the free world to save them and give them asylum.

 

The Philippines , under Pres. Elpidio Quirino responded—actually, ours was the only country that did—to the appeal, and offered to the refugees the island of Tubabao , Guiuan.  And, through an arrangement made and facilitated by the IRO, to the island they did come.  (Later on, Quirino himself, as well as Senator Noland and Orthodox Archbishop John Maximovitch, visited the camp to express his concern and solidarity to the refugees.)

 

Though almost uninhabited when the first batch of refugees came, Tubabao, a triangular-shaped island south of Guiuan, was, as described in HyperWar, formerly a Quonset “city” with mess halls, recreation facilities, churches, and utilities for 10,000 men.  It was chosen by the American forces as a navy receiving station.  It was connected to Guiuan by a 515-ft long bridge of timber, 22 ft wide. 

 

However, save for the bridge, a few Quonset huts, a rusty pontoon serving as pier, a nonfunctioning walk-in refrigerator, an abandoned large mechanized laundry, and a dilapidated church, there was hardly any trace of the “city” when the first White Russians arrived in January 1949, 49 of them (the “advance echelon”) by air on the 12th, and 492 by sea on the 23rd, on board  S.S. Hwa Lien.

 

As refugees poured in, the practically uninhabited island of Tubabao was transformed into what was known as Russian Refugee Camp.   It was divided into 14 districts, each district taking care of its own needs.  Eventually, electricity, hospital, sanatorium, supply office, cemetery and churches of every denomination were set up.  After almost three years of refuge in the island and of waiting for immigration officers, they were eventually admitted to France, Chile and other South American countries, the United States and Australia, but the great majority was finally settled in the U.S. 

 

However unpleasant may have been their life in the island, especially for the elderly, the White Russians were freed from the power of Josef Stalin and Mao Tse-Tung.  Indeed, their very lives were saved from pogrom and certain death.  Obviously, their plight was better than of those who chose to remain in China , for whom life in the 1950s was almost intolerable.*


Pages:12